Ascent Reference Guide

Software Reference Guide

Revision 25/09/2013

Legal

Ascent Reference Guide

COPYRIGHT © 1999-2013 Bently Nevada and GE Energy (New Zealand) Ltd.

All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of GE Energy (New Zealand) Ltd. For information, contact:

GE Energy

Level 2, 22 Moorhouse Avenue

Christchurch

New Zealand

Email [email protected]

Disclaimer

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Names and data used in examples are fictitious unless otherwise noted. This document is distributed as is, without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, respecting the contents of this document, including but not limited to implied warranties for the document’s quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular purpose. Neither GE Energy (New Zealand) Ltd nor its employees, dealers, or distributors shall be liable to the user of this document or any other person or entity with respect to any liability, loss, or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by this document.

Contents


Contents

SECTION 1 — OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 1

INSTALL ASCENT .........................................................................................................................1 System Requirements ...................................................................................................2 Upgrade from Previous Version ...............................................................................2 Software Licensing .........................................................................................................3

Terminal Server Support ............................................................................................. 4 Install Ascent using Software License ..................................................................4

Upgrade Legacy Dongle License ............................................................................. 7 License Manager .............................................................................................................9

Add Instrument to Licence ...................................................................................... 11 Upgrade or Edit License ........................................................................................... 13 Uninstall Software License...................................................................................... 14 Program Hardware Dongle .................................................................................... 15

Set Ascent Interface Language ............................................................................. 19 Change language in Ascent ................................................................................... 20 Change Windows Locale Setting .......................................................................... 20

DATA STRUCTURE AND STORAGE CAPACITY....................................................................... 21 Storage Capacity .......................................................................................................... 22

DATA STORAGE LOCATION .................................................................................................... 23 KEY TERMS AND CONCEPTS .................................................................................................. 24

SECTION 2 — BASIC OPERATION ................................................................. 28

START ASCENT ......................................................................................................................... 28 LAYOUT ..................................................................................................................................... 28 Navigator ......................................................................................................................... 28 Navigator List ................................................................................................................. 30 Creation Palette ............................................................................................................ 30

CHARTS ..................................................................................................................................... 32 CREATE DATABASE .................................................................................................................. 34 CREATE FOLDER....................................................................................................................... 35 DELETE FOLDER ....................................................................................................................... 36 OPEN FOLDER .......................................................................................................................... 37 SELECT DIFFERENT DATABASE .............................................................................................. 38 BUTTON TOOLBAR CAPTIONS ............................................................................................... 38 CREATE MACHINE USING BUILD MODE............................................................................... 39 Create Machine ............................................................................................................. 40 Add Point .......................................................................................................................... 41 Add Measurement Location ................................................................................... 42 Copy Point ....................................................................................................................... 43

Contents


Create Parameter Set / Schedule Entry ............................................................ 44 6Pack Recordings ........................................................................................................ 48

Notes on 6Pack Recordings.................................................................................... 48 Configure 6Pack Recording .................................................................................... 49 Estimate Measurement Recording Time ............................................................ 49 Add Photo Image to Machine ................................................................................ 50

Notes .................................................................................................................................. 51 Add Note to Machine ................................................................................................ 51 Add Note to Point, Location, or Recording......................................................... 51 Archive Note ................................................................................................................ 51 Delete Note .................................................................................................................. 52

Add Bearing to Point .................................................................................................. 52 Define your own Bearings ....................................................................................... 54 Add Gear to Point ....................................................................................................... 54

APPLY DIFFERENT ROTATIONAL SPEEDS ACROSS MACHINE ............................................ 55 COPY ITEM ................................................................................................................................ 57 DELETE ITEM ............................................................................................................................. 57 EDIT MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................................... 57 Generate New Measurement ................................................................................. 58 Create New Measurement Based on Previous Recording....................... 58

AUTOSAVE ................................................................................................................................ 58 Save and Undo Changes .......................................................................................... 59

NAVIGATOR TREE..................................................................................................................... 59 Use Navigator ................................................................................................................ 59 Navigator List ................................................................................................................. 60 Sort Navigator ............................................................................................................... 61 Navigator Search Filter ............................................................................................. 62

Create / Edit / Delete filter ....................................................................................... 63 Delete Existing Filter .................................................................................................. 64 Filter Recordings......................................................................................................... 64 Hide Detailed Recording Information .................................................................. 65

Hide Recording in Navigator .................................................................................. 65 Select Multiple Items................................................................................................... 66

Select Sequential Items............................................................................................ 66 Select Non-sequential Items .................................................................................. 66 Archive Notes and Recordings .............................................................................. 66

CUSTOMIZE WORK AREA ....................................................................................................... 67 CREATE ROUTE......................................................................................................................... 68 Add Instrument to Ascent ........................................................................................ 70 Automatically Set Instrument IP Address ........................................................ 71

Instrument Options ................................................................................................... 71 TRANSFER FOLDERS TO INSTRUMENT .................................................................................. 72 Transfer Recordings to Ascent Database ........................................................ 74

MAINTAIN DATA INTEGRITY ................................................................................................... 76

Contents


USE EXAMPLE DATA................................................................................................................ 77

SECTION 3 — REPORTS ................................................................................. 78

GENERATE REPORT ................................................................................................................. 78 ALARM REPORT ........................................................................................................................ 80 BALANCING REPORT ............................................................................................................... 81 DETAILED EXCEPTION REPORT .............................................................................................. 81 LAST 8 MEASUREMENTS ........................................................................................................ 82 LAST MEASUREMENT REPORT ............................................................................................... 82 MACHINE ASSESSMENT REPORTS......................................................................................... 83 Machine Assessment Summary reports ........................................................... 83 Configure Machine Assessment Report Database ...................................... 84 Run Machine Assessment Report ........................................................................ 85 Access Machine Assessment Report .................................................................. 88

Access Report in Ascent .......................................................................................... 88 Access Machine Assessment Report using Advanced Reporting editor . 88

Open Advanced Reporting Editor ........................................................................ 88 Differentiate between Machine Assessment Reports ................................ 89 Publish Machine Summary Report ...................................................................... 90 Publish Machine Assessment Report ................................................................. 93 Add Company Logo to Published Report ......................................................... 94

Edit XML File ................................................................................................................. 95 Open Existing Machine Assessment Report Database ............................. 96 Back up Machine Assessment Report Database ......................................... 97 Restore Machine Assessment Report Database........................................... 98

Restore using Backup Options .............................................................................. 98 Restore using Text Menu ......................................................................................... 99

Add Machine to Report ............................................................................................. 99 Configure Database Association ....................................................................... 100 Reassociate Report .................................................................................................. 101

MACHINE SUMMARY REPORT ............................................................................................. 105 NOTES REPORT ..................................................................................................................... 105 ROUTES DUE REPORT .......................................................................................................... 106 STRUCTURE AND ROUTE REPORTS .................................................................................... 106 AUTOMATED REPORTS ......................................................................................................... 109

SECTION 4 — PLOT DATA ........................................................................... 111

USE CHARTS .......................................................................................................................... 111 Zoom and Pan ............................................................................................................ 112

Pan ................................................................................................................................ 112 Zoom in on Rectangular Area .............................................................................. 112 Zoom Out .................................................................................................................... 113 Zoom in Horizontally ............................................................................................... 113

Contents


Zoom in Vertically .................................................................................................... 113 Zoom using Mouse Wheel..................................................................................... 114

Use Cursors .................................................................................................................. 114 Place Cursor on Chart............................................................................................. 114 Toggle between Cursors ........................................................................................ 115 Move Cursors using Arrow Keys ......................................................................... 115 Control Sideband / Orders Display ..................................................................... 115 Move Between Plots on Chart.............................................................................. 116 Switch off Cursor ...................................................................................................... 116 Snap to Peak .............................................................................................................. 116 Linked Cursors .......................................................................................................... 117 Disable Linked Zooming and Cursors................................................................ 119

Plot Multiple Recordings on One Chart .......................................................... 121 Choose which Recordings to Display .............................................................. 122 Chart Modes ................................................................................................................ 123

Normal Chart Mode ................................................................................................. 124 Waterfall Chart Mode ............................................................................................. 125 Stacked Chart Mode................................................................................................ 126

Create On-chart Remarks ..................................................................................... 126 Maintain Library of Frequently Used On-chart Remarks ............................ 127 Move On-chart Remarks ....................................................................................... 127 Spread Out Overlapping Remarks ...................................................................... 128 Edit or Delete On-chart Remark .......................................................................... 128

Define RPM of Recording....................................................................................... 128 Use Ascent to Calculate RPM ............................................................................... 128

View Data in Orders or Revolutions ................................................................. 129 View Chart in Orders ............................................................................................... 129

Display Fault Frequencies ..................................................................................... 129 Remove Fault Frequency from Chart ................................................................ 131 Copy Fault Frequency to Additional Point ....................................................... 131 Nudge Fault Frequencies ...................................................................................... 132 Define your Own Fault Frequencies................................................................... 132 Manage Fault Frequencies ................................................................................... 134

Set and Display Baselines ..................................................................................... 135 Display Baseline RMS Values on vb Instrument ............................................. 135

Waveform Analysis .................................................................................................. 136 Waveform Audio Playback ................................................................................... 138 True Peak-to-Peak ................................................................................................... 138 Averaged Crest Factor ........................................................................................... 139

Convert Waveforms to Spectra .......................................................................... 140 Long Time Waveforms ........................................................................................... 140 Set Measurement Unit Preferences ................................................................. 141

Switch Between Hz and CPM ............................................................................... 142 Switch Between Velocity, Acceleration, and Displacement ....................... 142 View Electrical Current Spectra in dB ................................................................ 142

Contents


Customize Scale of Charts .................................................................................... 144 Left and Bottom Axis Scaling ............................................................................... 145 Ignore Hz Below ....................................................................................................... 147 Y-Margin Percentage .............................................................................................. 148 Set Fixed Axis Scale Permanently ....................................................................... 149 Remove Fixed Axis Scaling / Reset Auto-scaling ........................................... 149

Hide Peaks .................................................................................................................... 150 Hide Frequency in Harmonic Series .................................................................. 150 Hide Sidebands ......................................................................................................... 152

VIEWS ..................................................................................................................................... 153 How Views Work ....................................................................................................... 159 Convert View to Image ........................................................................................... 160

TREND DATA ......................................................................................................................... 160 Trend Data .................................................................................................................... 162 Choose Data Types for Trend Chart................................................................. 163 Use Cursors with Trend Charts .......................................................................... 166 Single Frequency Trending ................................................................................... 167

Additional submenu options ................................................................................ 168 ORBIT PLOTS ......................................................................................................................... 170 Workflow ....................................................................................................................... 172 Set up Schedule Entries.......................................................................................... 173

Create Machine ........................................................................................................ 173 Create Point ............................................................................................................... 174 Create Measurement Locations.......................................................................... 175 Create Schedule Entry for Each Measurement Location ............................ 176

Create Route ................................................................................................................ 176 Review Orbit+Waveform Recordings .............................................................. 177

BODE PLOTS .......................................................................................................................... 178 Set up Measurements ............................................................................................. 178 Create Bode Plot ........................................................................................................ 178 Change Size of Plot .................................................................................................. 178 Analyze Bode Plot ..................................................................................................... 179

Select Different Harmonics ................................................................................... 179 MODAL ANALYSIS AND CROSS CHANNEL SPECTRUM (ODS) DATA ............................ 180 Modal Impact Charts ............................................................................................... 181 Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) Chart ............................................................. 183

PRINT CHARTS AND REPORTS ............................................................................................ 184 SCHEMES ............................................................................................................................... 186 Change Colors for Printer and Screen ............................................................ 187

Restore Default Schemes ...................................................................................... 188 Change Chart Plot Line Styles ............................................................................. 188

Edit Existing Pen ....................................................................................................... 188 Delete Existing Pen .................................................................................................. 188 Create New Pen ........................................................................................................ 189

Contents


Change Pen Display Order .................................................................................... 189 KEYBOARD SHORTCUT KEYS .............................................................................................. 190 General ........................................................................................................................... 190 Navigator ...................................................................................................................... 190 Chart ................................................................................................................................ 191 Cursors ........................................................................................................................... 192

SECTION 5 — ALARMS ................................................................................. 193

CHECK ALARM STATUS ........................................................................................................ 194 Check Alarms Automatically when New Recordings Received from Instrument .................................................................................................................... 194 Channel Inoperative Alarms ................................................................................ 195

BAND, CREST FACTOR, AND TRUE PEAK-TO-PEAK ALARMS ........................................ 196 Peak Band Alarms .................................................................................................... 197 Power Band Alarms ................................................................................................. 198 Waveform Crest Factor Alarms.......................................................................... 199 Waveform True Peak-to-Peak Alarms ............................................................ 199 Draw Individual Band Alarms on Chart ......................................................... 199

Change Alarm Threshold ....................................................................................... 200 Change Start or Stop Frequency ........................................................................ 200 Create Power Band Alarms................................................................................... 201

Edit Individual Band Alarm ................................................................................... 201 Select Measurement Units of Band Alarms..................................................... 203 Hide or Display Band Alarms................................................................................ 203 Hide or Display Text Descriptions on Band Alarms ...................................... 203 Remove Band Alarm ............................................................................................... 204 Resize Band Alarm Display Area for Power Bands ....................................... 204 Rescale Band Alarm Display Area (left axis scale) ......................................... 204

Exceed Band, Crest Factor, or Peak-to-Peak Alarm................................. 205 Trend Band Alarms .................................................................................................. 208

ENVELOPE ALARMS .............................................................................................................. 211 Add Envelope Alarms to Chart ........................................................................... 212 Edit Individual Envelope Alarm .......................................................................... 213

Readjust Envelope Margins .................................................................................. 213 Change Alarm Level ................................................................................................ 213 Manually Edit Envelope on Chart ........................................................................ 214 Add Another Envelope ............................................................................................ 214

Exceed Envelope Alarm ......................................................................................... 215 Trend Envelope Alarms .......................................................................................... 217

OVERALL RMS ALARMS ...................................................................................................... 218 SET ALARM FOR NUMERIC DATA SCHEDULE ENTRY ...................................................... 219 USE MORE DETAILED ALARM THRESHOLD ...................................................................... 220 CREATE ALARM TEMPLATE .................................................................................................. 221

Contents


Create Peak and Power Band Template ....................................................... 222 Create Envelope Template ................................................................................... 224 Apply Alarm Template to Additional Schedule Entries ........................... 226 Use Template to Edit Existing Alarm Thresholds ....................................... 227 Edit Alarms Globally................................................................................................. 228 Edit Individual Alarms ............................................................................................. 229 Delete Alarm Templates and Alarms .............................................................. 230

Delete Template and Associated Alarms ......................................................... 231

SECTION 6 — ADDITIONAL FEATURES ..................................................... 232

USE PARAMETER SETS/SCHEDULE ENTRIES .................................................................... 232 Edit existing schedule entry ................................................................................. 232 Create new schedule entry .................................................................................. 232 Reminders ..................................................................................................................... 233 Tabs ................................................................................................................................. 234 Fmin ................................................................................................................................. 235 Orders-based Parameter Set .............................................................................. 236

Create orders-based parameter set.................................................................. 236 Edit Parameter Set.................................................................................................... 237 Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries on a Single Folder, Machine, Point, or Location ................................................................................................................... 238 Clean up Parameter Sets and Schedule Entries ........................................ 241 Keypad Schedule Entries ....................................................................................... 242

Create Keypad Schedule Entry ............................................................................ 243 Create your Own Units ........................................................................................... 244 Edit Value after Collection ..................................................................................... 245 Attached File Schedule Entry ............................................................................... 245

Create Attached File Schedule Entry ................................................................. 246 Create Attached File Measurement ................................................................... 247

Manage Attached Files ........................................................................................... 248 View File ...................................................................................................................... 248 Delete File ................................................................................................................... 248 Export File ................................................................................................................... 249 Add file ......................................................................................................................... 249

Average Value Schedule Entry............................................................................ 249 Create Average Value Schedule Entry .............................................................. 250

Tachometer Schedule Entry ................................................................................. 251 Create Tachometer Schedule Entry ................................................................... 252 Keyphasor Tachometer Voltage Settings ........................................................ 252 Specify Keyphasor settings in Parameter Set ................................................ 253

Pulse Count Schedule Entry ................................................................................. 254 Create Pulse Count Schedule Entry ................................................................... 254

CUMULATIVE PULSE COUNT SCHEDULE ENTRY .............................................................. 255

Contents


Enable Pulse Counting on 16-channel vbOnline ....................................... 256 Create Cumulative Pulse Count Schedule Entry ........................................ 258 Reset Cumulative Values on 16-channel vbOnline .................................. 260

ASSOCIATE PROCESS VARIABLES WITH VIBRATION RECORDINGS ............................... 261 DEMODULATION ................................................................................................................... 263 Demodulation Setup................................................................................................ 264

Access Suggested Suitable Demodulation Bandwidth ............................... 264 Determine Appropriate Bandwidth .................................................................... 265 Analyze Demodulation Data ................................................................................ 266

SET / UPDATE RPMS FOR MULTIPLE RECORDINGS ....................................................... 266 Define RPM Value ...................................................................................................... 266

1 — Using the 1X Peak ............................................................................................ 267 2 — Manually Enter RPM Value ............................................................................ 267 3 — Manual Entry with Predetermined Date Range ..................................... 268

Apply RPM Value ....................................................................................................... 269 LINEAR SPEED SUPPORT ..................................................................................................... 270 COLLECT RPM VALUE WHILE MEASURING...................................................................... 272 BASELINE RECORDINGS ....................................................................................................... 273 Display baseline value on portable SCOUT/vbSeries instrument ..... 273

Display last measurement's value instead of baseline value ................... 273 Remove baseline from instrument display ...................................................... 274

ORDER TRACKING................................................................................................................. 274 Enable Order Tracking ............................................................................................ 276 Tach pulses .................................................................................................................. 278

TRIAXIAL MEASUREMENTS .................................................................................................. 279 SENSOR SETTINGS ................................................................................................................ 280 BIAS VOLTAGE ENTER .......................................................................................................... 281 MANUALLY ENTER VIBRATION DATA ................................................................................ 283 CUSTOMIZE AXIS NAME ...................................................................................................... 285 Edit, Add, or Delete Location Names ............................................................... 285

TAGGING ................................................................................................................................ 286 Tag items ....................................................................................................................... 286

STORE REUSABLE COMPONENTS IN LIBRARY .................................................................. 287 Add Item to Library .................................................................................................. 287 Retrieve Item from Library .................................................................................... 288

Edit Library ................................................................................................................. 288 Open Entire Site ........................................................................................................ 288 Expand and Collapse Folders............................................................................... 289

BEARING DATABASE............................................................................................................. 290 Use Quick Search to Find Bearing .................................................................... 290 Advanced Search ...................................................................................................... 292

SECTION 7 — TRANSFER DATA .................................................................. 294

Contents


IMPORT AND EXPORT DATA ................................................................................................ 294 Export Data .................................................................................................................. 294 Import Data.................................................................................................................. 295 Import or Export to File via Command Line ................................................. 296 Create Batch File ....................................................................................................... 296 Log File ........................................................................................................................... 298 Additional Commands ............................................................................................ 299

Delete Existing Log File .......................................................................................... 299 Display Error Messages During Export / Import ............................................ 300

Export or Import Schedule Data ........................................................................ 302 IMPORT OR EXPORT AS XML .............................................................................................. 303 Export as XML ............................................................................................................. 303 Import as XML............................................................................................................. 304

REMOTE COMMS FUNCTIONALITY ..................................................................................... 305 Receive data from Remote Comms server into Ascent.......................... 305 Send data from Ascent to Remote Comms Server ................................... 306

OPC IMPORT ......................................................................................................................... 306 Configure Engineering Units and Scaling ..................................................... 308 Configure OPC Schedule Entry ........................................................................... 310

SERIAL DATA INPUT.............................................................................................................. 312 Configure Engineering Units and Scaling ..................................................... 313 Configure SDI Schedule Entry ............................................................................. 314 Apply SDI Schedule Entry ...................................................................................... 316

OFFLINE RECORDINGS WITH 16-CHANNEL VBONLINE ................................................. 317 Set up Offline Recording Intervals .................................................................... 318 Update configurations on several 16-channel vbOnline devices simultaneously ........................................................................................................... 320 Change Offline Measurement Global Interval............................................. 320 Clear Offline Recordings from 16-channel vbOnline ............................... 321 Identify Offline Measurements in Ascent ....................................................... 321

TEMPLATE MACHINES .......................................................................................................... 322 Create Template Machine ..................................................................................... 323 Export or Import Template File .......................................................................... 324

Export Template File ............................................................................................... 324 Import Template File ............................................................................................... 324 Create Child Machine ............................................................................................. 325 Update Child Machine ............................................................................................ 325 Apply Machine Template to Existing Machine................................................ 326 Preview Template Changes .................................................................................. 327

Change Template Name........................................................................................ 327 Release Child or Template Machine ................................................................ 328 Audit Template Database ..................................................................................... 329

GMT HANDLING AND TIME ZONES .................................................................................. 330

Contents


Edit Local Time Offset for Recording ............................................................... 330 Edit GMT Time Offset for vbOnline or Ranger ............................................. 330 Edit Windows System Time Zone ...................................................................... 330

CONFIGURE VBX000 INSTRUMENT COMMUNICATION .................................................. 331 Connect Instrument via Serial COMs ............................................................... 332 Reduce Settling Time ............................................................................................... 332 CPU Intensive Comms ............................................................................................ 333 Rush Data ..................................................................................................................... 333 Synchronize Instrument and PC Date and Time ....................................... 333

TROUBLESHOOT VBX NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS ..................................................... 333 Check Firewall Settings .......................................................................................... 334 Change Ethernet Network Address.................................................................. 334

SECTION 8 — MANAGE DATA STORAGE EFFECTIVELY........................... 335

DATA OPTIMIZATION (THINNING) ...................................................................................... 336 Database Optimization Event Logs ................................................................. 341

BACK UP DATABASE ............................................................................................................. 343 Automatic Periodic Backups ............................................................................... 344 Change Backup Directory ..................................................................................... 345 Back up Files to Shared Network Folder ....................................................... 345 Archive Large Database ........................................................................................ 345

Create Archive Database ...................................................................................... 346 Thin Source Database ............................................................................................ 347 Export Data from Source to Archive Database .............................................. 349 Import Data to Archive Database ...................................................................... 351

Thin and Compact Source Database .............................................................. 352 RESTORE ASCENT OR MACHINE ASSESSMENT REPORT DATABASE ............................. 353 Restore Ascent Database ...................................................................................... 353 Restore Machine Assessment Report Database........................................ 354

DATABASE MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 354 Where to Store Database Files ........................................................................... 355 Relocate Database ................................................................................................... 355 Reduce Database Size ............................................................................................ 356 Rebuild Database ...................................................................................................... 356

SECTION 9 — HANDLE LARGE AMOUNTS OF DATA WITH VIEWS ........ 357

WALKTHROUGH — CREATE YOUR OWN VIEWS .............................................................. 357 EG: Set up combined Waterfall and Trend View ........................................ 358

Edit Custom View ..................................................................................................... 362 DEFINE AUTOVIEW COMPONENTS .................................................................................... 363 Building Blocks ........................................................................................................... 364 Vibration Views .......................................................................................................... 365

Contents


Reports ........................................................................................................................... 365 Analysis .......................................................................................................................... 366

FURTHER CUSTOMIZE YOUR VIEW ..................................................................................... 366 ASSIGN KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS ........................................................................................ 367 REUSE PART OF EXISTING VIEW ......................................................................................... 368 SAVE CHANGES TO VIEW .................................................................................................... 369 Restore System Default Views ............................................................................ 369 Change View File Name ......................................................................................... 370

USE SELECTOR ...................................................................................................................... 370 EG: Using Selector ..................................................................................................... 371 Add Selector ................................................................................................................. 372

Add Selector to Existing Chart or Report .......................................................... 374 ASSIGN PRIORITY AND TARGET .......................................................................................... 375 DESIGN VIEW LAYOUT ......................................................................................................... 377 How Parts of a View Fit Together ..................................................................... 379 Change Layout ........................................................................................................... 381

Add New Component ............................................................................................. 381 Swap Positions of Two Components ................................................................. 381 Rename Component ............................................................................................... 382 Resize Component ................................................................................................... 382 Unsplit View (Delete Component) ....................................................................... 382

DELETE VIEW......................................................................................................................... 382

SECTION 10 — USE MACHINE BUILDER WIZARD .................................... 383

INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 383 WALKTHROUGH — THE PROVEN METHOD ..................................................................... 384 OVERALL CONDITION RATING ............................................................................................ 386 Select Overall Condition Rating.......................................................................... 387

SELECT CASES ....................................................................................................................... 388 Case G Type 1 ............................................................................................................. 389 Cases E and F .............................................................................................................. 393 Case A ............................................................................................................................. 396

SECTION 11 — STATISTICAL ALARMS ....................................................... 398

STATISTICAL ALARM OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 398 GENERATION PARAMETERS ................................................................................................. 402 APPLY PREDEFINED ALARMS .............................................................................................. 403 Create and Apply Alarms ...................................................................................... 404

REDEFINE THRESHOLDS FOR EXISTING ALARMS ............................................................. 408 Redefine Thresholds for Single Alarm ............................................................. 410

UPDATE ALARM THRESHOLDS ........................................................................................... 411 Update Thresholds for Single Alarm ................................................................ 412

APPLY STATISTICS TO ALARMS ........................................................................................... 412

Contents


Statistical Outliers ..................................................................................................... 413 OUTLIER DETECTION AND SUSPICIOUS RECORDINGS .................................................... 413 Suspicious Recordings (envelopes only) ........................................................ 413

STATISTICAL ALARM SETUP................................................................................................. 416 Alarm Wizard .............................................................................................................. 417 General Settings ........................................................................................................ 418 History Options........................................................................................................... 419 Family Options............................................................................................................ 420 Thresholds .................................................................................................................... 422 Envelope Options ...................................................................................................... 426 Statistics Options....................................................................................................... 428

CREATE STATISTICAL ALARM TEMPLATES ......................................................................... 430 EDIT STATISTICAL ALARM TEMPLATES .............................................................................. 431 MACHINE FAMILIES .............................................................................................................. 432 Create Machine Families ....................................................................................... 434 Edit Machine Family................................................................................................. 434 Delete Machine Family ........................................................................................... 435 Add / Remove Machine from Family ............................................................... 435

Remove Machine from Family ............................................................................. 435

SECTION 12 — ADMINISTRATIVE TASKS .................................................. 436

SET UP ASCENT FOR ACCESS BY NON-ADMINISTRATORS ............................................. 436 UNLOCK VBONLINE DEVICE FEATURES ............................................................................ 437 Unlock Additional vbOnline Channels ............................................................. 438 Add SDI Support to 16-channel vbOnline ..................................................... 440

CREATE AND MANAGE USER ACCOUNTS ......................................................................... 441 Example workflow for setting up user permissions ................................ 444 Set up user account ................................................................................................. 444 Log on to Ascent ........................................................................................................ 447 Log out of Ascent ...................................................................................................... 448

CONFIGURE ASCENT DIRECTORIES .................................................................................... 449 File Types ....................................................................................................................... 451 You might come across the following file types: ....................................... 451

UPGRADE INSTRUMENT USING PROFLASH ....................................................................... 452 Proflash SCOUT / vbSeries Portable Instrument ........................................ 453

APPLY LICENSE FOR FLEX FEATURE................................................................................... 454 BULK TASKS .......................................................................................................................... 455 MACHINE SPEED SETTINGS UTILITY .................................................................................. 456 DUNS NUMBERS ................................................................................................................. 458 SET UP INSTRUMENT PRINT FUNCTION ............................................................................ 459 NETWORK .............................................................................................................................. 460 Connect to Network Database ........................................................................... 468

Contents


Manage Multi-user Access ................................................................................... 469 Deadlock / Conflict / Overwrite Protection ...................................................... 470

SECTION 13 — TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................... 471

TROUBLESHOOT USB COMMUNICATIONS ....................................................................... 471 UPGRADE DATABASE GENERATES ISC ERROR ................................................................ 472 CONTACT TECHNICAL SUPPORT......................................................................................... 472

INDEX ............................................................................................................. 473

Section 1 — Overview

1


Ascent is a software application that complements the:

• SCOUT* family of portable vibration analyzing instruments and devices.

• vbSeries® family of portable vibration analyzing instruments and devices.

• vbOnline® and Ranger® family of permanently-mounted instruments and modules.

Ascent provides all the functionality needed to store and analyze the vibration data you take with a vbSeries portable or online instrument.

Ascent communicates with your instrument through your computer's serial, Ethernet, or USB ports. You can use the software to create machine lists and measurement setups, and then send these to your instrument.

Once your data has been collected, you can use Ascent to:

• View spectra, waveforms, and trends. • Create envelope and band alarms. • Generate reports to summarize information in your database

(e.g. a detailed exception report).

The Bearing archive is included with vbOnline, vb5, vb6, vb7, and vb8 packages, providing a large library of bearings and their associated fault frequencies. These fault frequencies can be overlaid on the spectra created in Ascent to help identify bearing problems.

Install Ascent

This section explains how to install Ascent.


2

System Requirements

The minimum system requirements for running Ascent are:

• Microsoft® Windows® XP® SP3, Server 2003®, Server 2008® R2.

• Vista® (32 or 64-bit), or 7® (32 or 64-bit) operating system. • Professional or Server version of Windows for AscentOPC,

AscentWatcher, and OnlineManager (Ascent Level 3). • 1 GHz 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor or faster. • 1 GB RAM for 32-bit machine / 2 GB RAM for 64-bit machine. • 1 GB available hard disk space. • CD-ROM-compatible optical drive. • Windows-compatible mouse, touchpad, or other pointing

device. • Unused USB or Ethernet port for instrument communication. • Microsoft .NET Framework® Version 3.5 SP1 or higher.

NOTE: Windows administrator privileges are required to install Ascent and register your licence key. If you are within a corporate or managed network you may need to contact your network administrator for assistance. Once installed, Windows administrator privileges are not required for using Ascent.

Upgrade from Previous Version

The Ascent installer will search all directories under C:\Program Files\ for previous installations. It will automatically overwrite (upgrade) previous software instances if any are detected.

If there is more than one previous version of Ascent installed on your computer, the installer will use the first version located as the upgrade path. Uninstall all other versions to prevent conflicts with the new Ascent installation.

If you are currently using a hardware dongle, please see the Upgrading a Legacy Dongle License section for instructions on upgrading to a software license.


3

Software Licensing

Ascent and its associated applications (AscentWatcher, AscentOPC and OnlineManager) must be licensed. The license file may reside:

• On an external hardware device (USB or Parallel dongle) attached to the host computer.

• In a software file stored on the host computer.

Without an appropriate license, imported data will be unusable. Key software features will be disabled.

A CLK (Commtest License Key) is used to activate and update your license file. A printed label bearing this 11-digit CLK is provided with CD-ROM installations. If you are installing software you have downloaded from the Commtest website, a CLK will be generated by Commtest Licensing via email when requested.

License storage on a single PC (rather than on a removable hardware dongle) is the default, preferred means of licensing. Hardware dongles that enable a single license to be transported between several computers must be requested by customers and will incur a supply fee.

If you are currently using a hardware dongle and a license acquired prior to the release of Ascent 2008 software, you may upgrade your license then transfer the new license to your current dongle and continue using it exactly as you have previously. During the upgrade process, the legacy license on your current dongle will be erased. It can then be replaced with the new upgraded license, if required.

NOTE: Dongle devices can only be used for licensing purposes. If erased during a license transfer to a PC, USB dongles cannot be reused as generic USB memory devices.


4

Terminal Server Support

If you wish to execute more than one instance of Ascent via multiple Terminal Server (Remote Desktop Server) sessions, you will need a multiple running instances license. Contact [email protected] for more information.

Install Ascent using Software License

To install Ascent and activate your software license (i.e. install Ascent without a hardware dongle):

1. Close all programs you have open on your PC. 2. Insert the Ascent CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. 3. Wait for the Ascent installation page to open in your default web

browser OR run the Ascent (version...).exe program located in the root directory of the installation CD-ROM.

4. Select an installation language from the Installation Language window.

5. Click OK.

NOTE: If you intend to use only the OnlineManager, AscentOPC, or AscentWatcher applications, and you wish to use a non-English interface, you must also select Ascent during the installation process. Interface languages for these applications must be set globally in Ascent (see Setting the Software's Interface Language). There are no options for independently selecting interface languages in AscentWatcher, AscentOPC, or OnlineManager. Once you have selected the language in Ascent, you can uninstall it if required.

6. Follow the instructions on your screen to complete the installation. 7. Start Ascent when the installation is complete — The License window

opens. 8. Click the Get License button — The Licence Management window

opens. 9. Click the Get/Update License button. If you are a legacy user, and

you have a hardware dongle connected (that has been upgraded previously using the Upgrading a Legacy Dongle License procedure), you may now select whether you wish to install a software (machine) license or a hardware (dongle) license. If you do NOT have a dongle (a more common user scenario) only one option, Activate license on machine, will be available to you.

10. Click the Next button — The Request License window opens.


5

11. Enter your license key in the Commtest License Key field. 12. Tick the checkboxes beside the applications you wish to activate.

NOTE: Only select the applications you are licensed for. Adding unlicensed features will cause the activation to fail.

13. Click Next.

NOTE: The license key is printed on a sticker attached to the inside cover of the CD-ROM installation disk case.

NOTE: The Next button will only become active after an 11-character key has been entered in the Commtest License Key field.

14. Choose your preferred license acquisition method by ticking the appropriate checkbox.

15. Click Next:

• If you selected Get license automatically over Internet, the license will be obtained immediately over the Internet and installed. Click Finish > OK to close the License Management window. You can now move to the next topic, Adding Instruments to Your License.

• If you selected the Get license manually from the Commtest website option, you will be presented with further instructions: a. Click the Generate License Request File button. b. Save the text (.txt) file to your computer. c. Transfer the file to a computer that is connected to the

Internet. d. Navigate to https://licensing.commtest.co.nz

https://licensing.commtest.co.nz on the computer that is connected to the Internet.

e. Follow the instructions provided on the website to generate a license key file.

f. Save the key file on your computer and transfer this file to the Ascent host computer.

g. Close the Request License window. h. Click the Browse button in the License Manager under the

Management tab. i. Locate and select the new key file. j. Click Import to import the key file.


6

Installing Ascent using a software license


7

Upgrade Legacy Dongle License

This procedure is for users currently using a legacy (Parallel or USB) hardware dongle who want to upgrade their license. Upgrading enables access to newer Ascent features that cannot be accessed using an older license. The steps described below need to be performed only once. Once completed, the existing dongle license will be erased and an upgraded license installed on the host computer. If you wish to continue using a hardware dongle, the new license can be transferred to the dongle using the procedure described in Program Your Hardware Dongle.

NOTE: Ensure your hardware dongle is connected to your computer's Parallel or USB port before proceeding. Your current license must be valid or the upgrade process will fail. Contact Commtest customer support if your current license has expired.

1. Start Ascent with your current hardware dongle attached to the computer.

2. Click Continue to operate Ascent using your current dongle license without upgrading. If you wish to upgrade your license (highly recommended) click Request License. An email will be generated containing your dongle details. You may also optionally provide your instrument serial number. Send the email and you will receive an email response containing a CLK (license key) from Commtest. This may take several business hours. Once you have sent the email license request, close Ascent and wait for your license key, or click Continue to continue using the hardware dongle.

3. Once you have received an email reply containing your CLK: a. Ensure you have an active Internet connection and connect

your dongle. b. Restart Ascent. c. Click the Transfer License button. d. Enter your CLK and follow the onscreen instructions to upgrade

your license.

NOTE: All data on your dongle will be erased during the upgrade process. The new software license can, however, be transferred back to the dongle once the upgrade process is complete.


8

Upgrading a legacy dongle license


9

License Manager

The License Manager is used to control all aspects of your software license. You can use the Manager to add, update, or remove your license, and to view the status and features permitted by your current license level.

The License Management window has the following tabs:

• License — Use this section of the License Manager to view your license details including your license key, license expiration date, and Ascent software level. Click the Customer Details button to update your contact details (Internet connection required). Click Activation Summary to view your current license features and the number of used/available license seats.

• Management — Use this section of the Manager to:

• Add a new license. • Remove your license from a dongle or computer. • Update your software license when manually using the

Commtest License Server — This is for license updates without a direct Internet connection.

• Instruments — You can use this section of the Manager to:

• View the instruments you are able to access with your license.

• Add new instruments to your license.


10

Using the license manager


11

Add Instrument to Licence

Once your license has been activated, you can add an instrument, or instruments, to it. To do this:

1. Select Help > License Management — The License Management window opens.

2. Select the Instruments tab. 3. Click the Add Instrument button — If you are using a hardware

dongle and you have NOT upgraded your license, you can upgrade your dongle license. If you do NOT have a hardware dongle attached and instead use a software license stored on the PC, only one option—Update license on machine—will be available to you.

4. Click Next — The Add new vb Instrument window displays. 5. Enter your instrument serial number in the vb Serial Number field —

The serial number is located on a label attached to the rear panel of your instrument and on the QA card supplied with it.

6. Enter the instrument QA date in the QA Date field — This date is provided on the QA card supplied with the instrument. The date must be entered in YYYY-MM-DD format.

7. Click Next. 8. Tick the required checkbox to select your preferred license

acquisition method: • Tick the first checkbox if you computer is connected to the

Internet. • Tick the second checkbox if your computer is NOT connected to

the Internet, or if your network is behind a firewall, use the second option.


12

9. Click Next:

• If you selected Add instrument automatically over Internet, the license will be updated immediately over the Internet and installed. Click OK then Finish, then OK to close the License Management window. You can now send and receive data between Ascent and your instrument.

• If you selected Add instrument manually from the Commtest website, you will see a new window with further instructions:

10. Click Generate License Request File. 11. Save the text file to your computer. Transfer the file to an Internet-

connected computer. 12. Browse to https://licensing.commtest.co.nz

https://licensing.commtest.co.nz on the Internet-connected computer.

13. Follow the instructions provided on the website to generate a license key file (Get/Update License).

14. Save the CLK (key) file on your computer. 15. Transfer this file to the Ascent host computer. 16. Click Browse in the License Manager under the Management tab. 17. Locate and select the new key file. 18. Click Import to import the key file. 19. Click OK then Finish once the license has been updated. 20. Click OK to close the License Management window — You can now

send and receive data between Ascent and your instrument.

Add new vb Instrument window


13

Upgrade or Edit License

If you have purchased a license upgrade to access more software features or capabilities, you must update your existing license. Doing so will activate any new software or hardware capabilities. Any new features will not be activated or available to you until Ascent has communicated with the License Server and your license's new capabilities have been programmed.

Follow the license installation procedure described in Install the Software Using a Software License. Repeating this process will also update your license. If you are using a hardware dongle, see the Upgrading a Legacy Dongle License and Program Your Hardware Dongle procedures for the required dongle update steps.

NOTE: You must perform an update when your license expires and you have requested and received your free license extension. Doing so enables Ascent to communicate with the Commtest License Server, activate the extension, and set a new license expiration date.


14

Uninstall Software License

You may wish to uninstall your software license in order to:

• Transfer Ascent to another computer • Decommission or upgrade your PC hardware • Indefinitely uninstall Ascent for storage • Switch between a PC- and dongle-based license

To uninstall your software license:

1. Select Help > License Management. 2. Select the Management tab. 3. Click Remove License — If you have a hardware dongle connected,

you may select whether you wish to remove a software (PC) license or a hardware (dongle) license. If you do not have a dongle connected only one option, Remove license from machine, will be available to you.

4. Select the license components (applications) you wish to remove. 5. Click Next. 6. Choose your preferred license removal method by ticking one of the

two checkboxes: • Tick the first checkbox if your computer is connected to the

Internet. • Tick the second checkbox if your computer is NOT connected to

the Internet. 7. Click Next:

• If you selected Remove license automatically over Internet the license will be removed immediately over the Internet.

• If you selected Remove license manually from the Commtest website option you will see a new window containing further instructions:

8. Click Generate Remove License Request File. 9. Save the text file on your computer. 10. Transfer the file to a computer that is connected to the Internet. 11. Navigate to https://licensing.commtest.co.nz

https://licensing.commtest.co.nz on the computer that is connected to the Internet.

12. Select the Remove License option on the website. 13. Follow the instructions provided on the website to deregister your

license.


15

Program Hardware Dongle

This topic applies to users who have upgraded their license but wish to use a hardware dongle rather than a PC-based license file (i.e. you wish to transfer your license from your computer to a detachable hardware dongle for use with multiple computers).

NOTE: If you have a single license, you can use either a PC-based license OR a dongle license, not both. If you have previously installed your license on your PC, you must uninstall it by selecting Remove License from the Management tab in the License Manager window before transferring the license to a dongle device.

To access many of the newer features in Ascent, you will need to upgrade to the new license. In order to upgrade and continue using your dongle you will need to:

1. Install a software license using a CLK or Upgrade your Legacy Dongle License — This will upgrade your license, transfer the new license to your computer, and remove your old license from the dongle.

2. Uninstall the software license from your computer. 3. Transfer the license to your hardware dongle (as described below).

NOTE: You cannot upgrade older licenses contained on dongles directly to the new license type. You will first need to upgrade to a new software (machine) license, then uninstall the new license and transfer it to the hardware dongle.


16

Transfer license to Dongle

You can transfer your upgraded license from your computer to the dongle (and vice-versa) as many times as you wish using the same Uninstall License, Add License sequence and your CLK. Once you have uninstalled your software license from your computer:

1. Connect you dongle. 2. Select Help > License Management. 3. Select the Management tab. 4. Click Get/Update License — The License Method window displays. 5. Select the Activate license on dongle option. 6. Click Next button — The Request License window opens. 7. Enter your license key in the Commtest License Key field.

TIP: You can find your license key on your CD-ROM installation disk. NOTE: If you do not have a license key, click the No license key button — A license request email will be generated. The email contains your dongle serial number and any associated instrument serial numbers. Send the email and you will receive a return email from Commtest License Support containing your license key. This may take several business hours.

8. Tick the appropriate checkboxes to select the software applications you wish to activate.

NOTE: Ensure you only select the applications you are licensed for. Adding unlicensed features will cause the activation to fail.

9. Click Next. 10. Tick the appropriate checkbox:

• Tick the first checkbox if your computer is connected to the Internet.

• Tick the second checkbox if your computer is NOT connected to the Internet.


17

11. Click Next:

• If you selected Get license automatically over Internet, the license will be obtained immediately over the Internet and installed.

• If you selected Get license manually from the Commtest website you will see further instructions:

a. Click Generate License Request File. b. Save the text (.txt) file to your computer. c. Transfer the file to a computer that is connected to the Internet. d. Navigate to https://licensing.commtest.co.nz

https://licensing.commtest.co.nz. e. Follow the instructions provided on the website to generate a

license update file (Get/Update License). f. Save the CLK file generated through the license website on your

computer. g. Transfer the file to the Ascent host computer. h. Click Import License in the License Manager under the

Management tab. i. Navigate to the new key file. j. Click Import to import the key file — Your dongle license is now

installed.

Install Ascent using USB Security Dongle

You will need administrator rights on your PC to install Ascent.

To install Ascent using a USB security dongle:

1. Close all programs you have open on your PC. 2. Insert the Ascent CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. 3. Proceed using EITHER of these options:

• Wait for the Ascent installation menu to open in your default web browser > Select the appropriate installation option.

• Run the AscentSetup[VERSION].exe installation program located in the root directory of the CD-ROM.


18

Follow these steps once you have installed Ascent:

1. Connect the dongle to a USB port in your computer — The Found New Hardware wizard will open and use the 'Aladdin Key' drivers from the Ascent installer.

2. Start Ascent once the USB driver is installed. 3. Click Continue on the License window to start Ascent using your

existing dongle license — This completes the installation process.

NOTE: This is the process for Windows XP, Vista, 7, and Server 2003.

Troubleshoot Hardware Dongle Installation

When you start Ascent, it should automatically find the dongle. However, you will need to click Try Again if the:

• Installer finished normally

• Drivers seemed to install normally

• PC restarted normally (if a reboot was required)

• Dongle is connected and working normally according to the Windows Device Manager (no warning messages displayed)

• Dongle's red light is on (if you are using a USB dongle)

Click Continue to start Ascent — Ascent will re-evaluate the dongle and should start as normal.


19

Troubleshooting hardware dongle installation

Set Ascent Interface Language

Ascent can be viewed in several languages. Languages are license-controlled according to the software's region of purchase or destination. The following regional language packs are currently supported:

• English • Simplified Chinese • Russian • French • Japanese

The interface language you choose in Ascent will be used for all Ascent suite software. This includes the OnlineManager, AscentOPC, and AscentWatcher applications. These applications do not include the ability to change languages independently. All languages must be selected globally using Ascent.

If your language of choice is not available in your Ascent software installation, contact [email protected] to purchase language licenses. In some cases, language use may be restricted to specific regions.


20

Change language in Ascent

To change the language used in Ascent:

1. Select Options > Select Language > From compatible languages only.

NOTE: Selecting 'From compatible languages only' will display only those languages supported by your current Windows operating system configuration. If your preferred interface language is NOT displayed in the 'From compatible languages only' list of languages, but is displayed when selecting 'From any available languages', you will need to change your Windows locale setting.

2. Select the language you require from the list of available languages.

NOTE: Although all available interface languages available will display, you will only be able to activate the languages included in your current CLK license.

3. Click OK — Ascent will update and you will be notified that the language has changed.

Change Windows Locale Setting

If you wish to view Ascent in a non-Roman character set language such as Russian or Chinese, you must also change your Windows locale setting. See your Windows operating system documentation for more details or use the relevant set of instructions below.

NOTE: If you have already changed Ascent's display language, you will need to reapply this change once you have completed the steps below.

Windows XP

To change your Windows locale setting using Windows XP:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Regional and Language Options icon. 3. Select your location from the Locations dropdown field at the

bottom of the Regional Options tab. 4. Select the Advanced tab > Select your required language from the

Language for non-Unicode programs dropdown field. 5. Click OK — You will be asked to restart the computer.


21

Windows Vista

To change your Windows locale setting using Windows Vista:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Regional and Language Options icon. 3. Select the Location tab > Select your location from the dropdown

field. 4. Select the Keyboards and Languages tab > Select your required

language from the Choose a Display Language dropdown field. 5. Select the Administrative tab. 6. Click Change System Locale. 7. Select the required locale language > Apply the change. 8. Click Restart now.

Windows 7

To change your Windows locale setting using Windows 7:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click the Clock, Language and Region link. 3. Click the Region and Language link. 4. Select the Administrative tab. 5. Click Change System Locale. 6. Select your required language from the Current system locale

dropdown field. 7. Click OK. 8. Restart your computer (if required).

Data Structure and Storage Capacity

The data structure used in Ascent and portable instruments is hierarchical. At the highest level is the database. Every item of data in a database belongs to a particular site.

Each site in a database contains folders. Each folder can hold up to 200 machines on a vbX000 instrument. On a vb instrument, the number is unlimited.

Each machine contains a number of points. At each point, recordings can be made at any fixed number of axes.


22

Folders are used to contain your machine information. They are transferred between Ascent and your instrument using the Send and Receive functions.

Simplified data hierarchy

Storage Capacity

We recommend that you archive and delete recordings from your Ascent database when it reaches 2 GB in size.

You can create much larger data structures in the Ascent database than you can store on your instrument. You can create unlimited folders in Ascent, but some instruments will hold only a maximum of 30 folders at a time.

NOTE: This does not include vbX instruments, which can hold an almost unlimited number of folders.

To make the best use of the database storage capacity, you should set up as many machines in as many folders as you like. Once you have done this, you should only transfer the data you need during your next recording route or collection.

EG: You can transfer up to 30 folders to your instrument, collect the measurements, then send them back to Ascent. You can then erase the machines and recordings on your instrument and transfer another 30 folders across, repeating this as often as required.

MORE: See you Instrument Reference Guide for more information on your instrument's storage capacity.


23

Data Storage Location

Ascent stores information (machines, points, etc) in a database. For computers using Windows XP or Server 2003, the database's default location is:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Shared Documents or C:\Program Files\Commtest\Ascent.

For computers running a Windows Vista, Server 2008, and 7 operating systems. The database will be stored in C:\Users\Public\Documents by default.

To access files in Ascent, select Options > Explore Settings Folder. This will open Windows Explorer and display a list of all the files and folders in your installation of Ascent.


24

Key Terms and Concepts

The table outlines the key terms and concepts you need to understand in order to use Ascent effectively.

Term Image Description

Database

The Database is the top level of the Ascent hierarchy. A database holds the sites and machine structure you have set up (every item of data in Ascent is stored in a database). You can have multiple databases, but all sites must belong to the same database in order to share information between sites. Database files on your computer end with the extension .FDB (or .GDB in the case of older legacy Interbase databases).

Site

A Site contains folders that are used to store machine information. Every item of data in the database is contained in a folder. Each folder belongs to a particular site.

Edit a site

To edit a site:

1. Select Edit > Edit Site. 2. Enter data in the following required fields:

• Company name • Site name • DUNS code

NOTE: Entering data in the remaining fields is optional.

Folder

A Folder is used to hold a collection of machines. It represents the entire collection of information sent to, or received from, your instrument.


25

Machine

A Machine represents an actual machine on the factory floor or within a facility. Machines hold a collection of points and are stored in folders.

Point

A Point represents a position/region on a particular machine where vibration measurements will be taken. Bearings and gears can be defined at each point so that fault frequency information is available for all measurement locations on the point.

Measurement Location

A Measurement Location represents an actual place on the machine where you will place a sensor and take vibration measurements. The difference between different measurement locations at a point is the orientation of the sensor (the axes around the shaft on which the sensor is placed). There may be several measurement locations at a point, each using a different orientation/axis.

A machine with three measurement locations

Recording

A Recording represents a single, or series of, recorded vibration measurements (in the case of spectrum+waveform or 6Pack recordings, for example) and is labeled with the time, date, and a description of the type of measurement(s) taken.


26

Schedule Entry

A Schedule Entry represents a vibration recording that is scheduled to be taken.

A schedule entry ties a Parameter Set to a Measurement Location. The parameter set defines a general set of measurement parameters and the schedule entry specifies how the measurement should be taken at a particular location (which sensor to use, what the default RPM is etc).

You may have more than one schedule entry at a measurement location. For example, you may take a velocity recording and then (without moving the accelerometer) an acceleration recording.

Envelope Alarm

An Envelope Alarm defines an alarm region on the spectra. The alarm is triggered when any point in the spectrum exceeds the alarm threshold.

Band Alarm

Peak Band Alarms

Power Band Alarms

A Band Alarm defines a limited range of frequencies to monitor on a spectrum. A band alarm can be either Peak or Power based.

Peak Band Alarms detect when a spectral peak within the defined band goes above a certain value.

Power Band Alarms measure the overall RMS within the defined band and compare that against a threshold value.

Bearing

Bearing definitions can be added to points on your machines. Once the software knows the fault frequencies for a bearing, it can display fault frequency markers on spectra, enabling you to identify peaks related to that bearing.

Bearings can have notes attached and interchange information may also be available for them. Ascent comes with its own bearing database containing over 30 000 bearings.


27

Interchange Bearing

Where possible, the Commtest Bearing Archive will offer a list of bearings that are compatible with the bearing that is selected. This enables you to replace a bearing with a suitable alternative, should your chosen bearing be unavailable.

DISCLAIMER: While every effort has been made to ensure that bearing and bearing interchange information is valid and correct, no responsibility can be accepted for any damages caused as a result of the use of this information.

Gear

Gear definitions can be added to points on your machines. Once the software knows the fault frequencies for a gear, it can display fault frequency markers on spectra, enabling you to identify peaks related to that gear.

Sensor

A Sensor defines the name, type and sensitivity of a sensor used for data collection. You can store the calibration values and settling times of your sensors in both the software and your instrument.

Section 2 — Basic Operation

28


This section explains how to complete basic operations in Ascent.

Start Ascent

When you install Ascent, you can have a program shortcut created on your Desktop and in the Windows Start menu.

To open Ascent from the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Commtest > Ascent > Ascent.

Layout

This section outlines some of the key areas in Ascent.

Navigator

By default the navigator panel is located on the left in Ascent. You can use it to navigate through the data in a database.

If required you can display the navigator in the top half of the Ascent window instead. To access this option, Screen > Navigator on top.


29

Navigator — Default display

Displaying the navigator in the top half of the window


30

Navigator List

The navigator list displays all items associated with an item you select in the Navigator, including any notes and recordings.

Navigator List

Creation Palette

The creation palette contains shortcut buttons for routine tasks such as creating a bearing or adding a note.

If the creation palette is not visible, select Screen > Show Creation Palette to display it.

Hover on each button to view an explanation of what it does.


31

Creation palette


32

Charts

There are different types of charts in Ascent:

• Vibration charts are listed with a graph icon and support a greater number right-click menu options.

• Numeric charts are listed with a variety of icons and support fewer right-click menu options.


33

Example of right-click menu items available with vibration graph

Example of right-click menu items available with vibration graph


34

Create Database

If this is the first time you have created a database, we recommend you accept the default name and storage location so you can easily find the database if you need to. The default name and storage location is listed in Where is my Data Stored.

The default factory database contains all the information you need to start setting up your machines.

1. Select EITHER of these options to start creating your database: • Select File > Database > Create Database > Create New.

• Select Database > Create Database > Create New. 2. Select EITHER of these options according to your requirements:

• Local Machine — To create a local database (i.e. a database on the computer on which Ascent is installed). Click Browse to choose an alternative location or change the default database name (if required). If this is your first database, accept the default location.

• Network — To create a new database on a server or another networked machine. Enter the server name or IP address (e.g. MyServer or 192.168.1.1).

NOTE: The server address must have all leading and trailing back slashes removed. The path must be an 'absolute' and include correct drive mapping from the server's perspective rather than be a virtual server address. For example, 'C:\MyDatabase\Database.fdb' but not '\\Server\MyDatabase\Database.fdb'.

3. Click Next. 4. Tick the Add example data to the database checkbox if you are

creating an example database to experiment with Ascent's functionality. If not, leave this checkbox empty and continue to the next step.

5. Ensure the database location and name listed are correct. 6. Click Finish — You will be prompted to open the new database. 7. Select a Site or Folder. 8. Click OK to open it.


35

Creating a database

Create Folder

The rest of this section is presented as a tutorial to help familiarize you with the software. The instructions will guide you through some of the routine tasks you will perform when using Ascent and your portable instrument. You will learn how to set up machines, create routes, and transfer data between your computer and instrument.

Your first task is to create a folder. This will be used to hold a machine with four measurement locations. You will create these shortly.

1. Use EITHER of these methods to start creating a folder: 2. Select File > Open.

3. Click the Open button. 4. Click New > Select Folder.

NOTE: You may also create a new folder by right-clicking the navigator panel and selecting New > VB Datafolder.

5. Enter a folder name in the field (type over the default folder name). 6. Click OK to create the folder.

NOTE: Data folders are used to store machines.


36

Creating a new folder

Delete Folder

To delete a folder:

1. Select the folder. 2. Delete it using EITHER of these methods:

• Press Delete. • Right-click it > Select Delete.

3. Click Yes to confirm you wish to permanently delete the folder.


37

Open Folder

To open a folder:

1. Open a folder using EITHER of these methods: • Select File > Open.

• Click the Open button. 2. Double-click a folder to open it.

TIP: If you don't see any folders, click the expand icon beside one

of the site icons.

Opening a folder


38

Select Different Database

Ascent keeps track of the databases you use and enables you to quickly switch between these. A list of previously accessed databases is available from the dropdown field on the Open window.

To select a different database:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to open a folder: • Select File > Open.

• Click the Open button. 2. Click the arrow beside the Database field > Select the required

database. 3. Click OK.

NOTE: If the database has not been opened previously, click Change > Click Browse. Locate and select the database (.FDB format) > Click Open. Select a Datafolder or site > Click OK to open it.

Opening a different database

Button Toolbar Captions

If you are using a small monitor or running a non-English version of Ascent, some toolbar buttons might not display correctly on your screen. You can switch off the toolbar captions to reduce the width of buttons so they fit your screen better.

To switch off button captions, select Screen > Deselect Show Toolbar Captions.

Buttons with labels

Buttons without labels


39

Create Machine using Build Mode

You can use Build mode to build the structure of your machines. When you are in Build mode, placeholders will display in the navigator tree. You can use these to create new machines, points, measurement locations, and schedule entries. You can click the placeholder to create the item.

You can click the Build button to toggle Build mode on or off.

Activating Build mode

Your first task will be to create a machine with two points and two measurement locations at each point. Soon you will learn how to:

• Copy parts of your machine structure to save time. • Add a photographic image for identification purposes. • Create a parameter set and schedule entries to specify the

types of measurements that will be carried out at each machine location.


40

Create Machine

To create a machine:

1. Click Build to activate Build mode — If you are licensed to use The Proven Method, the Machine Builder wizard will display. You can use this to create machines with preset alarms. Instructions for using the wizard are provided later in the manual. For now, we are going to manually create our machines manually.

2. If the Machine Builder wizard is open, click the Manual Build Mode link to close it — The currently open folder, Drying Machines, is at the top of the navigator tree. The placeholders beneath it are what you will use to create your machine structure.

3. Select [Add Machine] — The placeholder turns blue to indicate it can now be edited.

4. Enter Blower #8 to create a machine with this name > Press Enter — The machine structure opened out to reveal placeholders for creating the points and measurement locations on this machine. We will add these next. A new [Add Machine] placeholder now displays at the bottom of your structure ready for you to create more machines in this folder if they are needed.

Example navigator

Using build mode to create a machine


41

Add Point

To add a point:

1. Click the [Add Point] placeholder that belongs to Blower #8. 2. Enter Drive End > Press Enter to create the point — Several new

placeholders now display.

NOTE: Next you will add measurement locations to the Drive End point.

Adding a point


42

Add Measurement Location

To add a measurement location:

1. Select the first [Add Measurement Location] > Select Horizontal. 2. Click OK to create a horizontal location at the Drive End point. 3. Select [Add Measurement Location] below the one you have just

created > Select Vertical. 4. Click OK.

NOTE: You can define a new location name by selecting <other> from the dropdown field, clicking OK, then entering a name. See Customizing Axis Names to learn more about editing existing location names and creating new ones. NOTE: If you are taking a triaxial measurement at the location, right-click the new location > Select Edit. In the 'Measurement Location' window, select an axis from the 'Triax Axis' dropdown field. The measurement axis will display beside the location in the navigator tree. For example, a measurement on the X axis on the location 'Vertical' will display as 'Vertical[X]'.

Adding a measurement location


43

Copy Point

You can duplicate the Drive End point (along with its two locations) to make the Other End point. Doing this creates a machine with four measurement locations. Once you have copied a point, you can specify which vibration measurements should be taken at these locations.

To copy a point:

1. Right-click the Drive End point > Select Copy Branch to Clipboard. 2. Right-click the Drive End point again > Select Paste — The new point

displays in the navigator tree below the previously selected point. 3. Right-click the second Drive End point > Select Edit — The Point

Editor window displays. 4. Enter Other End in the Point name field, 5. Click OK.

Navigator tree with copied point


44

Create Parameter Set / Schedule Entry

A Parameter Set defines a 'set of parameters' that will be used to take a measurement. If you intend to take the same type of measurement at many machine locations, creating a single parameter set for that type of measurement will save you a lot of set up time. You specify the measurement parameters once, then reuse the parameter set in as many Schedule Entries as you like.

A Schedule Entry represents one measurement (or one multi-measurement type, such as a 6Pack measurement on SCOUT/vbSeries portable instruments) that is scheduled to be taken. A single parameter set can be used to assign parameters to many schedule entries (individual measurements) and provides a quick way to set up those measurements.

We will create a single parameter set and then use this to create four schedule entries, one at each of the four locations on our machine.

1. Select Blower #8.

2. Click the P/Sets button — This opens the Select Parameter Sets window that summarizes the parameter sets currently defined on this machine. This window is empty because we have not yet defined any parameter sets.

3. Click Add to All to create a new parameter set/schedule entry combination — This opens the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry window which gives you complete control over the measurement parameters your instrument will use.

TIP: Before creating or editing Parameter Sets, we recommend you assign the instrument(s) being used to collect the recordings.

NOTE: Before you assign an instrument, it must be added to the Ascent database. See Add Instrument to Ascent.


45

4. Select the Applicable vb Instrument tab to assign your instrument to the Parameter Set. Some values (e.g. an Fmax below 100Hz) are not supported on all instruments. Assigning your instrument(s) enables Ascent to warn you if values are unavailable.

TIP: You can also right-click a schedule entry in the navigator list and select Applicable vb Instruments to open the 'Applicable vb Instruments' panel.

5. Click Edit. 6. Tick the Applicable column checkbox beside the instrument(s) you

will be using to collect the recordings — Only instruments that have been added to the database will be listed.

MORE: See Adding an Instrument to Ascent.

7. Click OK — The instrument(s) you selected will display the Instruments used to take recordings in this folder field. Once you have selected an instrument(s), any unsupported values will be indicated by a superscript star. 25*, for example, would indicate that this value (25) is not available for one or more of the instruments you are using to collect your recordings.

8. If you select an unavailable value: • The background color of the active data field will change from

white to orange. • An alert icon will display on the Applicable vb Instrument tab. • A warning will display in orange text.

9. Click the Applicable vb Instrument tab to view information about the conflict in the Settings that are not supported field.

NOTE: Any Parameter Sets created using previous versions of Ascent will be assigned to all available instruments — Recording parameters that are not supported by all available instruments will be highlighted. The relevant instruments apply at folder level, not parameter set level. Any time you open a parameter set in a folder that does not have any applicable instruments assigned, all available instruments in the database will automatically be used as the applicable instrument for that folder.


46

10. We will start by measuring the vibration according to the ISO 2372 standard. This specifies overall limits of vibration in the 10 Hz to 1000 Hz range of frequencies (600 to 60 000 CPM). Select an Fmax of 1000 Hz (60 000 CPM) from the dropdown field and leave the rest of the settings at their defaults. The estimated recording time is displayed near the bottom left of the window.

11. Click OK twice — The new schedule entries display beneath the four measurement locations on Blower #8.

12. Click Build to switch off Build mode — All the placeholders will disappear, leaving you with your completed structure. The schedule entry labels describe the type of measurements to be taken (Vel Freq 1000 Hz). Any text you enter in the Description field of the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor will be appended to the label. Later on you can change schedule entries individually by selecting and editing them, or changing them as a group by editing the associated parameter set. For more information on this subject, including instructions for creating orders-based parameter sets, see Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries.

13. Click the [Add Schedule Entry] placeholder beneath a location to add a schedule entry to it — This will open the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor:

a. Enter the parameters to be used for taking this recording. b. Click OK.

NOTE: Alternatively if you already have parameter sets defined, you can select one of these from the 'Select Parameter Set' dropdown field at the top of the editor.

New schedule entries


47

Creating a parameter set or schedule entry


48

6Pack Recordings

6Pack recordings enable up to six measurements to be taken simultaneously from a single data stream/channel. All standard condition monitoring data can be acquired in one step and in the time normally required to take a single conventional recording. This function is currently limited to the SCOUT/vbX range of instruments (vb5, vb6, vb7, vb8, SCOUT100/140).

A 6Pack recording may include some or all of the following measurement types for each recorded channel:

• High Frequency Spectrum • High Frequency Waveform • Low Frequency Spectrum • Low Frequency Waveform • Demodulation Spectrum • Demodulation Waveform

Notes on 6Pack Recordings

6Pack recordings allow up to six measurements to be taken simultaneously from a single data stream/channel. All standard condition monitoring data can be acquired in one step and in the time normally required to take a single conventional recording. This function is currently limited to the SCOUT/vbX range of instruments (vb5, vb6, vb7, vb8, SCOUT100/140).

A 6Pack recording may include some or all the following measurement types for each recorded channel:

• High Frequency Spectrum • High Frequency Waveform • Low Frequency Spectrum • Low Frequency Waveform • Demodulation Spectrum • Demodulation Waveform


49

Configure 6Pack Recording

When configuring a 6Pack recording:

1. Tick the 6Pack checkbox in the Domain area. 2. Select the required measurement types using the checkboxes

immediately below the Domain area. 3. Configure the measurement parameters using the Parameters tab

— Keep in mind the following limitations imposed on this recording type: • The same sensor(s) must be used for all 6Pack measurement

types. • High Frequency and Demodulation measurements can be

measured in Acceleration only. • All spectra and waveforms must have the same resolution. • Averaging type, number and overlap must be the same for all

spectra.

Estimate Measurement Recording Time

When you set up your measurements, the schedule entry editor displays an estimate of the time the measurement will take to record. The recording time is based on the values you enter in the Fmax, Lines, and Number of averages fields. It is also affected by which domain is selected (frequency, time, or demodulation).

You can experiment with changing the settings on this window to estimate how long various measurement setups may take. To reopen a schedule entry for editing:

1. Right-click the schedule entry icon in the navigator tree. 2. Select Edit.

Estimating measurement recording time


50

Add Photo Image to Machine

Once you have created your machine, you can add a picture and descriptive information to the machine definition. To do this:

1. Right-click Blower #8 > Select Edit. 2. Paste or load an image of your machine.

Adding a photo image to a machine


51

Notes

You can add notes to machines, points, locations, and individual recordings. When you plot data from an item containing a note, the note text will display on the chart.

Add Note to Machine

To add a note to a machine:

1. Right-click the machine > Select Edit. 2. Select the Notes tab to open this window — This tab is used to add

information which will then display on all charts that show a recording from this machine.

3. Click Add. 4. Enter your note. 5. Click OK twice. 6. Click the buttons provided to add, edit, or delete notes.

Add Note to Point, Location, or Recording

To add a note to a point, location, or recording:

1. Right-click the item in the navigator tree > Select New > Note. 2. Select the type of note required.

Archive Note

If you want to keep a machine or measurement note but you don't want it to display on charts or in the navigator list, you can archive it. To do this:

1. Right-click the note in the navigator list > Select Edit. 2. Tick the Archived checkbox.


52

Delete Note

To delete a note:

1. Select the item containing the note in the navigator tree — The navigator list will display all items associated with your selection, including any notes.

2. Select the note you wish to delete. 3. Press Delete. 4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

Add Bearing to Point

Bearing and gear definitions are added to points on your machines. Once Ascent knows the fault frequencies for a bearing, it can automatically display fault frequency markers on spectra (provided you have set the RPM).

To add a bearing to a point:

1. Right-click a point in the navigator tree > Select New > Bearing Definition — You will see the list of bearings currently known to Ascent.

NOTE: More bearings are available in the Commtest Bearing Archive. You can access this by clicking Search the Commtest Bearing Archive. See Using the Bearing Database for more information.

2. Select a bearing from the list. 3. Click OK — You will see the Bearing on Point editor that with tabs for

Bearing Data, Notes, and Interchange. The Interchange tab is open by default. This contains a list of alternative bearings (if any) that could be used to replace your chosen bearing when it wears out.

4. Click Select a different bearing to return to the previous window so you can choose a different bearing.

5. Click the Bearing Data and Notes tabs to see what information they contain.

6. Click OK to assign your chosen bearing to the point.


53

Searching for bearings

Adding a bearing to a point


54

Define your own Bearings

To create your own bearings you need to know either the fault frequencies of the bearing, or the internal dimensions. To define your own bearings:

1. Right-click a point on the navigator tree > Select New > Bearing Definition.

2. Right-click the list of bearings > Select Add. 3. Enter the required information in the blank fields (place the mouse

cursor in a blank field to see a picture and description of the required information on the right of the screen).

4. Enter the internal dimensions (if required) > Click Calculate to calculate the bearing fault frequencies.

5. Click OK to save the new bearing.

Defining your own bearings

Add Gear to Point

To add a gear to a point:

1. Right-click a point in the navigator tree. 2. Select New > Gear Definition. 3. Enter a description and the number of teeth on your gear. 4. Click OK to assign your gear to the point.


55

Apply Different Rotational Speeds across Machine

Various shafts in a machine may be rotating at different speeds due to gearboxes or pulley drives, etc. In Ascent you can adjust the RPM value of recordings taken at different points by applying a point-level RPM multiplier. Ascent will multiply the actual machine speed by your RPM Multiplier value to calculate the shaft speed at each point. For Linear speed Machines, the software can also calculate the point speed using the RPM Multiplier value and the roller diameter.

To apply different rotational speeds across a machine:

1. Right-click the machine > Select Edit. 2. Edit the machine speed type. 3. Select EITHER of these machine speed types:

• RPM-based • Linear speed

4. Enter the default machine speed > Click OK.

NOTE: Linear Speed will use the default unit currently specified under Options > Unit Preferences.

5. Right-click a point > Select Edit to edit the point definition. 6. Enter an RPM Multiplier value — This value defines how much

faster/slower the shaft is turning at this point compared to the machine speed. For Linear speed machines you will also need to enter the diameter of the roller/pulley. The Point RPM value will be calculated automatically.

7. Click OK. 8. Repeat the above steps to change the rotational speed at additional

points. Once you have defined the RPM Multiplier (and Roller diameter for Linear speed machines if required) at each point you can update the RPM values on all recent recordings on an entire machine.

9. Right-click a machine > Select Set Speed. 10. Enter the running speed or Linear speed of the machine. 11. Select Apply RPM to Multiplier at each Point. 12. Select the required options in the Set RPM/Set Linear Speed editor to

apply the speed value > Click OK.

MORE: See Applying the RPM Value.


56

Editing the machine speed type

Editing a point definition

Applying different rotational speeds across a machine


57

Copy Item

To speed up the process of building your machines, you can copy and reuse individual items. For example, the point we copied earlier, or non-structural items such as alarms and routes.

It is also possible to copy entire machines and file them away in storage so they can be retrieved, renamed, and reused as many times as required. See Storing Reusable Components in the Library.

To copy an item to one place only:

1. Right-click the item > Select Copy Branch to Clipboard. 2. Right-click the location where you want to place the item > Select

Paste.

NOTE: The pasted item will display below the selected item in relation to the machine hierarchy. For example, if you paste a point, it will display below the locations and schedule entries of the point above.

Delete Item

To delete an item:

1. Select the required item in the navigator. 2. Delete it using EITHER of these methods:

• Right-click it > Select Delete. • Select the item > Press Delete.

3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

Edit Measurement

You can use the Measurement editor to copy previously recorded measurements or create new measurements manually. To access the Measurement editor, select Edit > Edit Measurements.


58

Generate New Measurement

To generate a new measurement:

1. Enter a timestamp date and time. 2. Enter the units to be used on the X and Y scales. 3. Enter the X scale's start and end values. 4. Enter the values for each sample required. 5. Enter any other values you wish to use for the new measurement.

Create New Measurement Based on Previous Recording

To create a new measurement based on a previous recording:

1. Click the existing recording in the navigator list. 2. Click Load from Measurement — The recording's values display in

the Measurement editor. 3. Change the measurement values as required. 4. Click Create at this location — A new measurement will be created

and displayed in the navigator list.

NOTE: The Measurement editor cannot be used to change the recorded values of an existing recording. The sampling rate of new measurements is calculated automatically based on the number of samples entered into the Samples field.

Autosave

Autosave mode automatically saves each change you make. This enables you to carry out your work without having to remember to click Save after each change.

Autosave is activated by default. To toggle this feature on or off, select Options > Auto Save Changes.

NOTE: Autosave is recommended for use in multi-user networked environments where more than one user is making changes to a database.

NOTE: Activating Autosave will disable the Undo \ Revert function in Ascent. I.e. if you mistakenly delete an item you will need to recreate it manually. For this reason we recommend switch Autosave off if you are deleting large numbers of items.


59

Save and Undo Changes

Whenever you make a change (e.g. add or delete an item), the Save button will become available. Click this to save your changes.

To undo your previous save, select File > Undo \ Revert — This will undo every change back to the last save.

NOTE: There is only one level of Undo. You cannot return to a state that was several saves ago.

Navigator Tree

The top half of the navigator (the navigator tree) shows the structure of the machines in this folder:

• The Drying Machines folder you have been working on is shown at the top of the navigator tree.

• Machines contained in a folder are listed beneath the folder icon.

• Points represent an area on a machine and are listed beneath the machine they belong to.

• Measurement locations (horizontal, vertical, etc.) represent the actual place on the machine where you will place a sensor to take measurements.

• Schedule entries represent a recording scheduled to be taken. They are listed directly beneath the measurement locations they apply to.

A small expand symbol beside an item indicates you can select the item to expand it.

You can right-click an item in the navigator tree to display relevant menu options.

Use Navigator

Now that you have created your first machine you can use it to learn how the navigator is used.


60

Navigator List

You can select any item in the navigator tree. When you select an item, the navigator list (which displays below the navigator tree), will show any items that belong to your selection. For example, if you select a machine in the navigator tree, the navigator list will display the points defined at that machine, as well as any machine notes or reports. You can click a

schedule entry in the navigator tree to display all recordings associated with that schedule entry in the navigator list.

TIP: You can right-click the navigator list to access to commonly used commands.

Navigator list


61

Sort Navigator

You can sort the navigator in default order, alphabetically, by alarm, or by machine name. Select Screen > Sort to access these options:

• Sort Navigator by Alarms — Machines and points with the worst alarm condition display at the top of the navigator.

• Sort Tree Alphabetically — Order tree items alphabetically. • Sort Machine Name Alphabetically — Order machines

alphabetically by name.

You can also sort items manually by dragging and dropping them into new areas. You can use drag and drop to resort machines in any order and change the order of points and measurement locations within a machine.

1. Select Edit > Enable Drag and Drop to enable this feature. 2. Drag and drop the item to a new position — The blue highlight

indicates where the dragged item will be dropped.

NOTE: Activating drag and drop will disable the alarm-based and alphabetical sorting options. To re-enable these, untick Enable Drag and Drop in the Edit menu.

Dragging an item to the required location

By default, the most recent measurements display first. However, you can sort the navigator list to show the oldest measurements first (if required). To do this:

1. Select Screen > Measurements in Navigator. 2. Select either Oldest first or Most Recent first.


62

Navigator Search Filter

The navigator filter displays above the navigator. You can select Screen > Show Search Bar to toggle it on or off.

Navigator search filter

You can use the navigator search filter to narrow the machines, points, locations, and recordings displayed in the navigator tree.

You can filter a navigator list item by:

• Folder name • Machine name • Point name

Axis


63

Create / Edit / Delete filter

To create a new filter or edit an existing one:

1. Click the right-facing >> arrow beside the search filter to expand it — The filter window will open in the main graph window.

NOTE: You can select a previously defined filter from the dropdown field. NOTE: To disable the filter, select No Filter from the list — This is the filter's default state following installation.

2. Enter a suitable name in the Filter Name field (e.g. PM2 DE).

NOTE: As you define the filtering criteria used, the navigator list will update in real time.

3. Select a folder to search within from the Folder(s) dropdown field — This option will only be available if there is more than one folder in the navigator tree.

4. Enter the name of the machine you wish to search within (e.g. Dryer) in the Machine(s) field.

5. Enter the machine name. 6. Enter the points you wish to filter within in the Point(s) field. 7. Select an axis from the Axis/Axes dropdown field. 8. Click Save to save your new filter or Clear to reset the filter and start

again.

Expanding the search filter


64

Creating a filter

Delete Existing Filter

To delete an existing filter:

1. Select it from the filter dropdown field. 2. Expand the filter window. 3. Press Delete.

Filter Recordings

You can filter recordings by RPM or date range. To do this:

1. Tick the By RPM or By Date checkbox. 2. Enter or select a date range using the text and date fields —

Recordings outside the range(s) specified will be removed from the navigator list.


65

Hide Detailed Recording Information

You can show or hide the RPM and measurement type of recordings in the navigator. Hiding this information can improve performance slightly on very large databases.

To toggle this feature on or off, select Screen > Measurements in Navigator > Show RPM and Measurement Enter.

Recordings with RPM and measurement type displayed

The same recordings showing only their timestamp

Hide Recording in Navigator

As you add more recordings to your database, the speed at which the navigator list displays them may slow down, particularly when you have many hundreds of recordings. To speed up the response time you can limit the number of recordings displayed in the navigator list.

To hide a recording in the Navigator:

1. Right-click the navigator list. 2. Select Recordings Displayed. 3. Select a number from the available options.


66

Select Multiple Items

You can select more than one item at a time in the navigator list.

Select Sequential Items

1. To do this hold down the left mouse button and drag up or down to the last item you want to select.

2. Another method is to click the top-most item you want to select, hold down the SHIFT key and use the down arrow key to highlight and select sequential items.

3. A third method is to click the first item, hold down the SHIFT key and click the last item you want to select.

Selecting sequential items

Select Non-sequential Items

To select multiple items that are not sequential, hold down the CTRL key while you click items in the navigator list.

Selecting non-sequential items

Archive Notes and Recordings

You can archive recordings, machine notes, and measurement notes. This means they will be hidden from view (but not deleted). Archived items will not display in the navigator list or on charts. To archive a note or recording:

1. Right-click it in the navigator list > Select Edit. 2. Tick the Archived checkbox on the editor. 3. Right-click an item in the navigator list area to redisplay it > Select

Show Archived items.


67

Customize Work Area

You can hide or reposition screen elements such as the navigator and creation palette to suit your preferences. To access these options, click Screen.

The full list of options is available from the dropdown menu. You can hide, show, or reposition screen elements by ticking or unticking options in the list.


68

Create Route

You create routes in Ascent, then send them to your portable instrument. You cannot create or edit routes on your instrument.

NOTE: Routes are not applicable to online (vbOnline and Ranger) instruments.

You can now send the Drying Machines folder to your instrument and collect data by selecting the machine, points, and locations from the Record menu on your instrument. However, we will first define a route that is an ordered list of measurement locations that you follow from start to finish when collecting data. You can then transfer this route to your instrument, which will prompt you to collect the measurements in the order listed.

To create a route:

1. Click the Build button if you are not already in Build mode.

NOTE: You will need to click the Manual Build Mode link if you are using the licensed Machine Builder wizard.

2. Create a new route using EITHER of these methods:

• Click the Create a new Route button on the Creation Palette.

• Right-click a blank area in the navigator > Select New > Route — You will be asked if you want to add all the measurement locations to the route.

3. Click Yes to open the Route editor — All the measurement locations are listed in the window. These are the route entries that will make up your route.

NOTE: A measurement location must have at least one schedule entry defined for it to display in a route. Your instrument needs to know what type of measurement to take. This information is contained in the schedule entry.

4. Change the default name from Unnamed Route to Weekly Route or enter a name of your choice.

NOTE: The name cannot be more than 50 characters long.


69

5. Use EITHER of these methods to change the order of the measurement locations (if required): • Click and hold the mouse button while you drag the selected

location to a new position. • Select a location > Move it using the red up/down arrows.

TIP: Press and hold CTRL or SHIFT while you select items in the list if you wish to select more than one at a time.

6. Use EITHER of these methods to access a list of common operations: • Click Operations.

• Right-click an item. 7. Click OK to save your route when you are happy with the order of it. 8. Click Build to switch off Build mode — Your completed folder

displays, ready to be sent to your instrument.

Completed folder displays

Route editor


70

Add Instrument to Ascent

You will need to add your SCOUT/vbX series, Ranger, or vbOnline instrument to Ascent's instrument database before you can transfer data.

If you intend to transfer portable instrument data via an external USB flash drive (rather than directly to Ascent), you will first need to add at least one portable instrument to Ascent. To do this:

1. Connect your instrument and PC using the supplied communications cable (USB or Ethernet for SCOUT/vbX instruments / Ethernet or Serial for vbOnline devices).

2. Start Ascent. 3. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 4. Click Add if your instrument is not listed > Select the instrument type

you wish to add. 5. Use EITHER of these methods to add your instrument:

• Double-click you instrument name if it is listed in the right of the window.

• Click the Add button if your instrument is not listed > Ensure the IP address used by your instrument and Ascent is the same.

NOTE: You only need to add your instrument to Ascent when you first connect to the software. In future it will be detected automatically.

Adding your instrument to Ascent


71

Automatically Set Instrument IP Address

Your instrument can be configured to accept an automatically assigned IP address from your network DHCP server. This applies when you are communicating with your SCOUT/vbX instrument using an Ethernet connection (via a switch for example), not using USB plug and play.

To configure your instrument to accept an automatically assigned IP address from your network DHCP server:

1. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 2. Select your instrument. 3. Press Configure — The vbX Properties window opens. 4. Select the Setup tab. 5. Tick the Obtain an IP address automatically via DHCP checkbox. 6. Click OK.

Instrument Options

In addition to Proflashing and network connection options, the vbX Properties window includes a Tasks tab which contains the following options:

• Instrument Details — Display your instrument's hardware, firmware, and network details.

• Copy Database — Save a copy of your instrument's database (.pbd) to an external source, if you wish to back up the database.

• Overwrite Database — Select a database backup file to copy to the instrument.

• Synchronize Time — Synchronize your instrument's time and data stamps with your PC.

• Screen Capture — Display and control the screen of a connected instrument using a popup window. This is useful for capturing images of screens, measurements, and reports.


72

Transfer Folders to Instrument

The steps below assume you have already added your SCOUT/vbSeries portable instrument to Ascent's instrument database.

NOTE: The Send and Receive buttons are only used when communicating with a SCOUT/vbSeries portable instrument. They are not used for communications with vbOnline or Ranger devices.

1. Plug your instrument into your PC using the supplied communications cable.

2. Open Ascent. 3. Switch your instrument on.

4. Click Send in Ascent. 5. Select Instrument in the Comms Method field.

NOTE: If you wish to import or export an XML recordings file from or to an external source, you can use the Import from File or Export to File in the Comms Method field.

6. Use these steps to transfer folders to your SCOUT/vbX instrument: a. Select your instrument in the Instrument field. b. Select the folders you wish to transfer by selecting the

checkboxes beside their names. Click Send. When the send process is complete your instrument will return to the main menu.

7. Use these steps to transfer folders to your vX000 instrument: a. Select vbX000 instrument in the Instrument field —

Communication with your instrument will commence. The Prepare for Send window opens.

b. Use EITHER of these methods to select the required folder: • Select an existing folder you wish to replace. • Click one of the new labels to select an empty folder.

8. Click OK — Your instrument will display in the main menu when the communication is complete.


73

Transferring folders to your instrument

Transferring folders to your vbX000 folder


74

Transfer Recordings to Ascent Database

The steps below assume you have already added your SCOUT/vbSeries portable instrument to Ascent's instrument database.

NOTE: The Send and Receive buttons are only used when communicating with a SCOUT/vbSeries portable instrument. They are not used for communications with vbOnline or Ranger devices.

To transfer recordings to your Ascent database:

1. Plug your instrument into your PC using the communications cable supplied.

2. Open Ascent. 3. Switch your instrument on.

4. Click Receive in Ascent to establish communication between the software and your instrument.

5. Select Instrument in the Comms Method field.

NOTE: If you wish to import or export an XML recordings file from or to an external source, you can use the Import from File or Export to File in the Comms Method field.

6. Use these steps to transfer folders to your SCOUT/vbX instrument: a. Select your instrument in the Instrument field — All folders

located on your instrument will display. b. Select the folders you wish to import by selecting the

checkboxes beside their names. Your instrument transfers recordings by sending entire storage folders to the PC.

c. Click Receive near the bottom-right of the window to begin transferring recordings. When the transfer is complete click OK then Close. The Open panel will be displayed.

d. Select an imported folder and click OK.


75

7. Use these steps to transfer folders to your vbX000 instrument: a. Select vbX000 instrument in the Instrument field.

NOTE: If you only have a single folder defined on your instrument, the receive process will proceed automatically. If there are multiple folders on your instrument, a window will display, enabling you to select the folders to transfer.

b. Tick the Receive multiple folders checkbox to transfer more than one folder at a time.

c. Tick the checkboxes beside the folders you wish to receive. d. Click OK.

Transferring recordings from your instrument to your Ascent database


76

Navigator tree

Maintain Data Integrity

CAUTION! Ascent identifies machines, points, axes and sensors by their names. If you rename these items on your instrument and then transfer data from your instrument to Ascent, the software will regard the items as new.

CAUTION! You should avoid duplicating names on your instrument. These will be differentiated solely on the order in which they display on your instrument and in Ascent.


77

Use Example Data

Data display and analysis features in Ascent include generating reports and plotting data on charts. If you have not yet collected any data, you can experiment with the example machines and recordings included in the factory default database.

To use the example data:

1. Ensure you have already created an example database as described in Creating a Database.

2. Click Open. 3. Select a folder from the list (not the Drying Machines folder that you

created earlier).

TIP: If you can't see any folders, select the expand icon beside one of the blue site icons.

4. Click OK to open your chosen folder — The navigator will display the machines within this folder.

5. Select the expand icons to view the machine structures.

TIP: Alternatively, right-click the navigator tree > Select Expand all to open all machines at once.

Section 3 — Reports

78


This section describes the reports available and how to access these.

Generate Report

The reporting system provides a valuable tool for analyzing your data. A variety of reports are available to help you summarize information and highlight areas of concern.

To generate a report:

1. Select a machine or another item in the navigator.

2. Click the Report button > Select the required report.

NOTE: The reports available vary according to your version of Ascent and license status.

3. Right-click any displayed report to access commands for changing the format of the report.

EG: You might wish to include or exclude certain data. NOTE: You can generate a report on a single machine by selecting it in the navigator. You can also generate a report for all machines in the folder by selecting the folder icon at the top of the navigator. MORE: See Printing Charts and Reports. TIP: The date on which recordings were taken is displayed in many reports by default. To also display the time of the recordings, right-click the report > Select Show Time. NOTE: If you make any changes to the default settings, you will be prompted to save these when you close the report. If you want the changes to be permanent (until you change them again) click OK. Click No to discard the changes.


79

Running reports


80

Alarm Report

By default, the Alarm report details the current and previous two states of each alarm at the selected location on a machine.

Alarm report

To change the number of previous recordings displayed:

1. Right-click the report > Select Set History Count. 2. Enter a value. 3. Click OK.

NOTE: The latest recording is included in this value. If you set the value to 1, only the latest recording will display on the report. NOTE: You can also select a date range or data type filter by right-clicking the report and selecting the Date Range (All Dates) and Data Enters filter parameters.


81

Balancing Report

Once you have completed a balance job using your instrument, you can view a summary of the process and results in the Balancing report.

You can also double-click the balance job icon in the navigator list to run this report.

Right-click the report to access commands for changing the format of the report. These options are also available when you select Options > Balancing Reports.

Balance job icon

Detailed Exception Report

The Exception report provides an overall summary of the condition of your machines. Each machine is listed with a colored horizontal bar showing its status (red = danger, green = OK etc.). The most critical machines are shown at the top of the report.

The machine names and locations are shown as underlined blue links. You can click these to select the required machine or location in the navigator tree.

Machines in the worst condition are listed at the top. If a machine does not have any alarms, its status will be listed as Unknown. By default the Exception report displays information for all the machines in a folder.


82

Running an Exception report

Last 8 Measurements

This is similar to the Last Measurement report but includes the previous 7 measurements for comparison. By default, this report shows the percentage change between the latest measurement and the one before it. You can use the right-click shortcut menu to change this setting.

Last Measurement Report

The Last Measurement report displays the spectrum overall values of the latest measurements taken for each schedule entry at a selected machine. It also includes the overall value of the previous recording for comparison and gives the percentage change between the previous and latest recordings.

You can right-click the report to access commands for hiding or showing different columns of data and setting the number of previous recordings to include in the report.


83

Machine Assessment Reports

The Machine Assessment report (MAR) system simplifies generation of PdM condition and status reports for third-party clients. Once route or machinery analysis has been completed by an analyst or service provider, this tool enables a report to be generated detailing specific recommendations and existing/upcoming fault conditions. Reports can be printed or exported in standard HTML or XML format.

NOTE: Before you create a Machine Assessment report, you will need to configure the Machine Assessment report database. Until this is done, all reporting menu items will be greyed out and unavailable.

Machine Assessment Summary reports

Each Machine Assessment report is automatically associated with a Machine Assessment Summary (MAS) report when it is created. The Machine Assessment Summary report is generated and populated automatically using information entered in the Machine Assessment reports. When you have finished creating individual Machine Assessment reports, you can publish these reports individually, or together with the companion Machine Assessment Summary report.

The Machine Assessment Summary report briefly summarizes the machine reports, providing clients with a simple one sheet overview of the state of their plant equipment.

NOTE: The Machine Assessment report system is only included in Ascent Level 2 and 3 (not Level 1).


84

Configure Machine Assessment Report Database

Before using the Machine Assessment Report tool for the first time, you will need to create a report database. To do this:

1. Open Ascent, 2. Select Database > Configure Advanced Reporting.

CAUTION! Do NOT change the username and password, or the default database name — ascent_database_report.fdb.

3. Tick the Local Machine checkbox to create a database on your local PC: a. Click Create. b. Locate and select the required location for the database.

4. Tick the Network checkbox to create a database on a networked drive: a. Click Create. b. Enter a server IP or name, and an absolute path to the database

in the Network Settings window that opens. c. Click OK.

NOTE: If you are creating a network database, the network path must be an 'absolute'. It must include correct drive mapping from the server's perspective rather than a virtual server address. For example, 'P:\MyDatabase\Database.fdb' would be acceptable, but '\\Server\MyDatabase\Database.fdb' would not.

5. Click OK — The database will be created. You can now run a Machine Assessment report.

Configuring advanced reporting


85

Run Machine Assessment Report

Once you have configured the machine assessment report you can run it. To do this:

1. Right-click a machine, point, or location on the navigator tree. 2. Select New > Report > Machine Assessment Report. 3. Enter a folder name in the Create in New Advanced Reporting Folder

field. 4. Click OK.

NOTE: New and existing Machine Assessment reports are listed beneath the machine they were created for at the bottom of the navigator list. You can access them at any time by right-clicking them and selecting Edit.

5. Right click the new report > Select Edit — The Advanced Reporting editor consists of three main panels: • Summary Navigator Panel (top left) — All Machine Assessment

Summary reports available for the data folder currently open. • Machine Report List (bottom left) — All Machine Assessment

reports in the selected Machine Assessment Summary report. • Report Editor Panel (right) — Report View existing reports and

enter report details. 6. Select a machine name In the lower left Machine Report List panel —

The Report Editor Panel on the right displays a form if it is not already visible. You can use this form to enter report details.

7. Select a fault type in the Fault field or enter a fault in this field if it does not contain a suitable fault description — When you save the report, the new description will be added to the list for future use.

8. Click the browse button to edit fault type descriptions you have previously created.

9. Enter the location of the fault in the field provided. 10. Select a priority rating in the field provided — The priority selected

will display beside the machine in the Machine Report List panel. 11. Enter the condition of the machine and the nature of the repairs

required in the Recommendations field. 12. Right-click an image box > Select Capture View from Ascent to load

the current chart view into the image field, or Load Image from File to attach an image to the report (e.g. a photograph of a damaged component).

13. Enter a note explaining what the attached images illustrate in the Image Notes text area (if you attached an image to the report).


86

14. Select the vibration analyst's name field provided, or enter a new name in the field.

15. Click the browse button to edit previously created analyst names (if required).

16. Toggle the Font Size button to adjust the font size for viewing the report (if required).

17. Click the Save button.

NOTE: Click the Preview tab at any time to preview the report in the 'Report Editor Panel'. You will be prompted to save the report before it will display.

18. Click Reports from the main Advanced Reporting Editor menu > Select the appropriate report status options: • Lock — If the report is complete. The report will become read-

only. • Unlock — If the report was previously locked but you wish to

change it. • Mark as Complete — If the machine report is finished. • Mark as Surveyed — If the machine recordings have been

gathered. • Mark as Operational — If the machine is still functioning.


87

Accessing Machine Assessment reports

The options you select will be reflected in the machine panel under the respective value columns:

• L Locked • C Completed • S Surveyed • O Operational

Available options

You can use these parameters to filter items displayed in the report. Filter options are located on the main menu bar.

Filter options


88

Access Machine Assessment Report

You can view existing Machine Assessment reports using the:

• Ascent graph panel • Advanced Reporting editor

Access Report in Ascent

To view a machine assessment report in Ascent, open a machine assessment report using EITHER of these methods:

• Click Report > Select the required machine assessment report.

NOTE: If the machine assessment reports are not available, and you are licensed for this feature, see Configure the Machine Assessment Report Database. An assessment report database must be created before these menu items will be enabled.

• Double-click a machine assessment report in the navigator list — The report details display on the right.

Access Machine Assessment Report using Advanced Reporting editor

To access a machine assessment reporting using the Advanced Reporting editor:

1. Right-click the report in the navigator list > Select Edit or View > Advanced Reporting Editor.

2. Select a Machine Summary report from the Summary Navigator panel on the left, or a Machine Assessment report from the Machine Report list.

TIP: You can press and hold CTRL or Shift to select multiple reports.

3. Select the Preview tab in the Report Editor panel on the right — The report displays.

Open Advanced Reporting Editor

You can select View > Advanced Reporting Editor to access the Advanced Reporting editor.


89

Differentiate between Machine Assessment Reports

You can use timestamps and brackets around the report name to distinguish between Machine Assessment and Machine Assessment Summary reports in the navigator list. A Machine Assessment Summary report is not listed with a timestamp or brackets in the navigator list.

NOTE: Machine Assessment Summary reports are stored at the data folder level within the navigator list, not under machines.

You can double-click the Machine Assessment Summary report, then click it once to display the report in the graphs panel on the right.

Machine Assessment Summary report

A Machine Assessment report has a timestamp and the report name is listed in brackets.

You can double-click the item to display the machine associated with the graphs panel on the right.


90

Machine Assessment report

Publish Machine Summary Report

You can export machine reports in HTML or XML format and provide these to interested parties for review using a standard web browser. You can also print hard copies by selecting File > Print.

To publish a Machine Summary report:

1. Select the data folder to access Machine Summary reports in the navigator list.

2. Right-click the target Machine Assessment Summary report from the navigator list > Select Reports > Publish Machine Assessment Summary Report.


91

3. Select the reports you wish to publish from Published Reports area: • Selection — Include the Machine Reports currently selected and

highlighted.

NOTE: As you selected the publish option from the Datafolder level, the first and second options will both select all available Machine Assessment reports.

• Top 20 by Priority — Include the twenty highest priority reports in ascending rank. Highest priority is Safety, lowest is Non-Operational.

• Priority More Than — Only include reports with a priority higher than that specified in the dropdown field.

4. Select the parameters of the published report from the Settings area: • Include summary — Include the overall Machines Assessment

Summary report in addition to the individual Machine Assessment Reports (leave unchecked).

• Include incomplete — Include all reports that have a completion status of Not Completed in addition to Completed machine reports.

• Use individual styles — Use individual styles for each Machine report. If deselected, all reports will use a single common style sheets (.xslt files).

• Lock All Reports — Locks all reports once publication is complete.

5. Click Browse to select the location on your computer you will publish the report to.

6. Select the required publication format in the Output Format field: • HTML • XML

7. Click Publish — The report is published and exported in HTML or XML together with any related style sheets, images, and other related files.

NOTE: The published files consist of two HTML or XML files and a 'data' folder. One HTML/XML file will start with 'MSR'. This file contains the Machine Assessment Summary of all reports generated. The second file will begin with 'MAS'. This file contains the individual Machine Assessment Reports for each machine.


92

Publishing the Machine Summary report


93

Publish Machine Assessment Report

To publish a machine assessment report:

1. Right-click the target Machine Assessment report under a machine in the navigator tree > Select Edit.

2. Select a machine from the Machine Report List at the bottom.

TIP: Press CTRL + click to select individual Machine Assessment reports.

3. Select File > Publish from the Advanced Reporting Editor main menu.

4. Untick the Include Summary checkbox. 5. Select the parameters for the published report in the Settings area:

• Include summary — Include the overall Summary report in addition to the individual Machine reports (leave unticked if publishing individual Machine reports).

• Include incomplete — Include all reports with a completion status of Not Completed, in addition to Completed machine reports.

• Use individual styles — Use individual styles for each Machine report. If unticked, all reports will use a single common style sheets (.xslt files).

• Lock All Reports — Locks all reports once publication is complete.

6. Click Browse > Locate and select a location for the published files. 7. Select a publication format in the Output Format field:

• HTML • XML

8. Click Publish — The report is published and exported in HTML or XML, together with any related style sheets, images, or other related files.

NOTE: The published files will consist of one HTML or XML file and a 'data' folder. The individual HTML/XML file contains reports for the machine(s) selected for publication.


94

Publish machine assessment report

Add Company Logo to Published Report

In its default state, a published report will include an Ascent logo in the top left corner. If required, you can remove this image or replace it with your company logo:

• You can replace the default image (logo.jpg) stored in the Ascent Styles folder (usually C:\Program Files\Commtest\Ascent\Styles). The replacement file must be in JPEG format with the extension .jpg and the title logo.

• You can edit the MachineProvider.xslt XML style files stored in the Summary and Individual folders (usually C:\Program Files\Commtest\Ascent\Styles). These two files include links to the image displayed in published reports. You can edit these links to select a locally stored image rather than the default image.

The exact location of these files will vary according to your operating system and its variant (32-bit or 64-bit). The example locations above apply to typical Ascent software installations using Windows XP 32-bit. They are not suitable for 64-bit operating systems (which may use folder names such as Program Files (x64)).


95

Edit XML File

To edit the XML file:

1. Prepare a new image to be used in your published reports.

NOTE: The logo image will be scaled automatically to match the available dimensions of the report, so will not typically need to be resized before it is used. However, for this reason, an image larger than 80 pixels wide by 30 pixels high is recommended. Increasing the size of a smaller image may result in poor image quality. Reducing the size of a larger image should not result in significant image degradation.

2. Copy the image to a known location (e.g. your desktop or the root of a hard drive).

3. Press CTRL + E to open Windows Explorer or right-click the Windows Start icon > Select Explore.

4. Navigate to the Individual folder within Ascent\Styles on your computer (typically at C:\Program Files\Commtest\Ascent\Styles\Individual).

5. Right-click the MachineProvider.xslt file within the folder > Select Open With > Notepad.

6. Select Edit > Go To from the Notepad menu or ALT+G from your keyboard.

7. Enter 122 in the field. 8. Click OK — Your cursor will jump to line 122. 9. Edit the text file on the selected line: //localhost/C:\Program

Files\Commtest\Ascent\Styles\logo.jpg. 10. Change the text to redirect instead to the location of the image you

prepared earlier (e.g. file://localhost/C:\Documents and Settings\JohnDoe\Desktop\MyLogo.jpg').

11. Select File > Save in Notepad. 12. Repeat steps 2 to 9 for the MachineProvider.xslt file stored in the

Summary folder — Once you have finished editing the two XML files you are ready to create your report.

13. Republish the report — Your new logo will display in the top left.


96

Open Existing Machine Assessment Report Database

When opening an existing Ascent database for which reports have previously been generated you may wish to also open its associated Machine Assessment Report database. To do this:

1. Open Ascent. 2. Select Database > Configure Advanced Reporting. 3. Click Open. 4. Select an existing Machine Assessment report database. 5. Click Open. 6. Click OK on the Advanced Reporting Setup panel.

If the selected database contains more than one session (set of reports), the Please select a Reporting Framework Database session window will open. Select a database session containing the Machine Assessment Summaries you wish to view > Click OK.

The previous Machine Assessment Reports contained in this database will now be accessible from the navigator tree or Machine Assessment report editor — Select View > Advanced Reporting Editor.


97

Back up Machine Assessment Report Database

A backup of your Machine Assessment Report database provides a 'known good point' to revert back to should your database ever become corrupted. The entire database of information should be backed up regularly to avoid the risk of data loss.

To back up the database:

1. Select File > Database > Backup Options.

NOTE: Typically you will not need to change the backup directory. However, if you wish to change the backup folder location, enter a folder path in the Backup Directory field at the bottom of the panel, or click Browse and navigate to a different location. This is the location where the .gbak format backup file will be created.

2. Select the Reporting Files tab. 3. Click Backup Report DB.

NOTE: The backup file is saved in .gbak format. We recommend you save copies of your .gbak backup files on a network server or to CD-ROM, in case of computer hard disk failure.

Backing up your Machine Assessment Report database


98

Restore Machine Assessment Report Database

You can restore a machine assessment report database using backup options or the text menu.

Restore using Backup Options

To restore a previous Machine Assessment report database backup:

1. Select File > Database > Backup Options or Database > Backup Options.

2. Select the Reporting Files tab. 3. Click Browse > Locate and select an alternative backup directory (if

required). 4. Select a .gbak format backup file from those listed in the selected

backup directory. 5. Click Restore — The backup will be restored, overwriting your

current database.

Restoring the machine assessment report database using the backup options


99

Restore using Text Menu

To restore a Machine Assessment report database from Ascent without opening the Backup Options panel:

1. Select Database > Restore > Restore Report Database or File > Database > Restore > Restore Report — An message will warn that restoring a Machine Assessment Report database will erase all data in the currently open database and advise that the Ascent database must be no older than the Machine Assessment Report database.

2. Click Yes to proceed. 3. Navigate to a specific backup file (.gbak format). 4. Click Open — The Restoring Reporting Database panel will open and

the restore process will begin. 5. Review the process text once the process is complete to confirm it

was successful and no error messages have been shown. 6. Click Close. 7. Select View > Advanced Reporting Editor to reopen the Machine

Assessment Report editor.

NOTE: The backup will overwrite your active Machine Assessment report database. Any reports that have been created since the last backup will not be in this file and will therefore be lost.

Add Machine to Report

To add one or more machines to your current Report:

1. Right click a machine. 2. Select New > Report > Machine Assessment Report. 3. Select the report you wish to add the machine to in the Add to

Existing Advanced Reporting Folder field. 4. Click OK — The machine will be added to the existing report and

listed in the Machine Report List when you reopen the report.


100

Configure Database Association

Ascent and Machine Assessment report backup files are managed in the Backup Options window. You can use this panel to link the backup of your Machine Assessment report database with an Ascent database backup. Once this association has been created, the Machine Assessment Report database will be backed up automatically whenever the Ascent database is backed up (e.g. when triggering Database > Backup Now!, File > Database > Backup Now! or when automatic periodic backups have been configured).

To configure database associations:

1. Select File > Database > Backup Options or Database > Backup Options.

2. Select the Reporting Options tab. 3. Tick the Include Advanced Reports backup when Ascent Database

backed up checkbox.

NOTE: The field on this page points to the Firebird gbak creation application. Typically you will not need to change this link. However, if you move the Firebird backup utility, you will need to enter the file's new location here. Usually you will leave this location in its default state (or click Default to return to this location after a fresh Ascent installation).

4. Select the Reporting Files tab. 5. Click Backup Report DB — The Backing Up Reporting Database

panel will open and the backup process will start. 6. Review the process text to confirm the process was successful and

no error messages have been shown. 7. Click Close. 8. Click OK. 9. Back up the Ascent database and the Machine Assessment report

database manually in a single step: a. Select Database > Backup Now! or File > Database > Backup

Now. b. Select the Ascent Files tab on the Backup Options panel.

NOTE: Clicking Backup Now! will not cause both backups to be created. Only the Ascent database backup will be created. When this database is backed up in future, the Machine Assessment Report database associated with it will also be backed up.


101

Configuring a database association

Reassociate Report

When you create a Machine Assessment report or folder, it is automatically associated with the folder you have open in Ascent, and the Machine under which it was created. However, it is possible for these associations to be lost. This can happen if an Ascent Folder or Machine is deleted or under specific .vbz file import conditions (e.g. exporting a Folder structure, deleting Machines, then reimporting the Folder).

Losing your Folder and Machine associations will leave Reports as unattached orphans. These unassociated Reports remain in the Machine Assessment Report database. They are not displayed in, or accessible from, the Ascent navigator list. Consequently you cannot access them from the Report menu. However, you can select View > Advanced Reporting Editor to access them.


102

To correct this situation, you can identify and reassociate unassociated reports with an Ascent Folder and Machine using the Report Reassociation Tool. To do this:

1. Select View > Advanced Reporting Editor. 2. Select Edit > Reassociate Reports — The right panel in the Report

Reassociation Tool displays all folders present in the currently open Ascent database. The left panel displays all reports and report folders (Report Folders are at the root level, Machine reports display beneath these). Any Report Folders or reports listed in the left panel that are not currently associated with an Ascent Folder on the right

panel will display with a question mark ( for Folders and for Reports). In the example below, the MDF Integrale SA Report Folder and Plate 4 report do not have current associations with any of the Ascent Folders shown in the right panel.

3. Select any unassociated report or Report Folder from the left panel — These are indicated with a question mark.

4. Select the Ascent folder you wish to associate this Report item with from the right panel.

NOTE: If you wish to change an existing association to another Ascent Folder, you can also select any Report or Report Folder that currently has an association. These are not listed with a question mark.

5. Click Associate — A confirmation message will display, asking if you wish to associate the report or Report Folder with the selected Ascent folder.

6. Click Yes to confirm the new association or No to cancel — The orphaned report folder is now associated with the selected Ascent folder. However, it is likely that the Machines the Reports were previously associated with do not exist in the new Ascent Folder. A message will display advising whether this is the case, and that the orphan reports must now be associated with existing Machines in the newly paired Ascent folder.


103

7. Click Yes — If you click No, you can return to the Orphaned Report editor later by reopening the Report Reassociation tool and clicking Reassociate Machine. This button will only display when orphan report items are detected. The Orphaned Report editor is split into three panels:

• The left panel lists all orphaned reports which may be reassociated with existing Machines.

• The central panel lists the Ascent Folders contained in the open Ascent database (these Folders contain the Machines with which you may reassociate the orphan reports).

• The right panel lists the Machines contained in the Ascent Folder selected from the central panel.

NOTE: The right panel will initially be blank when you open the Orphaned Report editor. It will only populate once an Ascent folder has been selected from the central panel.

8. Select an orphan report from the left panel. 9. Select the Ascent folder containing the machine you wish to

associate the report with from the central panel — This should be the same Ascent folder selected when you reassociated the report folder earlier. All machines contained in the Ascent folder will be listed in the Ascent Machines panel on the right.

10. Select an Ascent machine from the right panel. 11. Click Associate — A confirmation message will display, asking

whether you wish to associate the report with the machine. 12. Click Yes to confirm the new association or No to cancel. 13. Repeat this sequence for all orphan reports shown in the Reports

panel on the left — As they are reassociated, they will be removed from the panel.

14. Click Close to close the Orphaned Report editor when no further reports are listed.

15. Click Close to close the Report Reassociation Tool — The previously orphaned report folders and reports now display in the bottom left navigator list of the Ascent folder and machine(s) with which they have been associated.


104

Orphaned Report editor

Report Reassociation tool

Previously orphaned report folders


105

Machine Summary Report

The Machine Summary report lists the recordings status of Machine Points stored within a folder within a specified time range. Machines are placed below one of three possible tables according to their recordings status:

• Not Recorded — No expected recordings taken. • Partially Recorded — Some expected recordings taken. • Recorded — All expected recordings taken.

Machine names are listed below the Machine column. Actual recordings taken relative to the expected numbers are listed below the Fully Recorded, Partially Recorded, or Not Recorded column.

The times and dates of the last recordings measured for each machine are listed under the Last Recording Date column.

To select a report date range:

1. Right-click within the Report window. 2. Select Date Range (Range) — The Select Date Range window opens. 3. Enter the required date range. 4. Click OK — The report will refresh using the date range specified.

NOTE: The date range you select will be used as the default when next you open the Machine Summary report.

Notes Report

The Notes report lists all notes stored within a Folder, ordered by Machine. Notes for individual Points and any associated measurements are displayed below each Machine listed.

To select a report date range:

1. Right-click within the Report window. 2. Select Date Range (Range). 3. Enter the required date range. 4. Click OK.

NOTE: The date range you select will be used as the default when next you open the Notes report.


106

Routes Due Report

The Routes Due report lists all routes in the current folder that are due to be recorded today. If required you can change the date (e.g. you might wish to see which routes are due next week). To do this:

1. Right-click the background > Select Setup Report. 2. Enter a new date. 3. Click Continue.

Structure and Route Reports

The Structure and Route reports generate text descriptions of the contents of your database. The Structure Report lists all machines, points, measurement locations, and schedule entries in the current selection. If you have used the Asset ID field when setting up machines, this information will display in the Structure report. This is useful if your company uses another software system to track the cost or performance of its assets. For example, each of your company’s assets might have a unique "Asset ID" number. You can now specify this in Ascent to make these easier to identify.

Using the Asset ID field


107

To run structure and route reports:

1. Select a machine. 2. Select Reports > Structure Report. 3. Right-click the background > Select Setup Report to include bearing

part numbers in the report. 4. Tick the Include Bearing Part Numbers checkbox. 5. Select Click here to continue to generate the report — The Route

report creates a list of all route entries (the measurement locations on a route).

6. Select a route to produce a list of route entries or click a machine to generate a report for all routes that include this machine.

7. Select Report > Route Report. 8. Right-click the background > Select Setup Report to include

schedule entries or remove them from the report. 9. Tick or untick the Include Schedule Entries checkbox. 10. Select Click here to continue to generate the report.

Structure report


108

Route report


109

Automated Reports

If you need to print a large number of charts or reports, this process can be carried out very quickly using the automated report system in Ascent. An automated report creates a printable multi-page output of the latest recordings using the chart or report you choose. For example, you can create an alarm report of the latest recordings at every schedule entry on a machine and compile these into one printable report (one alarm report per page).

To generate an automated report:

1. Open the chart or report you wish to print. 2. Select an item in the navigator (e.g. a machine). 3. Select View > Automated Report. 4. Select the items you would like the automated report to be

generated for. 5. Click OK — Nothing will be printed yet. 6. Select the color scheme for the report, whether to show page

numbers, adjust the paper layout, and more (if required). 7. Click Preview. 8. Click Close to close the preview window. 9. Click Print to send this report to a printer. 10. Click Export to Word if you wish to annotate the chart before

printing — This will open the report as a Microsoft Word document so you can add comments and highlight areas of interest, etc.

NOTE: If you want to selectively choose items to generate an automated report on, such as specific locations on several different machines, you can tag individual items and create a report of just those items. Tagging is a method of grouping selected items so that operations can be carried out on them collectively. See Tagging for more information on tagging and how to create an automated report on tagged items.


110

Automated report

Printing an automated report

Section 4 — Plot Data

111


This section explains how to plot data.

Use Charts

This section provides an overview on plotting your data and the features you can use to analyze your data (e.g. fault frequencies and baseline measurements).

To use a chart:

1. Select a schedule entry on the navigator tree — The navigator list will display the recordings that belong to this schedule entry.

TIP: You might need to expand a Machine, Point and/or Location to see a schedule entry.

2. Double-click a recording to plot it — This is indicated by the triangle

and date/time stamp (e.g. ).

NOTE: Double-clicking a schedule entry will plot a spectrum if this is a frequency domain measurement, or a time waveform if this is a time domain measurement. The newest recording under the schedule entry will display by default.

NOTE: Linear speed values display on charts only when the Machine has been configured as a Linear Speed machine (right-click the Machine in the navigator, select Edit > Set Speed Enter to Linear speed).

3. Right-click the chart > Select Chart Display > Horizontal Grid (or Vertical Grid) to show or hide gridlines.

4. Right-click the chart > A submenu will open. 5. Select Chart Legend — This opens another submenu that lets you

choose which data you want displayed on the bottom of the chart.

EG: Select Show all info to make the <set RPM> and <add note> labels visible at the bottom of the chart panel. Note that if these labels have already been set, they will not be displayed.


112

Zoom and Pan

Zooming and panning enable you to take a closer look at a specific area of interest on a chart. Listed below are the zooming and panning methods available.

Pan

The chart can be dragged in any direction to display sections that are hidden from view.

To pan the chart, right-click and hold the mouse button, then drag the chart to either side or up/down.

To return the chart to its original location, follow the instructions for zooming out.

Zoom in on Rectangular Area

To zoom in on a rectangle area:

1. Select an area on the left of the chart section that you wish to zoom in to.

2. Hold down the mouse button while you drag a rectangle across and down to the right — This will create a dashed rectangle around the region of interest.

3. Release the mouse button to perform the zoom.

Zoom in on a rectangle area


113

Zoom Out

To zoom out of the chart, left-click and hold the mouse button > drag a rectangle up and to the left on the chart — The zoom rectangle will display with a large X in it. When you release the mouse button, the chart will return to its original size and location.

Zoom in Horizontally

To zoom horizontally, left-click the side of the range you wish to zoom in to > Drag your selection right or left > Release the mouse button to zoom.

If you start a horizontal zoom left of the chart area, the zoom will start exactly on the left axis (i.e. from zero frequency). Click left of the left axis to zoom by 200% (you can do this repeatedly to zoom the chart in 200% increments).

A waveform chart shown after horizontal zooming

Zoom in Vertically

To zoom vertically, click the left mouse button above or below the range you wish to zoom in on > Drag the selection up or down the other side of the range.


114

Zoom using Mouse Wheel

If your mouse has a wheel, you can zoom vertically by moving the mouse cursor over the left axis of the chart and spin the wheel.

To zoom horizontally, hold the mouse cursor over the bottom axis of the chart and spin the wheel.

Use Cursors

Cursors are a valuable tool for analyzing your data. They can be used to show the amplitude and frequency of a peak, identify harmonics, and show the frequency difference between two peaks.

Ascent uses 'sync interpolation' to estimate the true value of the peak. This only applies to spectra that are not interpolated already, and not displayed in a dB scale.

There are two cursors available — One for each mouse button. Cursor A is assigned to the left mouse button. Cursor B is assigned to the right mouse button.

Place Cursor on Chart

To place a cursor on a chart:

1. Move the mouse cursor over a plot line — The mouse pointer will change to a cross hair.

2. Left-click to place Cursor A on the chart.

Positioning a cursor on a chart


115

Toggle between Cursors

To toggle between cursors, press the . (period/full stop) key to toggle between the two cursors. If the other cursor has not yet been activated, it will be placed at the same location as the current active cursor.

Move Cursors using Arrow Keys

To move cursors using the arrow keys:

1. Press the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor along the data points of the selected recording — Red downward-facing arrows will display on the chart, indicating multiples of the current cursor position's x value (orders).

2. Press SHIFT as you move left and right to move in 1 pixel increments only.

3. Press CTRL as you move left and right to jump to the next peak and execute a peak search.

NOTE: You can access other cursor commands by right-clicking the chart background and selecting Cursor A or Cursor B.

Control Sideband / Orders Display

To control the sideband/orders display, right-click the chart > Select Harmonic Display — The submenu contains options enabling Orders and Sidebands.

If Orders Only is selected, markers will display at multiples of the current cursor position's x value.

With Sidebands/Orders selected, if both cursors are active, the markers will be cantered on the primary cursor (Cursor A) and located at intervals either side of this point at distances equal to the difference between the two cursors.

These options can also be activated by pressing the keyboard shortcut keys O and S when you have cursors active on a chart.

O = Orders Only S = Sidebands/Orders


116

Move Between Plots on Chart

To move between plots on a chart:

1. Select a measurement from the navigator list. 2. Press the up and down arrow keys to move between plots on the

chart: • Select Chart Display > Stacked — The cursor will move up and

down between the plots on the stack. • Select Chart Display > Waterfall) — The cursor will move

backwards and forwards between the plots. • Select Chart Display > Normal) — The cursor will search up or

down at the current position for another recording to jump to.

Switch off Cursor

Press ESC to switch off cursors.

Snap to Peak

To make the cursor snap to the (interpolated) top of the nearest peak:

1. Press CTRL + P — The amplitude and frequency of this peak displays. 2. Right-click anywhere on the plot line to activate Cursor B — The

amplitude and frequency display, along with the difference in frequency between the two peaks.

NOTE: You can also position a cursor by double-clicking your mouse — The cursor will automatically snap to the top of the nearest peak.


117

Linked Cursors

You can display one or more linked cursor on a related spectrum or waveform graphs (e.g. from Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) recordings you have taken). Once you have done this you can zoom, pan, trace, stretch, or compress the X axis of the selected area of interest on both graphs simultaneously. Using these features makes it easier to understand the combined data.

NOTE: It is not possible to use linked cursors on graphs with differing axis units.


118

To navigate related data using linked cursors:

1. Open the required spectrum or waveform chart. 2. Select an area of interest on one of the related charts to display one

or more cursors. 3. Examine the selected area on both graphs using the following

methods — The linked graphs adjust accordingly: • Zoom — Drag your mouse around the area you wish to zoom in

to. • Trace — Press the left or right navigation arrows on your

keyboard to move the cursors to either side of your selection. • Stretch/Compress — Scroll your mouse wheel forwards and

back to stretch or compress the graph. • Pan — Right-click the graph to move it up, down, or around.

TIP: Drag your mouse left and up to undo the zoom.

View of linked charts before zooming

View of linked charts after zooming


119

Undoing a zoom action

Disable Linked Zooming and Cursors

Linked cursors and zooming are enabled by default. If required you can disable these features. To do this:

1. Open the required spectrum. 2. Select Spectrum (Parent) > Untick the options to suit your

requirements: • Linked Zooming • Linked Cursor A • Linked Cursor B


120

Disabling linked zooming and cursors


121

Plot Multiple Recordings on One Chart

To plot several recordings on one chart:

1. Display a chart.

2. Click the Hold button — You will prevent a chart from being cleared when new recordings are added. You can use this with the Add button to plot several recordings together on one chart for easier comparison.

3. Select another recording.

4. Click the Add button to plot the selected recording on the same chart.

5. Add more recordings if required.

TIP: If you are plotting several recordings from a single schedule entry, use the CTRL or SHIFT key to select more than one recording at a time.

Recordings do not need to be taken from the same measurement location or even the same machine. For example, you can select recordings from the same location on two identical machines and view the vibrations levels of both on one chart. You can also plot recordings from different points on the same machine to see how they compare.

The following waveform was created by selecting three recordings taken at one measurement location using velocity, acceleration, and displacement measures.


122

Plotting multiple recordings on one chart

Choose which Recordings to Display

You can choose which recordings display on a chart by selecting items from the axis, units, and domain submenus. For example, you can right-click the chart > Select Restrict to axis > Horizontal — The chart will only display recordings taken on the horizontal axis.


123

Chart Modes

You can use Ascent to display multiple recordings in Normal, Waterfall, and Stacked chart mode.

To switch between different chart modes:

1. Right-click a chart > Select Chart Display. 2. Choose the required mode.

TIP: The shortcut keys on the right of this menu provide the same functionality. Press these key combinations while viewing a chart to display a different chart mode.

Selecting the required chart mode

The example charts that follow show four recordings plotted on one chart. You can plot multiple recordings by selecting multiple recordings using the Hold function or your mouse.

MORE: See Plotting Multiple Recordings on One Chart.


124

Normal Chart Mode

This mode displays all the plots on the same 2D axis. Use the right-click menu or CTRL + N to toggle this mode.

Normal chart mode


125

Waterfall Chart Mode

Waterfall chart mode presents the plots in 3D view. You can use the right-click menu or CTRL + W to toggle this mode.

To use waterfall chart mode:

1. Adjust the depth and orientation of the chart by pressing CTRL and dragging the chart in any direction using the left mouse button.

2. Adjust only the depth of the waterfall chart by selecting Options > Waterfall Depth.

3. Display a filled waterfall chart by right-clicking the chart and selecting Chart Display > Allow Filled Waterfall.

NOTE: Select Chart Display > Fill Waterfall in 3D to create a 3D waterfall chart.

4. Reverse the plot order of the waterfall so that the most recent recording is moved to the front by right-clicking the chart and selecting Reverse Plot Order.

Waterfall chart mode


126

Stacked Chart Mode

Stacked chart mode presents the plots one above each other in 2D view. You can use the right-click menu or CTRL + S to toggle this mode.

You can right-click Chart Display and select Use Multi-Colored Legend to apply different colors to each recording on the chart. If you do not select this option, the default colors are used (blue for the selected recording, black for all others). You can choose the required colors to plot data using the Schemes system.

MORE: See Changing Colors for Printer and Screen for details on how to change the colors.

Stacked chart mode

Create On-chart Remarks

You can use On-Chart Remarks to annotate your charts. To do this:

1. Right-click the chart where you wish to add an on-chart remark > Select On-Chart Remarks > Add.

2. Enter the text for the remark. 3. Click OK. 4. Right-click the chart and select Cursor A (or B) > Add Remark or

press CTRL + R.


127

Maintain Library of Frequently Used On-chart Remarks

You can maintain a library of the on-chart remarks you use often. To do this:

1. Click the Library button — The new remarks library window displays. 2. Select Edit Library > New Remark to add a new remark. 3. Enter the remark. 4. Click Done. 5. Click Edit Library to edit any existing remarks. 6. Edit the remarks. 7. Click Done — You can reuse these remarks from the library list by

double-clicking or selecting them and clicking Add.

Create on-chart remarks

Move On-chart Remarks

To move an on-chart remark:

1. Move the mouse cursor over the required remark until a rectangle displays beneath it.

2. Left-click and hold the mouse while dragging to move the on-chart remark: • Click and drag the text to 'stretch' the line that anchors the

remark. • Click and drag the line enables you to move both the line and

the text to a new position.

Moving an on-chart remark


128

Spread Out Overlapping Remarks

If your on-chart remarks are set too close together, you can space them more evenly. To do this, right-click a remark > Select Spread out.

Edit or Delete On-chart Remark

To edit or delete an on-chart remark, right-click the remark > Select Edit text or Delete.

Define RPM of Recording

If you know the running speed of your machine you can enter this value directly. To do this:

1. Click the <set RPM> label on the bottom chart legend — If this is not visible, you can right-click the chart and select Chart Legend > Show all info to display it.

2. Enter the RPM value. 3. Click OK.

Use Ascent to Calculate RPM

To calculate the RPM of a recording, you need to identify the 1X peak. To do this:

1. Move the mouse cursor until it is over the first big peak on the spectrum.

2. Double-click to place the cursor at the top of this peak — The cursor may appear to jump off the spectrum. This is because the true peak may lie between two FFT values.

3. Press CTRL + 1 to open the Set 1X RPM window — The frequency of the current peak will display.

4. Click OK to accept this value as the machine running speed.

MORE: See Setting RPMs for Multiple Recordings to learn how to set the RPM values of all the recordings and/or schedule entries at a machine.


129

Using Ascent to calculate the RPM

View Data in Orders or Revolutions

Once the 1X RPM is defined you can view the chart in Orders (for spectra) or Revs (for waveforms). The recording must have its 1X RPM set to ensure Ascent knows how long one revolution takes. Only relevant options will be available from the menu.

View Chart in Orders

To view a chart in orders, right-click the chart > Select Bottom Axis > Orders.

To view a chart in revolutions:

1. Display a waveform. 2. Right-click the recording in the navigator list that was used to plot

the waveform > Select Set 1x RPM to set the 1X RPM. 3. Enter the RPM value. 4. Click OK. 5. Right-click the chart > Select Bottom Axis > Revolutions.

Display Fault Frequencies

Displaying fault frequencies only applies to spectrum charts. To display fault frequencies on a spectrum chart you need to define:

• The 1X RPM value for the recording so that orders can be displayed — See Defining the RPM of a Recording.

• A bearing or gear at the point containing these measurements.

NOTE: If you want to display user-defined fault frequencies, you will not have to add a bearing or gear to this point. Defining your own fault frequencies is explained shortly.


130

To display a fault frequency:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to display a fault frequency: • Click anywhere on the chart > Press CTRL + F5 to open a

window that lists the fault frequencies available at this location. • Right-click a chart > Select Fault Frequency Markers > List.

2. Select the fault frequencies you wish to display on the chart: • BPFO — Ball pass frequency outer. This indicates how many

times a defect in the outer race of the bearing will be passed over by a ball or roller during one shaft revolution.

• BPFI — Ball pass frequency inner. This indicates how many times a defect in the inner race of the bearing will be passed over by a ball or roller during one shaft revolution.

• FTFO — Fundamental train frequency outer. This is the speed at which the rollers or balls will move around the bearing, relative to the outer race speed.

• FTFI — Fundamental train frequency inner. This is the speed at which the rollers or balls will move around the bearing, relative to the inner race speed.

• BSF — Ball spin frequency. This indicates how many times an individual ball or roller will rotate within the races during one shaft revolution.

3. Click the Options button if you want to set the number of orders and sidebands to display.

4. Click OK. 5. Click the Close button to close the list. 6. Use EITHER of these methods to cycle through the fault frequencies

on the chart: • Select Fault Frequency Markers > Next (or Previous). • Press F5 to access the previous frequency or F6 to access the

next frequency.


131

Displaying fault frequencies

Remove Fault Frequency from Chart

To remove a fault frequency and all its sidebands:

1. Press CTRL + F5. 2. Select the fault frequency in the list. 3. Click Delete.

Copy Fault Frequency to Additional Point

To copy a fault frequency to an additional point:

1. Select a point to display its associated fault frequencies in the navigator list.

2. Right-click the fault frequency > Select Copy item to Clipboard. 3. Right-click the point where you want the fault frequency to be

placed > Select Paste.

TIP: You can also use CTRL + C and CTRL + V to copy and paste navigator list items to other levels in the navigator.


132

Nudge Fault Frequencies

Bearing fault frequencies can vary slightly depending on wear, axial load, and speed variations. Ascent lets you ‘nudge’ fault frequencies on the chart so you can see if the frequencies would line up with some adjustment.

When fault frequencies are displayed on the chart, you can nudge them up to 25%. To do this:

1. Click the fault frequency label (i.e. bearing part number). 2. Drag the label left or right as required.

TIP: You can also press SHIFT + F5 and SHIFT + F6 to nudge the currently displayed fault frequencies by a small amount.

Define your Own Fault Frequencies

You can create user-defined fault frequencies which can then be displayed on a chart to highlight the frequencies of known problem sources e.g. electrical line frequency. These do not require you to add bearings or gears to a point as you will supply the frequency information yourself. User-defined fault frequencies are associated with points on a machine in the same way as regular fault frequencies.

NOTE: Clicking the point will display any existing user-defined fault frequencies in the navigator list.


133

To define your own fault frequencies:

1. Create a new fault frequency using EITHER of these methods: • Right-click a point in the navigator tree > Select New > Fault

Frequency.

• Double-click a particular peak to snap the cursor to the peak's apex > Press CTRL + M — The frequency of your selected peak will display in the Fundamental Frequency field.

2. Enter a description for this fault frequency — A text label with this description will display above your fault frequency markers when they are plotted on the chart.

3. Tick the Sidebands checkbox > Enter the fundamental frequency and optional sideband frequency if required — These can be represented either in absolute frequency (Hz/CPM) or orders.

4. If you want this fault frequency to automatically display when one of the selected point's recordings is plotted, select Always Visible.

NOTE: If this option is not selected, the fault frequency will be hidden until you press F5 or F6 to display it.

5. Select the required marker > Click OK — The marker and text description label display above the fundamental fault frequency and any orders/harmonics: • Sidebands are displayed as arrows, the same color as your fault

frequency marker. We recommend you use different colors for each fault frequency so sidebands can be easily identified.

• You can display the fault frequencies you create on a chart, in a list, or nudged like system-defined fault frequencies.


134

Define your own fault frequencies

Manage Fault Frequencies

To add, edit, and delete fault frequencies:

1. Display a chart. 2. Use EITHER of these methods to open a list of all fault frequencies

(user and system-defined) on your chart: 3. Right-click your chart > Select Fault Frequency Markers > List. 4. Press CTRL + F5. 5. Click Edit to change an existing fault frequency.

TIP: To edit a fault frequency directly on the chart, double-click the text label for the fault frequency.

6. Click Delete to remove a fault frequency.

NOTE: Only user-defined fault frequencies can be edited or deleted. System-defined bearing and gear fault frequencies cannot be changed.

7. Click Add to create an additional fault frequency.


135

Set and Display Baselines

A baseline recording is a vibration measurement taken on a machine which is considered to be in good condition. The baseline is used as a comparison recording with which to observe changes in the vibration patterns.

To set and display baselines:

1. Right-click a recording in the navigator list > Select Set Baseline — This will make the recording a ‘baseline recording’.

2. Close the chart — You will be prompted to save your changes. 3. Click Yes if you want to include baselines on this type of chart

automatically in future — If you select this option the chart will always attempt to load the latest baseline recording, even if the plot limit (the number of recordings that may be displayed) has already been satisfied. If you have set a plot limit of 6, there may be seven recordings on the chart if the baseline was not one of the six most recent recordings. When you open a trend chart and plot the spectrum overalls, a red circular marker displays around the baseline recording's data point so the baseline can be easily identified.

Set and display baselines

Display Baseline RMS Values on vb Instrument

When taking recordings on your instrument, you can display the RMS value of the baseline recording so it can be compared with the measurement you have just taken. See Baseline Recordings for more information.


136

Waveform Analysis

The licensed feature will only be available to you if it is included as part of your license agreement. If you wish to enable this feature please contact [email protected] or your distributor for more information.

Ascent has several special tools for viewing and analyzing time domain data. To access these:

1. Select a time domain (waveform) recording in the navigator list. 2. Select Analyze > Partial Waveform Analysis — The new chart that

opens displays the waveform and an empty chart below it. Partial Waveform Analysis is a tool you can use to select a portion of the waveform and convert it to a spectrum.

3. Press and hold CTRL > Select and hold the mouse button as you drag it to either side — A green line follows the mouse, showing you how much of the waveform you have selected.

4. Release the mouse — The spectrum will display in the bottom chart. Repeat the process to zoom in on different areas of the waveform: • The spectral peaks appear rounded if you have only selected a

small amount of data. This is because the resolution of the spectrum is proportional to the number of samples selected in the time domain. You can zoom and pan both charts and right-click to display a menu with various chart display options.

• You can select Analyze > Freq Based Waveform Analysis to plot a spectrum of the time domain data. Use the mouse to select a range of frequencies in the spectrum. The software will take these frequencies and display them as a waveform in the bottom chart.


137

Conducting waveform analysis


138

Waveform Audio Playback

This feature is only if included in your license agreement. If you wish to enable this feature, please contact [email protected] or your distributor for more information.

You will need a computer with a sound card and an appropriate playback device (headphones or speakers) to use this feature.

To use the waveform audio playback feature:

1. Select a schedule entry containing a recording in the navigator tree — The navigator list will display the recordings that belong to this schedule entry.

2. Double-click a time domain recording (indicated by the triangle and date/time stamp).

3. Right-click the waveform chart > Select Audio > Play Waveform to listen to the waveform recording.

4. Select Export Waveform to save the audio file (.WAV format) to your PC.

Waveform Peak-to-Peak and Averaged Crest Factors

Waveform charts include 'True' Peak-to-Peak and Crest Factor values by default, together with the recording's overall power level.

True Peak-to-Peak

'True' Peak-to-Peak is a useful indicator of the amplitude of a waveform measurement. It is calculated by measuring the difference between the absolute highest and lowest peaks in a vibration waveform. High peak-to-peak values typically indicate the presence of high-level impact signals against low-level background noise that results from mechanical damage.


139

Averaged Crest Factor

The Averaged Crest Factor value of a waveform measurement is useful for quickly identifying overall levels of impacting within a bearing.

This mathematical value is calculated in Ascent by dividing the true peak-to-peak amplitude of a waveform measurement (encompassing the entire Y axis) in half, then dividing this figure by the waveform's overall RMS amplitude. A 'perfect' sinusoidal waveform -- with a true peak-to-peak value of '2' divided in half then divided by its overall RMS of .707 -- results in a Crest Factor of 1.41.

As a Crest Factor rises above the 'best case' value of 1.41, it grows increasingly indicative of surface damage resulting from bearing, cage, or race contact with bearing fragments or pitted surfaces.

NOTE: The overall RMS values of recordings are calculated at the time of their measurement.

True Peak-to-Peak and Crest Factor Values


140

Convert Waveforms to Spectra

You can use Ascent to automatically convert a waveform to a spectrum by changing the chart axis from time to frequency. To do this:

1. Display a waveform. 2. Right-click the chart > Select Bottom Axis > Frequency — You can

control the parameters used to calculate the FFT (e.g. number of averages, overlap percentage, and type of window to use.

3. Select Options > Automatic FFT Options to see the full list of commands.

4. Make the required changes. 5. If you have already plotted the spectrum, double-click the recording

again in the navigator list to replot the spectrum using your new settings.

NOTE: You can set alarm bands and envelopes on waveform data. When you do this, Ascent will automatically conduct the FFT to check the alarm. However, this is not recommended as an FFT generated from a single waveform inherently has either less averaging or less resolution than a complete, averaged FFT. Processing times may also be long when dealing with significant quantities of data, or if using an older or slower computer.

Long Time Waveforms

This feature is only available for select vbX000 and vbX portable instruments — Please refer to the specifications in your Instrument Reference Guide.

vbX instruments with this capability can take continuous recordings over a period of up to 229376 seconds or 63.7 hours (for a single channel recording using an Fmax of 1500 CPM/25 Hz). Once these recordings are transferred, Ascent will store them in a single schedule entry.


141

Set Measurement Unit Preferences

You can choose your preferred measurement display units for spectrum and waveform charts so that all recordings, regardless of what measurement units were used to record them, will be displayed in your chosen units. For example, you can display all velocity recordings in mm/s by setting this preference in the Velocity Spectrum Amplitude menu. Once this setting has been selected, all future velocity measurements will display in mm/s until other units are selected.

You can set unit preferences for acceleration, velocity, displacement, current, and temperature. Overall values for waveforms and spectra specify bearing dimensions in imperial or metric units.

NOTE: Changing the units does not change recordings stored in the database, only how they are displayed.

1. Select Options > Unit Preferences. 2. Move the mouse cursor down the list of options to open submenus

containing the available units: • Acceleration, velocity, displacement, and current Spectrum

Amplitude — Left axis scale on spectra charts. • Waveform Amplitude — Left axis scale used by waveforms. • Power Level — Spectrum and waveform overall values and

power band alarms.

NOTE: The overall vibration level displayed on the chart does not need to use the same units as the left axis. For example, you can scale the left axis in 0-peak and the overall in rms.


142

Setting your measurement unit preferences

Switch Between Hz and CPM

To switch between Hz and CPM:

1. Select Options > Unit Preferences > Frequency. 2. Select your preference.

Switch Between Velocity, Acceleration, and Displacement

To switch between velocity, acceleration, and displacement:

1. Right-click the chart > Select Left Axis. 2. Select your preference.

View Electrical Current Spectra in dB

You can view the Y axis for an electrical current spectra in decibels. Units in these charts are shown as uA dB and calculated in idB, 1uA rms.

To view an electrical current spectra in decibel (dB) units:

1. Open the required current spectra. 2. Right-click the chart > Select Chart Display > Left Axis Toggle dB (if

available).


143

Changing the electrical current spectra view from mm/s


144

Viewing the spectra in decibels

Customize Scale of Charts

This page describes the options available for customizing a scale of charts.


145

Left and Bottom Axis Scaling

The left axis of a chart will scale automatically to accommodate the highest peak. The truncated images below show how auto-scaling affects your chart display.

The image below shows how the vibration level at this location increased each time recordings were taken. The top value of the left axis scale has gone from 0.22 mm/s to 0.3 mm/s to 3.5 mm/s to fit the data.

You can customize the default scaling of charts in several ways. To access these options, select Options > Auto-Scaling.


146

Left axis auto-scaling


147

Ignore Hz Below

To ignore Hz below, enter a value in Hz below which data on spectra will be ignored for auto-scaling purposes. This will force the chart to enlarge lower amplitude peaks. This is particularly useful for recordings with large 'ski-slopes' (e.g. displacement recordings or recordings that have been converted from acceleration to velocity or displacement). The default and recommended value is 4 Hz.

Original chart

Same chart with Ignore Hz Below (350) applied


148

Y-Margin Percentage

Enter a percentage value to set the extra space that will be left above and below plots.

NOTE: These settings are saved and apply globally to all charts.

You can force your charts to temporarily use a fixed axis scale. To do this, you set the minimum and maximum values for the left and bottom axes. The fixed axis setting will be applied to all recording plots that use this chart type until you close the chart or Ascent.

To set the left axis scaling:

1. Right-click the chart > Select Chart Display > Left Axis Minimum (or Maximum).

2. Enter a value. 3. Click OK — The units used will be the same as those specified for the

chart. I.e. if your chart uses mm/s, entering a minimum value of 0 and a maximum of 5 will set the chart scale to start at 0 mm/s and finish at 5 mm/s.

NOTE: Bottom axis scaling options are available from the same menu and are set in the same way. The left and bottom axis settings will override the 'Ignore Hz Below' and 'Y-Margin Percentage' settings.

Chart with 5% Y-margin


149

The same chart with no margin

Set Fixed Axis Scale Permanently

Left and bottom axis scaling can be permanently set for any type of chart (including all those available from the Chart button dropdown field). This change will be applied globally to all charts of this type.

To permanently set a fixed axis scale:

1. Set the values. 2. Select View > Save.

Remove Fixed Axis Scaling / Reset Auto-scaling

To remove fixed axis scaling and reset auto-scaling:

1. Right-click the chart area > Select Chart Display > Left Axis Minimum (or Maximum).

2. Delete the value from this field to switch auto-scaling back on — This procedure will temporarily restore auto-scaling if you have permanently fixed the axis scale.

3. To remove a fixed axis scale permanently, follow the steps above then select View > Save.


150

Hide Peaks

When analyzing a spectrum you can place a cursor on a particular frequency and dim the color of unwanted harmonics and sidebands. Hiding peaks that are not of interest makes it easier to focus on other smaller ones that would otherwise be difficult to see in complicated spectrums.

Hide Frequency in Harmonic Series

To hide one or more frequencies in a harmonic spectrum:

1. Open the required spectrum. 2. Select Cursor Harmonic Display > Harmonics Only. 3. Place your cursor on the peak or series of peaks you wish to hide. 4. Use EITHER of these methods to hide one or more peaks to the right

of the selected peak: • Right-click a blank space in the graph > Select Cursor A or

Cursor B > Select Hide Peak. • Press Delete.

5. Enter of select the number of peaks you wish to hide in the harmonic series.

6. Click OK.

TIP: Press CTRL + Delete to redisplay hidden peaks.

TIP: Once you have hidden a peak, you can scroll your mouse wheel to zoom in to the remaining peaks of interest.


151

Selecting the number of peaks you wish to hide in a harmonic series

Hidden peaks in the harmonic series


152

Hide Sidebands

You can dim the color of one or more sidebands of a fundamental frequency. To do this:

1. Open the required spectrum. 2. Select Cursor Harmonic Display > Harmonics or Sidebands. 3. Place your cursor on the fundamental frequency of the sidebands

you wish to hide. 4. Use EITHER of these methods to hide one or more of the sidebands

on either side of the selected peak: • Right-click a blank space in the graph > Select Cursor A or

Cursor B > Select Hide Peak. • Press Delete.

5. Enter or select the number of sidebands you wish to hide. 6. Click OK.

View of spectrum before sidebands are hidden


153

View of spectrum after sidebands are hidden on either side of the selected fundamental

frequency

Views

A view is a customized report or chart that lets you define your own ways of browsing the data in the database, i.e. what data is plotted and how it displays.

Click Report to see the full list of predefined report views.

Click Chart to see the full list of predefined chart views.

NOTE: The views shown here may differ from those on your PC. Ascent only displays the features you are licensed to use. NOTE: You can also choose a view by using the shortcut keys, such as F2, as shown on the right-side of the menu.


154

The following chart view options are available:

• 6Pack — Any 6Pack measurements (simultaneous Spectrum, Waveform, High Frequency Spectrum, High Frequency Waveform, Demod Spectrum and Demod Waveform measurements) imported from compatible SCOUT/vbX instruments.

• Acceleration Spectrum in dB and Linear — AdB (or vdB for velocity recordings) and linear spectrum charts of the selected recording(s).

• Bode Plot — Two charts, one showing how amplitude varies with frequency, the other showing how phase varies with frequency.

MORE: See Bode Plots.

• HVA Spec — Three separate spectrum charts showing the last recorded horizontal, vertical, and axial measurements of the

currently selected point . • Multi-Spectrum — A stacked spectrum chart of the latest

recordings at the selected item (e.g. the latest recordings for each location on a selected point or all the latest recordings on a selected machine). If a location has more than one schedule entry, the newest recording from the most recently recorded schedule entry will be shown.

• Orbit — The physical path travelled by a shaft within a bearing.

MORE: See Orbit Plots for information on collecting data to produce orbit plots.

• SpecStack — A stacked chart of the four most recent recordings

at the selected schedule entry . • SpecTrend — A spectrum of the currently selected recording

and a trend of overall values for all recordings taken at that schedule entry. To display a spectrum, you must have a recording or schedule entry selected.

• Spectrum — A spectrum of the selected recording. • SpecWfm — Simultaneous spectrum and waveform recordings

taken with compatible SCOUT/vbSeries portable instruments. • Top 10 peaks — Amplitude values of the 10 highest peaks in a

spectrum and lists the frequencies they occurred at.


155

• Trend — Trend chart of overall vibration levels for a series of recordings associated with the currently selected machine/point/location/schedule entry.

• Vel+Demod — Four separate charts showing all recordings at

the selected location . The charts displayed are: waterfall, spectrum, trend and demodulation (if a demodulation measurement has been taken - otherwise this section of the chart will be empty).

• Waterfall — Waterfall chart of all recordings at a selected schedule entry.

• Waveform — Waveform of the selected time domain recording. • WaveformFFT — Waveform of the selected time domain

recording and a converted FFT spectrum.


156

Chart view options


157

Multiple recordings can be displayed simultaneously for easy comparison. For example, the HVA Spec view plots the most recent horizontal, vertical, and axial measurements of the currently selected point and displays them simultaneously in three separate charts. Selecting another point in the navigator tree will apply the view to that point and update the chart display.

HVA Spec view

Highlighting and color coding are used to make each view as informative as possible. For example, when a chart is displaying multiple recordings, the currently selected recording is highlighted in the navigator list and also shown on the chart in a different color from other recordings to make identification easier.

Views such as SpecTrend or Vel+Demod display several types of charts together on one screen. This enables you to view an individual recording in different ways. It also lets you see how it compares with other recordings in a trend or waterfall chart.


158

Vel+Demod view

With any view displayed, when you select a different recording in the navigator list, the view will update to display that recording. In the previous Vel+Demod example, the spectrum and demodulation charts on the right will update to display new spectra. The waterfall and trend charts will highlight the individual recording using coloring and cursors.

You can create your own customized charts and reports to display data however you wish. Once you have created a new view it will be added to the list under the Chart button. Here you can select it like any other view.

MORE: See Walkthrough: Creating your own Views.


159

How Views Work

Views are sensitive to the selection in the navigator. They will plot data from the currently selected machine, point, or location. For example, if you select a Trend view, selecting a machine in the navigator tree will trend overall vibration levels of recordings for all locations on that machine. Selecting a point will trend the recordings for all locations on that point.

A view will only display data if the view's data type matches the selected recording(s). For example, to display a waveform you must select a time domain recording. To display a trend chart, you must select multiple recordings (or an item that contains several recordings such as a point).

To stop the chart from automatically showing what is selected in the navigator tree, click the Hold button.

To display more than one recording on a chart:

1. Click Hold. 2. Use the Add button or double-click recordings to add them to the

display.

TIP: You can select multiple recordings simultaneously using drag and drop. See Selecting Multiple Items for more information.

You can have multiple views open at the same time. If you select a different view without closing the previous one, the new view will open on top of the old view. Tabs will display at the edge of the chart to indicate which views are open. You can select the tabs to toggle between views.

Tabs indicating which views are open


160

Convert View to Image

You can print a view to create a paper copy of it. You can also save a view as a Word document and annotate it before printing. Alternatively, you can save a view as an image file and open it in a graphics program for further manipulation. Once you have saved your data in an electronic format, you can email it.

To convert a view to an image:

1. Click Word to create a Word document containing a picture of the view you currently have open.

2. Resize the picture and add captions or other explanatory text. 3. Add additional views to the document using EITHER of these

methods: • Create more Word files to cut and paste from. • Copy more views directly from the clipboard by selecting View >

Copy to Clipboard > Paste this picture in a suitable text editor or another program.

TIP: If a view is made up of several charts (e.g. the four-chart Vel+Demod view) you can copy an individual chart to the clipboard by right-clicking it and selecting Copy to Clipboard.

4. To save a chart as an image file: a. Right-click the chart > Select Save Chart to File. b. Select the required file format (.jpeg, .gif, .bmp, .emf, or .wmf).

Trend Data

It may be possible to get a good indication of the presence of certain defects from a single measurement. However, it is more common practice to watch for changes in the measurements over time. To do this, you trend a series of recordings and measure the changes in overall levels.

The following trend chart was created by selecting a point with two measurement locations. Each plot line shows a trend of the overall vibration level at one of the locations.


161

Trend chart

You can use Ascent to plot a trend chart of overall levels for all recordings:

• On a machine • On a point • At a location • Taken for a schedule entry


162

Trend Data

To trend data:

1. Select any item in the navigator tree.

2. Select Chart > Trend — The trend lines shown on the chart depend on the: • Trend Enters selected (spectrum overalls, alarm band levels, etc)

— Right-click the chart > Select Data Enters to see the full list.

• Amplitude units selected for the left axis — Only trend data that is compatible with the amplitude units on the left axis can be shown. For example, you cannot trend velocity data with the left axis set to acceleration.

When left axis units are set to Default, Ascent will try to pick the best units for the left axis. Any trend data that cannot be shown because the left axis units are incompatible with the data will have Not shown - click here to view displayed in the legend.

MORE: See Trending Band Alarms and Trending Envelope Alarms.


163

Choose Data Types for Trend Chart

To choose the data types the trend chart can display:

1. Right-click the chart > Select Data Enters. 2. Tick or untick the options as required in the Data Enters panel. 3. Right-click the chart > Select Set History Count or Date Range if

you wish to filter by date or count.

NOTE: Selecting a history count of 1000 or more measurements may result in the trend chart displaying very slowly. Select a lower value if possible.

4. Right-click the chart > Select Left Axis to select a different amplitude scale for the left axis > Select the required option — These options change according to the amplitude type of the recordings (velocity, acceleration, displacement). Demodulation will display as acceleration.

The bottom axis of a chart can be displayed in time/date format or Index (data points are plotted against a numbered, evenly-spaced axis). For most charts, time/date provides the most meaningful information as we are normally concerned with how the vibration looks/changes over time. However, in certain situations, the Index axis is more appropriate as it enables you to compare trends of recordings taken at different times. The example charts that follow show data trends from two schedule entries.

Two schedule entries


164

The first schedule entry contains recordings taken on a machine with a fault condition. The second schedule entry contains recordings of the same machine after the fault was repaired. These two schedule entries were then plotted on a trend chart to compare the before and after vibration levels. The first chart, using the time/date axis, puts a large gap between the two trends because the recordings are taken at different times.

Bottom axis set to date/time


165

The second chart uses the Index axis and ignores the time/date-stamps. It plots the recordings as a numbered series, making it easier to compare the levels of the two trends.

Bottom axis set to index


166

Use Cursors with Trend Charts

When you position your cursor over a recording plot line on a trend chart, the amplitude of the cursor position is described at the top right of the chart. Any notes assigned to that recording are listed below the cursor readout.

The recordings in the navigator list are linked to the chart cursor. You can select a recording in the navigator list to place a cursor corresponding to that recording on the trend chart. Conversely, you can select a data point on the trend chart to highlight that recording in the navigator list. (You will need to double-click the data point if no recording is currently highlighted).

Once you have placed a cursor on a chart, when you double-click a data point, the default view (waveform or spectrum) of the recording will open under the cursor.

If a recording has been set as baseline, a red circular marker will display around its data point when you plot a spectrum overall trend.

Trend chart of alarm levels showing cursor readout at top right


167

Single Frequency Trending

A single frequency trend plot is used to trend changes in vibration amplitude or phase at a particular frequency. For this type of chart it can help to use recordings taken with a tachometer and display the bottom axis in orders. This is so that speed variations will be compensated for if you are looking at a frequency that is relative to running speed.

The following image shows a single frequency trend chart created from a waterfall chart with four velocity recordings plotted.

NOTE: The double headed arrow has been added to the image to indicate the frequency being trended (Hz value shown at top) and the actual line drawn across the frequency of interest.

To plot a single frequency trend chart:

1. Select the schedule entry that contains the recordings you wish to trend.

2. Click the Chart button > Select Waterfall. 3. Right-click the chart > Select Cursor Trend > Visible. 4. Move the cursor over the frequency of interest > Left-click to place it

on the chart — The chart of trended amplitude values display to the right of the original chart.

5. Press the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor to different frequencies along the spectrum — The frequency and amplitude value display at the top of the chart. The trend chart will update accordingly.

6. To remove the trend chart, right-click it > Select Visible.


168

Additional submenu options

The following additional options on the submenu provide different options for displaying information contained in the trend chart:

• Display Size — Open a message where you can enter the display size for the trend chart. To make the trend chart fill half the chart area, enter 50 for the percentage value.

• Amplitude — Create a trend chart of amplitude values at a specified frequency (see previous chart image). This is the default action.

• Phase — Create a bode plot style chart of trended phase values at a specified frequency. Recordings must be taken with a tachometer to gather phase information.

• Estimate True Peaks — When using the Hanning window with FFT data, the phase values of frequency bins around a peak can vary by up to 180 degrees. Estimate True Peaks counteracts this effect by calculating the true peak amplitude and phase.

• Phase Zero Centered — The vertical axis will use 0° phase as its mid-point. Otherwise the center will be 180° phase.

NOTE: The following three options relate to the horizontal axis display — You may need to increase the trend chart display size to show all frequency values.

• Versus RPM — The horizontal axis will use RPM. • Versus Time — The timestamp of each recording is used to

determine its position along the horizontal axis. • Versus Index — Recordings are evenly spaced along the

horizontal axis. • Cursor Width — Frequencies will vary slightly with each

recording session. To counteract this variance, enter a value that determines how far Ascent will look for a peak on either side of the actual cursor position. The default cursor width of 5 Hz is usually appropriate.

• Other — Access the main chart display options i.e. this is the same menu you will see if you right-click the waterfall chart.


169

Single frequency trending


170

Orbit Plots

An orbit plot shows the motion of the center of mass of a shaft. You can plot a shaft's vibration in two directions simultaneously (e.g. vertical and horizontal) to get a trace of the motion of that shaft.

A perfectly balanced shaft with no movement in any direction produces a dot in the middle of the plot. Unbalanced or misaligned machinery may exhibit as circular orbits, figure eights, leaning orbits, or flat orbits. Rub or looseness may display as indents around the circumference of the orbit plot, or small loops around the larger plot orbit. You can use orbit plots to detect abnormal movements of the shaft in the bearing (e.g. unbalance, misalignment, or rubbing against a drive casing. The shaft movement will give you an indication of its cause. For example, if there is a lot of up/down movement, the machine feet might not be bolted down tightly enough.

Two probes are used when taking and analyzing enhanced orbit plot recordings. These are nominally referred to as X and Y. By convention, when viewing the machine from the driver to the driven end, the Y probe is positioned 90 degrees counter-clockwise from the X probe.

The direction of shaft rotation is not important for the X and Y position. You just need to ensure you view the machine from the driver to the driven end. For example, the Y probe will be positioned 90 degrees counter-clockwise from the X probe regardless of the actual angles and positions used.


171

The sensors used to take the measurements should be displacement probes. This is because we are measuring the physical movement of the shaft, not its speed. (You can take the readings with an accelerometer if no displacement probes are available but there will be a small loss of accuracy in the displayed plot when the signals are integrated.) The number of samples and measurement duration you choose determines the resolution and length of the orbit recording. We suggest 1024 samples and a duration that covers 4-6 revolutions of the machine being tested. For example, an 890 RPM system (14.8 Hz) has 1 revolution every 67 milliseconds (6 x 67ms = 402 ms). If you choose 400 ms for the duration, you will just capture 6 revolutions of the machine.

NOTE: Severe rub or looseness can produce random orbit plots. Once the recordings have been received in Ascent, you can select a recording from either location > Select Chart > Orbit+Waveform. The recording at the other location is automatically selected for plotting when you choose the orbit plot option.

NOTE: If you have modified the legacy Orbit chart, this might also display on the Chart menu.


172

The availability of orbit plot functionality depends on your licensing agreement. If you have the enhanced orbit plot functionality you will also be able to:

• Position your probes at custom angles (e.g. 45 degrees from vertical) and include the direction of the shaft rotation for display and analysis.

• Record tach pulses for any tach-triggered waveform recording, using one average.

• Easily take orbit plot recordings on a route you have set up in Ascent.

NOTE: When using your instrument to collect data on route, if the route includes corresponding recordings for two different axes on the same bearing, these will be collected as an orbit recording.

MORE: Contact your sales representative.

Workflow

Here is the workflow for using the enhanced orbit plot functionality — You will need to:

1. Set up schedule entries and a route for your orbit and waveform recording.

NOTE: If you are using Ascent with System 1 Basic Integration, you can set up your schedule entries automatically. To do this, right-click the required machine > Select Library > Bently Nevada > Bently Orbit.vbz3.

2. Send the schedule entries and route to your instrument. 3. Open the route on your instrument and set it as multi-channel, with

the lowest channel as Y (e.g. CH1) and the higher channel as X (e.g. CH2).

4. Take two simultaneous waveform recordings on route (tach pulses are recorded).

MORE: See your instrument reference guide.

5. Transfer the recorded data from your instrument to Ascent and use the Orbit+Waveform chart to review it.


173

Set up Schedule Entries

If you are using the System 1 version of Ascent, you can set up your schedule entries automatically. To do this:

1. Right-click a machine or point. 2. Select Library > Bently Nevada > Bently Orbit.vbz3.

Alternatively, follow these steps to set up the schedule entries and route for your orbit plot recording:

1. Create a machine. 2. Create a point. 3. Create two measurement locations. 4. Create an identical schedule entry for each measurement location.

Create Machine

To create a machine for your orbit plot recording:

1. Select the vb data folder in which you wish to create the schedule entries.

2. Select New > Machine to create a machine. 3. Specify the main shaft rotation as viewed from the driver to the

driven end of the machine: • Undefined • Clockwise • Counter-clockwise

NOTE: Specifying the shaft rotation makes it easier to understand how the shaft is moving in the bearing housing while it rotates. It also facilitates interpreting orbit plots in Ascent.


174

Specifying the main shaft rotation

Create Point

To create a point for the machine you created:

1. Right-click the machine > Select New > Point. 2. Enter a name for the point. 3. Tick Rotation is reversed if this is the case (e.g. this might be due to

a gearbox).

Creating a point for your machine


175

Create Measurement Locations

To create two measurement locations for the point you created:

1. Right-click the point. 2. Select New > Measurement Location. 3. Create a measurement location for the X axis. 4. Create a measurement location for the Y axis.

TIP: If required you can create custom axis entries, for example, Y (-45) and X (+45). To do this, click Add/Edit beside the Axis field in the Measurement Location window > Click Add on the Manager - Axis Name window > Specify a name and angle for the axis.

Creating a custom axis entry


176

Create Schedule Entry for Each Measurement Location

To create two identical schedule entries for each measurement location:

1. Right-click the first measurement location you created (for the X axis) > Select New > Schedule Entry.

2. Ensure only Waveform is selected in the Domain area. 3. Tick the Tach Triggered ... checkbox. 4. Tick the Record this schedule entry ... checkbox. 5. Specify the type of tachometer in the field provided > Click OK. 6. Select the schedule entry you just created > Press CTRL+C to copy it. 7. Select the second measurement location you created (for the Y axis)

> Press CTRL+V to paste the schedule entry under this measurement location.

Creating a schedule entry for each measurement location

Create Route

Once you have set up the schedule entries for your orbit plot recording, you will need to create a route for it. To do this:

1. Select the vb data folder containing the schedule entry and route you have set up.

2. Select New > Route. 3. Click Yes to add the measurement locations you have set up to the

route > Click OK.

NOTE: If required you can also set up an existing route.

Once you have created your route you can send it to your instrument. Once you have specified the X and Y axis on your instrument, you can take an orbit plot recording on route.

MORE: See your instrument reference guide.


177

Review Orbit+Waveform Recordings

Once you have taken an orbit plot recording and imported your data into Ascent, you can review it by selecting Chart > Orbit + Waveform. When you take an orbit plot recording, your instrument collects the tach pulses that occur. This means you can see the tach trigger marks on the Orbit+Waveform chart. The following details also display:

• Probe positions • Direction of rotation • Machine speed

TIP: You can use linked cursors on the waveform graphs to move the cursor mark on the orbit. The cursor will also display on the orbit graph (provided this is not filtered and the revolutions are not limited.

Tach-triggered marks display when you review your orbit plot recording in Ascent


178

Bode Plots

The licensed feature is only be available if included in your license agreement. If you wish to enable this feature, please contact [email protected] or your distributor for more information.

You can use Bode plots to identify and confirm the presence of resonance in a machine or structure.

A Bode plot is made up of two charts:

• The top chart shows phase angle versus machine speed. • The bottom chart shows signal amplitude versus machine

speed. You can analyze the plot to determine the speed(s) at which a resonance exists.

Set up Measurements

You can record a series of tachometer triggered spectra e.g. as you do for a coast-down or run-up test. The recordings must be taken with a tachometer so that phase information is available.

The frequency of the tachometer must be below the Fmax of the recording i.e. 100 Hz Fmax recordings on a 7000 RPM machine will not plot on the Bode plot because 1X phase and amplitude is not available.

Create Bode Plot

To create a Bode plot:

1. Select the schedule entry containing the series of spectra. 2. Click Chart > Select Bode Plot.

Ascent performs a peak search at the 1X frequency on every spectrum, extracting the peak frequency, amplitude, and phase. All these amplitude and phase values are then plotted against the frequency.

Change Size of Plot

To change the size of a plot, position your cursor over the grey area dividing line between the two charts until it changes to an up/down arrow then hold down the left mouse. button and drag up or down.


179

Bode plot

Analyze Bode Plot

The bottom chart left axis shows the amplitude of the 1X for all the speeds of the machine. If you have a peak in the bottom chart, this could be a resonance that is being excited by the running speed when the machine is operating at that frequency.

The top chart shows the phase of the corresponding peak. You should see a 180° change in phase across a resonance.

Select Different Harmonics

You can select different harmonics to analyze. For example, you can choose the 2X harmonic to see an analysis of the 2X vibration across all the recordings. If you have strong forcing vibrations at 2X (or 3X, etc), this could also help identify resonance as the 2X vibration goes through the resonant frequencies.


180

To select different harmonics:

1. Right-click the chart > Choose Select Harmonic to Extract (1X). 2. Enter the required harmonic you wish to extract. 3. Click OK.

NOTE: When the harmonic is not 1X, the frequency on the bottom axis is the frequency of the peak being analyzed, matching the Hz (or CPM) value of the display at the top right (i.e. 2X the running speed). The RPM value of the cursor readout is always the RPM of the measurement from which the amplitude/phase/frequency was extracted.

• Phase Zero Centered — If this option is selected, the vertical axis will use 0° phase as its mid-point. Otherwise the center will be 180° phase.

• Cursor Width — Determines the width of the peak searches performed on the original spectra during creation of the bode plot.

• Using cursors — Selecting any peak will display its amplitude, phase, and frequency plus the RPM of the recording it was extracted from. The readout is displayed at the top right of the chart.

• Zooming — Zooming is linked so the bottom axis (Hz/CPM) remains synchronized with the top chart axis.

Modal Analysis and Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) Data

In addition to reviewing FRF and Coherence data on your instrument, you can import this into Ascent for detailed viewing, reporting, archiving, and more. When you open a modal impact test recording, opening any recording in a group of related recordings, opens the other recordings. Use the linked cursor feature to review the data conjunctively.

MORE: See your instrument reference guide to learn more about transferring data from your instrument to Ascent.

NOTE: You can also send data from your instrument to Operation Deflection Shape (ODS) software such as ME’Scope to conduct a more detailed analysis.

TIP: Use the Chart menu if the recording displays an empty chart.


181

Modal Impact Charts

You can change the chart display to show just the modal impact data, or the modal impact and FRF data. To access these new chart options, select Chart > Modal Impact Data or Modal Impact FRF.

Selecting the Modal Impact Data chart view


182

Selecting the Modal Impact FRF chart view


183

Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) Chart

Once you have taken Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) recordings on your instrument, you can transfer these to Ascent for further analysis. To view the imported data, select Chart > Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS).

Reviewing your cross channel spectrum data in Ascent


184

Print Charts and Reports

To print the chart or report you currently have displayed:

1. Click the Print button. 2. Use the options provided to adjust the way your printouts will

display: • Scheme — Choose the color scheme to use for the printout. You

can view the charts on your screen in color but print them in black and white using different line styles to differentiate between the plots.

• Page numbers — Select the position of page numbers on the printout.

• Fit charts to page — Make charts fill up the entire page. If this option is not selected, charts will retain the aspect ratio they have on the screen.

• Margins — Adjust the amount of space to be left between charts and the edge of the paper.

• Portrait or landscape — Selects the orientation of the printout. • Effective Page Width in Pixels — Control the effective resolution

of the printout. Increase the number if the text is too big in the printout, or decrease it if the text is too small.

• Setup Printer — Select the required printer, paper size, and more.

• Export to Word — Open a Word document containing the chart or report you have displayed. The Word image will use the color scheme you specify in the Print window. You can save this document and email it as required.

3. Click Save as Default to make any of the settings you have selected the default.

NOTE: The Black and White scheme is chosen for printouts by default. If you have a color printer you may want to change this to Color to use color for the plot lines.

4. Click Preview to see what the printout will look like. 5. Click Print to send the print job to the printer or Cancel to return to

the chart.


185

Selecting your preferred printing options

Previewing a chart or report before printing


186

Schemes

Schemes define the colors, line styles, and fonts used on charts and reports. There are three factory default schemes to choose from. You can change these or create your own:

• Color — White background with color text and lines. This is provided as an alternative to the High Contrast scheme.

• High Contrast — Black background with colored lines and text.


187

• Black and White — This scheme is black and white and intended for use when printing charts on a black and white printer.

Change Colors for Printer and Screen

You can customize the appearance of charts, cursors, alarm displays, navigator items, and printed outputs. You can increase or decrease text labels to make them more visible. You can also change colors to highlight areas of interest. If you don't like the look of your changes you can easily reset the factory defaults.

To change or edit a color scheme:

1. Select Options > Edit/Change Scheme. 2. Select a different scheme from the dropdown field at the top of the

Schemes window. 3. Create a new scheme or rename the default one by clicking the >

button at the top right of the window — You will be asked to name a new scheme when you create one. The new scheme will display in the dropdown field and can be applied to your charts. You can then choose the chart background and plot colors for your new scheme.

4. Double-click a plot color in the Schemes window to change it (e.g. Selected Plot).

TIP: Plots are also identified by an angled line icon.

NOTE: Double-clicking list items with a letter icon will open a

text editor form. Double-clicking items with an angled line icon

will open a pen array form. Items with a icon to open a color selection box.

5. Click the Color button. 6. Select a color. 7. Click OK. 8. Use the other controls on the Pen editor panel to change the line

styles and widths of the plots.

EG: Click the Style dropdown field to choose a different line style.

9. To increase or decrease the size of the text, double-click a text label in the Schemes window.

10. Use the settings in the Font window to resize text, make it bold or italicized, choose a different size and color, or even choose a different font.


188

Changing colors for printer and screen

Restore Default Schemes

To restore the default schemes, select Options > Reset Scheme/Color Defaults to restore the factory default settings for the Color, High Contrast, and Black and White schemes.

Change Chart Plot Line Styles

The pen array editor is used to change plot line colors, styles (e.g. dotted or solid) and widths. To open the pen array editor, select a measurement from the navigator then click the square in the bottom left corner of the chart.

Edit Existing Pen

To edit the size, color, or appearance of an existing plot line pen:

1. Click the pen in the left column. 2. Change the color, style (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) or width values in

the right panel — A preview of your changes displays on the left. 3. Click OK — Your changes will be saved. The appearance of the graph

plot will be updated automatically for any graphs currently displayed.

Delete Existing Pen

To delete an existing pen:

1. Click the pen in the left column. 2. Click Delete — The pen will be removed from the pens list.


189

Create New Pen

To create a new plot line pen:

1. Select an existing pen in the left column. 2. Change the line color, style (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) or width

values in the right panel — A preview of your changes displays on the left.

3. Click Add — The new pen will be created at the bottom of the pens list.

Change Pen Display Order

To change the rank in which pens are ordered in the pens column, and therefore the order in which they will be used in graphs:

1. Select and hold the number to the left of a pen — A thick line will display above the pen you have selected.

2. Drag the line up or down the pens column to a new position. 3. Release the mouse button — The pen will be moved to the new

location within the column.

Selecting a measurement

Using the Pen Array editor


190

Keyboard Shortcut Keys

General

F11 Toggle Full Screen

F9 Receive from instrument

ALT+F9 Send to instrument

CTRL+SHIFT+S Set shortcut

CTRL+O Open file

CTRL+ALT+S Open the online device setup wizard (online systems only)

Navigator

DEL Delete

CTRL+E Edit

CTRL+X Cut

CTRL+C Copy

CTRL+V Paste

CTRL+ALT+R Record now

CTRL+T Tag

F10 Save data and refresh navigator

F12 Generate Exception report


191

Chart

CTRL+N Return to Normal view

CTRL+S Toggle Stacked mode

CTRL+W Toggle Waterfall mode

CTRL+F Expand to Full Screen

CTRL+D Open same chart in new window

CTRL+Z Remove the selected plot line when multiple plots are displayed on a chart

CTRL+F5 List fault frequencies

SPACE Go to next navigator item

Arrow Keys [up/down] Move up/down between plots on charts if in stacked/waterfall mode. Display next recording in navigator if in normal mode.

CTRL+SHIFT+C Copy chart to clipboard

CTRL+Y View Orbit

CTRL+B View Bode

CTRL+9 View Waterfall

CTRL+F4 Close

CTRL+F10 View Record details

CTRL+3 View HVA

CTRL+SHIFT+F Save chart to file

F2 View Spectrum

F3 View Waveform

F4 View Trend

F5, F6 Cycle through fault frequencies

F7 View SpecTrend

F8 View Vel. + Demod.


192

Cursors

ESC Switch off cursors

S Sidebands and orders

O Orders only

N No harmonics

Arrow Keys [left/right] Nudge cursors

CTRL+[left/right] Peak search

SHIFT+[left/right] Move 1 pixel at a time

. Switch between cursors

CTRL+M Mark fault frequency

CTRL+P Jump to peak

CTRL+1 Set RPM to cursor position

CTRL+R Add remark at cursor position

Section 5 — Alarms

193


You can create individual alarms for specific schedule entries or alarm templates which enable you to apply the same alarm to multiple machines.

Using alarm templates makes it easier to manage your alarms. Any change you make to a template will update every alarm using that template. For example, you could modify a template's alarm threshold or create additional thresholds within a band or envelope. Doing so would in turn update the thresholds of all alarms associated with that template.

Ascent enables you to manage alarms individually or as a group. Alarms that have been created from a template can still be edited individually without affecting the template.

NOTE: Some of the options shown on menus and forms will only be available if they are included as part of your license agreement. These options will be hidden or greyed out for users who are not licensed to use them. If you wish to license a new feature, please contact [email protected] or your distributor for more information.


194

Check Alarm Status

The alarm status of machines, points, etc is shown with colors in the navigator tree.

You can select Screen > Show Navigator Status Labels to control whether text labels of the status are shown as well (e.g. see the <Danger> and <Warning> labels in the image above).

Alarm status coloring is hierarchical. This means an item in the navigator tree (e.g. a machine) will display the color of the highest alarm level attained by one of its sub-elements. The image example above shows a machine with three schedule entries. All these entries have recordings that have triggered alarms. The dark red <Danger> alarm is a higher level alarm than the <Warning> alarm, so the machine is colored dark red.

Alarm color status enables you to identify at a glance, which schedule entry has set off the <Danger> alarm. Alarm status is always determined by the most recent recording at the schedule entry. Historical recordings do not affect alarm status.

Check Alarms Automatically when New Recordings Received from Instrument

To check alarms automatically when new recordings are received from your instrument:

1. Select Alarms > Check Alarms after Receive — If you switch this option off (by repeating the above process) you can check the alarm status of new recordings when required.

2. To check the alarm status of new recordings, select Alarms > Check all New Measurements for Alarms.

NOTE: Ascent automatically rechecks the alarm status of recordings when an alarm threshold is edited or when you make changes to your data that may alter the alarm status (e.g. changing the RPM values of recordings).


195

Colors indicating alarm status

Channel Inoperative Alarms

Previously the channel inoperative alarm would only show for a node in the navigator if all subnodes were reporting channel inoperative alarms. Consequently if only one measurement location on a machine was in a channel inoperative state, and the other locations were in an OK state, the machine would show as being OK. This made it hard to see when channels had problems and were not collecting valid data. To resolve this, channel inoperative alarms propagate upwards, making it easier to see when there is a problem.

An inoperative alarm will have a cross through it. The colors used for the alarms are:

• Green — OK • Yellow — Warning • Orange — Alert • Red — Danger

Channel inoperative alarms propagating up the navigator


196

Band, Crest Factor, and True Peak-to-Peak Alarms

Band alarms can be peak or power-based and cover a limited range of frequencies. For waveform measurements, two additional alarm options are available:

• Crest factor • True Peak-to-Peak alarms

When you select a schedule entry, the navigator list will display all the alarms associated with that schedule entry:

• Peak band alarms detect when a peak on a spectrum goes above a certain value.

• Power band alarms measure the overall RMS on a spectrum within a band of frequencies and compare that against a threshold value.

• Crest Factor alarms detect when the crest factor of a waveform measurement exceeds a specified value.

• True Peak-to-Peak alarms detect when the peak-to-peak dynamic range of a waveform measurement goes above (or below) a specified level.

Alarm status is always determined by the most recent recording at the schedule entry. When a recording triggers an alarm (by exceeding the alarm threshold), the alarm icon will change color to indicate the alarm status (e.g. Warning, Alert, Danger).

Band alarms are grouped together by the range of frequencies they cover. One band can contain different alarm thresholds for different alarm levels (e.g. Warning at 2 mm/s, Alert at 4 mm/s, Danger at 6 mm/s).


197

Peak Band Alarms

A peak band alarm defines a maximum threshold for any peak on a spectrum between two specific frequencies. For example, the following chart has four peak band alarms placed to raise an alarm if any large amplitude peaks develop between the running speed harmonics on the machine. The peak band alarms are indicated with arrows in the image.

Peak band alarms


198

Power Band Alarms

A power band alarm defines a maximum threshold for the overall amount of vibration between two frequencies on a spectrum. Another way to describe it would be a 'limited frequency range overall alarm'. Power band alarms are displayed at the top of a spectrum as dotted rectangles.

The frequency range covered by the alarm is indicated by the horizontal length and position of the rectangle. The alarm thresholds are indicated using colored lines across the alarm display region. The current power level (overall RMS level) within that band of frequencies is indicated using a bar that rises from the bottom of the alarm display region. When the power level within that band goes through an alarm threshold, the bar will change color to match the color chosen for that threshold e.g. red for Danger.

NOTE: The measurement units for the alarm display area can be different from those used on the chart. For example, if the chart is plotted in acceleration and uses m/s/s for the left axis, you can use any acceleration units for the alarm display area (e.g. g or cm/s/s). The spectrum overall value displayed to the bottom right of the band alarm will always use the same measurement units as the band (because they both measure power levels).

Power band alarms


199

Waveform Crest Factor Alarms

A waveform crest factor alarm defines a maximum averaged crest factor on a waveform. A 'perfect' sinusoidal waveform results in a crest factor of 1.41. As the crest factor rises above this value, it grows increasingly indicative of machinery damage.

MORE: See Waveform Peak-to-Peak and Averaged Crest Factor.

Waveform True Peak-to-Peak Alarms

A waveform true peak-to-peak alarm defines a maximum actual peak-to-peak dynamic range value (the power difference between the highest and lowest peaks) on a waveform. High peak-to-peak values typically indicate the presence of high-level impact signals against low-level background noise that results from mechanical damage.

Draw Individual Band Alarms on Chart

Peak and power band alarms can be 'drawn' directly onto a chart using the mouse. (This feature is not available for crest factor or true peak-to-peak alarms.) This method lets you identify frequencies of interest on a vibration chart and add the bands directly above them.

To add a single band alarm manually:

1. Right-click the chart at the exact frequency where you want the alarm to begin.

2. Select Alarm Bands > Add — The band alarm will be drawn from left to right.

3. Move your mouse to the right — A new band will display and follow the mouse until you left-click again on the chart to place it.

NOTE: A peak alarm icon displays in the navigator list, showing the frequency range covered by this alarm. You can change this default name to something more meaningful if required.

NOTE: The band alarm is configured to match the current chart display. If the chart bottom axis is expressed in orders, the band alarm will have its start and stop frequencies defined in orders.

You can use your mouse cursor to manually adjust peak band alarms on the chart.


200

Moving your mouse on the chart

Peak alarm icon

Change Alarm Threshold

To change the alarm threshold:

1. Move the cursor over the top of the band until it changes to an up or down arrow.

2. Use EITHER of these methods to adjust threshold values: • Press and hold the left mouse button > Drag the alarm

threshold up or down. • Use the Band Alarm editor to enter precise threshold values.

MORE: See Editing Individual Band Alarms.

Changing the alarm threshold

Change Start or Stop Frequency

You can use EITHER of these methods to change the start or stop frequency of an alarm band:

• Move the cursor over the left or right edge of the band until it changes to a left or right arrow > Press and hold the left mouse button while you drag the alarm to change the start or stop frequency.

• Use the Band Alarm editor to enter the new frequency values.

Changing the start or stop frequency


201

Create Power Band Alarms

To create a power band alarm:

1. Create a peak band alarm. 2. Create a peak band alarm on the chart. 3. Right-click the peak band alarm > Select Edit to open the Band

Alarm editor. 4. Select Power from the dropdown field. 5. Edit the thresholds > Make any other changes as required. 6. Click OK — The band alarm displays at the top of the chart.

Create power band alarms

Edit Individual Band Alarm

To edit individual band alarms:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to edit band alarms: • Right-click the band, crest factor, or true peak-to-peak alarm on

a chart (or the alarm's icon in the navigator list) > Select Edit to open the Band Alarm editor.

• To display the entire list of alarms on a machine, select the machine in the navigator > Click the Alarms button > Select an alarm from this list > Click Edit.

NOTE: The lower Alarm Template section of this screen will not be available if you are not licensed to use this feature.

NOTE: It can be useful to enter a description for the alarm in this window. When the alarm is broken, this information will be included in the exception report. For example, when placing a peak band alarm over the 1X peak on a spectrum, give the alarm the description 1X so that if the alarm is exceeded, the exception report includes this information.

2. Use the fields in the Band Alarm editor to adjust the frequency range.

3. Change the alarm band from peak to power, crest factor, or true peak-to-peak (or vice versa).

4. Create additional alarms above or below the existing one (use the Alarm type dropdown fields to choose Alert, Danger, etc).

NOTE: Select an option from the 'Data Enter' dropdown field if using multi-measurement parameter sets such as 6Pack.


202

Editing an individual band alarm


203

Select Measurement Units of Band Alarms

When you create a band alarm, the alarm's measurement units will default to the same as those used on the chart.

EG: If the chart left axis uses mm/s 0-peak, the alarm will also use mm/s 0-peak.

The measurement units for the alarm can be different from those used for the chart. You can select different units if required.

EG: If the chart is plotted in acceleration and uses m/s/s for the left axis, you can use any acceleration units for the alarm, such as g or cm/s/s.

NOTE: Alarms will only be displayed if their amplitude units (velocity, displacement, or acceleration) match those used by the chart. For example, if your alarms are using acceleration units and you change the left axis scale to velocity or displacement, the alarms will not display.

NOTE: If the band alarm unit does not match the template unit, a message will display at the bottom of the panel beside the Update using template button. To change the alarm unit to match that of the template, click the Update using template button.

You can right-click an alarm band to access relevant menu options.

NOTE: This ability does not apply to crest factor or peak-to-peak alarms.

Hide or Display Band Alarms

To hide or show band alarms, right-click an alarm band > Select Alarm Bands > Tick or untick Visible.

Hide or Display Text Descriptions on Band Alarms

To hide or display the text descriptions on band alarms:

1. Right-click the alarm band > Select No Text to hide the band alarm text.

2. Select Band Descriptions or Band Overalls to display the name or overall power in the alarm band.


204

Remove Band Alarm

You can use EITHER of these methods to remove an alarm band:

• Right-click the band > Select Delete. • Select the alarm icon in the navigator list > Press Delete.

Resize Band Alarm Display Area for Power Bands

You can use EITHER of these methods to resize the band alarm display area:

• Right-click the band > Select Set Size — This enables you to set a percentage value of the amount of screen area you would like the alarm band to use.

• Press and hold the right mouse button on the power alarm plot area > Drag the mouse up and down.

Rescale Band Alarm Display Area (left axis scale)

You can rescale the band alarm display area using EITHER of these methods:

• Press and hold the right mouse button on the band alarm plot area > Drag the mouse left or right.

• Right-click the band alarm > Select Set Power Band Display Range.


205

Exceed Band, Crest Factor, or Peak-to-Peak Alarm

In the navigator, the alarm icon and the machine containing that alarm will change color to show the alarm status (Danger, Warning, etc).

When you plot a spectrum chart, you will see peak and power band alarms:

• Peak band alarm — The word Exceeded will display on the spectrum to indicate where the alarm has been broken.

Exceeded Peak band alarm


206

• Power band alarm — The band alarm will change color to indicate the alarm level (e.g. red for Danger, yellow for Warning).

Exceeded Power band alarm

When you plot a waveform chart, you will see waveform crest factor and true peak-to-peak alarms:

• Waveform Crest Factor alarm — The crest factor figure (top right of chart) will change color to indicate the alarm level.

Crest Factor alarm


207

• True Peak-to-Peak alarm — The peak-to-peak value will change color to indicate the alarm level.

Crest Factor alarm

The detailed Exception report will show the alarm name (or spectrum frequency range if it was unnamed) and the amount the alarm was exceeded by. It will also show the total amount of power in the band (for power band alarms) and the amplitude of the highest peak that broke the alarm (for peak band alarms).

Exception report

The Alarm report shows additional information, including the values of previous measurements and the percentage change from the last measurement.

Alarm report


208

Trend Band Alarms

You can trend alarm levels to help you predict when vibration levels are approaching, or will exceed, preset alarm limits. To trend band alarms:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to see a trend of the band value versus threshold for all recordings taken at this schedule entry: • Right-click a peak or power band alarm in a chart > Select

Trend this band.

• Double-click the alarm band icon (power , peak ) in the navigator list.

2. You can trend multiple band alarms for quick comparison and analysis. On a single chart you can use the Hold and Add button to trend peak and power-based alarms, alarms from different schedule entries, and even alarms that use different units (mm/s, in/s, etc).

3. Select a schedule entry containing some alarms you wish to trend.

4. Select the Chart button > Select Trend from the dropdown field — Ascent will plot trends of all the alarms at this schedule entry in the chart display area. The following image shows a trend plot of a schedule entry with seven alarms. Ascent automatically adds the spectrum overalls to the bottom of the list as these can also be trended (double-click the Spectrum Overalls label to plot the data). Trend lines are color-coded so you can see which alarm they relate to. If several trend lines use the same color, you can identify a specific trend by selecting a trend line on the chart, which will highlight that alarm in the chart legend.

5. Select the <Set Trend Enters> text in the bottom right corner to select the trend data types you want displayed — The alarm thresholds (Warning, Alert, Danger) are indicated by the colored bars running horizontally across the chart. If a single alarm trend is displayed, the left axis scale will use vibration units by default (e.g. mm/s rms). If several alarm trends are displayed, the left axis scale will use severity rank instead. Severity rank shows how high each band alarm's vibration levels are relative to its own thresholds. The left axis is scaled from 0-10 and thresholds are shown using a fixed scale of severity (2 = Warning, 5 = Alert, 8 = Danger) rather than a specific measurement unit such as mm/s. This enables you to show band alarms with different thresholds or measurement units on the same chart. If you change the left axis amplitude scale to a specific unit (e.g. velocity), only those that are compatible with that unit will be shown.


209

6. Right-click the trend > Select Left Axis to select a different left axis scale.

7. Select the required option from the dropdown field — These options change according to the amplitude type of the recordings (velocity, acceleration, displacement). Demodulation will display as acceleration: • Power Level — The left axis scale will use vibration units (e.g.

mm/s rms). Only power bands and spectrum overalls will display.

• Alarm Level — The left axis scale will use severity rank. All alarm band and envelope trend lines will display.

• Spectrum Amplitude — The left axis scale will use vibration units (e.g. mm/s rms). Only peak bands will display.

• Default — If one trend is shown, the left axis will use vibration units. If more than one alarm band or envelope trend is shown, the left axis will use severity rank. The following image shows the same trend chart after the left axis scale was set to Velocity Spectrum Amplitude. You will notice that several of the trend plot lines have disappeared. The trend lines that can be shown on a chart depend on the scale used for the left axis. Because we are now shown Velocity Spectrum Amplitude (i.e. peak band alarms), the Velocity Power Level alarms (spectrum overall and power band alarms) cannot be shown.

8. Select the Not shown - click here to view labels to toggle which trend plots are shown — This changes the chart's left axis scale to ensure the series you selected can be shown. In our chart example, selecting a Not shown label would change the axis scale to rms. The spectrum overall and power band alarms will display, the peak band alarms will disappear. By default, left axis numbering starts at zero and scales to fit your data by adding additional space above and below the bottom and top plot lines. You can deactivate this option off so that the axis number scale starts immediately below the bottom plot line (rather than at zero) and finishes just above the top plot line.

9. Right-click the chart > Select Auto-Scale to fit Alarms to rescale the left axis numbering — Different kinds of data can be shown or hidden on a trend plot depending on the trend types you select (spectrum overalls, alarm band levels, etc). These will toggle the trend plots that can be shown in a similar manner to the Left Axis options.

10. Right-click the chart > Select Data Enters to restrict the alarm types the trend chart can display.


210

11. Tick or untick the required options from the data types panel.

MORE: See Trending Data.

Trending band alarms


211

Envelope Alarms

An envelope alarm is usually based on a reference spectrum that is ideal or 'normal' for the measurement point. It specifies the maximum allowable amplitude for each frequency value in a spectrum. An alarm is raised if any part of the spectrum exceeds the envelope threshold.

Envelope alarms


212

Add Envelope Alarms to Chart

To add envelope alarms to a chart:

1. Right-click the chart > Select Alarm Envelopes > Add — You will be asked for a severity rating for this alarm.

2. Select an alarm type from the dropdown field — Warning is the default.

3. Click OK — An alarm envelope is drawn on the chart. The Alarm Envelope Generator displays at the top right of your screen. The Vertical and Horizontal percentage margins define the relative vertical and horizontal distance between the envelope and spectrum.

NOTE: The 'Warning' envelope line is colored yellow by default. You can change this later if required. See Changing Colors for Printer and Screen.

4. Drag the sliders on the Alarm Envelope Generator to change the envelope margins — The alarm shape changes on the chart as you make adjustments to the settings.

5. Click the down arrow icon to access advanced options: • The Minimum Margin adjustments define absolute minimum

amplitude and frequency margins between the envelope and selected spectrum.

• # points defines the resolution of the envelope. • Start freq enables you to exclude lower frequencies from the

envelope alarm region (where 'ski slopes' may occur). 6. Click OK.

Adding an envelope alarm to a chart


213

Edit Individual Envelope Alarm

Right-click the envelope plot line to access the relevant functions such as deleting and hiding/displaying the alarm.

Readjust Envelope Margins

To readjust envelope margins, right-click the envelope plot line > Select Adjust Margin.

Change Alarm Level

You can change the envelope alarm level (Danger, Warning etc) and adjust other properties using the Alarm Envelope editor. Use EITHER of these methods to open the editor:

• Right-click the envelope plot line > Select Edit Properties. • Right-click the alarm's icon in the navigator list > Select Edit.

You cannot change the Amplitude Units and Frequency Units settings once the alarm has been created. If you want an envelope that uses different units, delete the envelope and create a new one.

NOTE: Alarms will only display if their amplitude units (velocity, displacement, or acceleration) match those used by the chart. For example. If your alarms are using acceleration units and you change the left axis scale to velocity or displacement, the alarms will not display.

Changing the alarm level


214

Manually Edit Envelope on Chart

You can also edit envelope alarms manually using your mouse to push sections of the envelope up, down, or across. To do this:

1. Click the envelope plot line to select it — The mouse cursor will

change to a hand icon indicating that it can be used to push the envelope.

2. Click and hold the left mouse button > Drag the mouse cursor into the envelope plot line to push it.

3. Release the mouse button when finished — If you push the line down too far you can push it up again by moving the cursor below the envelope plot line and repeating this process.

4. Press Enter to save the changes or Esc to discard changes (the mouse cursor will return to normal).

Manually editing the envelope on a chart

Add Another Envelope

To add another envelope:

1. Right-click the envelope plot line > Select Add. 2. Follow the previous instructions for adding an envelope to a chart.

EG: If you have an existing Warning envelope set at 50% above the reference (ideal) spectrum, you can now add an Alert envelope at 150% above the reference.


215

Exceed Envelope Alarm

When an envelope alarm is exceeded, the word Exceeded displays on the spectrum to indicate where the alarm has been broken.

Exceeded envelope alarm

The Exception report will show the alarm type and the amount by which the envelope was exceeded. Note that the envelope may have been broken in more than one place, but only the highest exceeded value is shown on the exception report.

Exception report showing details of exceeded envelope alarm


216

The Alarm report shows additional information, including the values of previous measurements, and the percentage change from the last measurement.

Alarm report showing additional details of exceed envelope alarm


217

Trend Envelope Alarms

Envelope alarm trends are expressed by their 'percentage of threshold'. This is the greatest 'percentage of alarm level' for any peak in the measurement. For example, a percentage of threshold of 110% for a measurement means the peak that exceeded the alarm envelope the most, did so by 10%.

The following image shows an envelope plotted against percentage. The horizontal red line indicates the 100% alarm level of the envelope (i.e. when a peak touches any part of the envelope).

Envelope plotted against percentage

In the following image, data is scaled so that the:

• Minimum level occurs at 0 severity rank • Maximum occurs at 10 severity rank • Alarm crosses the appropriate alarm level line at the point at

which the envelope was exceeded


218

Same envelope plotted against alarm level

Overall RMS Alarms

An overall RMS alarm defines a maximum threshold for the overall RMS vibration of a measurement. An overall RMS alarm is a special case of a power band alarm where the start and stop frequencies encompass the entire measurement.

To create an overall RMS alarm, create a power band alarm with a start frequency of 0 Hz and a stop frequency of 1 000 000 Hz.

MORE: See Adding Band Alarms to a Chart, for instructions on creating the band and editing the frequency range.

Overall RMS alarms display automatically on trend charts just like other alarm bands. You can also right-click the overall RMS alarm band on a chart and select Trend this Band.


219

Set Alarm for Numeric Data Schedule Entry

You can set an alarm for a numeric data schedule entry. This could be an attached file, average value, or keypad schedule entry. Once you have set up the alarm, the numeric data schedule entry will change colour to alert you when the thresholds you have specified are exceeded.

To set an alarm for a numeric data schedule entry: 1. Select the entry that requires an attached file, average value, or

keypad schedule entry.

2. Click the Create a Numeric Data Alarm button on the Creation Palette.

3. Right-click the numeric data alarm you have created > Select New > Numeric Data Alarm.

4. Expand the dropdown field > Select the alarm type you want raised when the limits are exceeded.

5. Enter the thresholds required for this alarm in the fields provided.

Specifying the thresholds for a numeric data schedule entry


220

Example of numeric data schedule data entry in alarm

Use More Detailed Alarm Threshold

Basic Warning, Alert, and Danger alarm thresholds are suitable for most applications. However, additional options are available if you need them.

To use more detailed alarm thresholds, select Options > Allow Legacy Alarm Types. When you create or edit an alarm, these additional alarm thresholds will display in the Alarm type dropdown field. The thresholds can be applied to both envelope and band alarms.

Basic alarm thresholds

Additional threshold options


221

Create Alarm Template

An alarm template such as an ISO standard band alarm is an alarm that is defined once, then reused several times on different machines. When you create a template, you can use the alarm on several machines. If you later decide to change the template (e.g. to update an alarm's threshold), this change will be applied to all alarms using the template.

You can also modify an individual instance of an alarm without affecting the template. This is because editing an alarm removes its association with the template. This gives you the ability to apply general all purpose alarms to several machines, then customize the individual alarms later for more fine-tuned monitoring of problem machines.

Alarm templates are most useful when you want to use the same alarm settings on several machines (e.g. for monitoring specific fault frequencies such as a 1X running speed, bearing fault frequencies, etc).


222

Create Peak and Power Band Template

To create an alarm template:

1. Select a navigator item you wish to apply the alarm to (e.g. an entire machine).

2. Click the Alarms button — This opens the Alarm wizard which you can use to create and manage individual alarms and alarm templates.

3. Click Add. 4. Select the Alarm Band Frequency Range tab. 5. Enter the start and stop frequency for this band.

6. Click the browse button at the top right to open the Alarm Templates window.

7. Define the settings for this alarm template. 8. Click Add. 9. Enter a name to describe the purpose of this alarm (e.g. Gear Mesh

Frequencies). 10. Select the Thresholds tab — This is where you define the threshold:

• Unit — Acceleration, velocity, etc • Type — Warning, danger, alert • Amplitude

11. Select the threshold units for your alarm from the drop-down box: • For peak bands, select Spectrum Amplitude. • For power bands, select Power Level:

TIP: We recommend you select your normal preferred units under Options > Unit Preferences. This will avoid the need for excessive unit conversions in Ascent. NOTE: If the units you require do not display in the drop-down box, click More > Select a unit from the list > Click OK. If you select a unit that has no abbreviation, you will be prompted to enter one now.

12. Define the threshold amplitude and alarm warning level (alert, danger, etc).

13. Click Add. 14. Select the alarm level from the drop-down box. 15. Enter an amplitude value that will trigger this alarm when exceeded. 16. Click OK.


223

17. Click Add to add additional thresholds to this alarm > Define additional thresholds as required.

EG: You might want to do this to create separate warning, alert, and danger levels in a single band or envelope. Click OK to return to the Alarm Templates window. Your new alarm template will be highlighted.

18. Click Select to apply the template to your machines. The Alarm Creator window will open and display each schedule entry at the currently selected navigator item (you may need to select the Applicable Schedule Entries tab to see this). Schedule entries whose measurement units match those of your alarm (e.g. velocity) will already be selected.

19. Tick or untick the checkboxes to select the schedule entries you wish to have alarms created for.

20. Click OK twice. 21. Click Close.


224

Create Envelope Template

To create an alarm template:

1. Select a navigator item you wish to apply the alarm to. 2. Click the Alarms button — This opens the Alarm wizard used to

create and manage individual alarms and alarm templates. 3. Click Add.

4. Click the browse button to open the Alarm Templates window. 5. Define the settings for this alarm template. 6. Click Add. 7. Enter a descriptive name to describe the purpose of this alarm (e.g.

Gear Mesh Frequencies). 8. Tick the These generation parameters are for Envelopes checkbox. 9. Select the Thresholds tab — This is where you define the threshold:

• Unit (acceleration, velocity, etc) • Type (warning, danger, alert) • Threshold amplitude

10. Select the threshold units for your alarm from the drop-down box — Spectrum Amplitude and Power Level refer to band alarms. You can choose either to create your envelope.

TIP: We recommend you select Options > Unit Preferences to choose your normal preferred units. This will avoid the need for excessive unit conversions in Ascent. If the units you require do not display in the drop-down box, click More > Choose a unit from the list > Click OK. If you select a unit that has no abbreviation, you will be prompted to enter one.

11. Define the threshold amplitude and alarm warning level (alert, danger, etc).

12. Click Add. 13. Select the alarm level from the drop-down box. 14. Enter an amplitude value that will trigger this alarm when exceeded. 15. Select the Envelope Options tab.


225

16. Specify the width of the envelope around peaks in the spectrum — You only need to enter a value in one of the first three fields, however you can use more than one if required. If you select more than one of these options, the greatest width determined by these options will be used at each point (spectral line) in the envelope. Each width option is explained in detail following the image below. • Hz — This specifies a frequency at which the envelope will be

placed either side of a peak. For example, a value of 6 Hz will generate an envelope 3 Hz either side of each peak.

• Lines — This specifies the number of spectral lines between the envelope and each peak in the spectrum. For example, a value of 10 will generate an envelope five lines either side of each peak. We recommend this option for machines that run at or near the same speed from one recording to the next.

• Percentage of frequency — This specifies the frequency percentage the envelope will be placed either side of a peak. For example, a value of 10% around a peak at 2000 CPM will place the envelope 5% either side of the peak at 1900 CPM and 2100 CPM. At higher frequencies on the same spectrum, the envelope will become much wider. For example at 60 000 CPM, the envelope will extend 3000 CPM either side. We recommend this option for machines that run at variable speeds or whose RPM varies significantly from one recording to the next.

• Lines (number to ignore) — This specifies the number of spectral lines that will be ignored at the beginning of the spectrum. I.e. the envelope will be drawn around all frequencies except the first few lines. This helps avoid false alarms caused by the ‘ski slope’ often found at the low frequency end of spectra.

17. Click OK — You can add additional thresholds to this alarm. For example, you might want to create separate warning, alert, and danger levels in a single band or envelope. To do this, click Add again > Define additional thresholds as required.

18. Click OK to return to the Alarm Templates window — Your new alarm template will be highlighted.

19. Click Select to apply the template to your machines — The Alarm Creator window opens and display each schedule entry at the currently selected navigator item. Schedule entries whose measurement units match those of your alarm e.g. velocity, will already be selected.

20. Tick or untick the checkboxes as required to select the schedule entries you wish to have alarms created for then click OK.

21. Click OK again then Close to finish.


226

Apply Alarm Template to Additional Schedule Entries

After you have initially created and applied your alarm templates at selected schedule entries, you can apply these alarms to additional schedule entries at a later time. To apply the alarms:

1. Select a machine, point, or location. 2. Click the Alarms button. 3. Click Add.

4. Click the browse icon to open the Alarm Templates window. 5. Select the alarm template you wish to apply to your machine. 6. Click Select — The Alarm Creator window lists the schedule entries

on your machine. 7. Select the schedule entry checkboxes you wish to apply the alarm

to. 8. Click OK twice to apply the alarms. 9. Click Close to finish.

Applying an alarm template to additional schedule entries


227

Use Template to Edit Existing Alarm Thresholds

You can change the thresholds of existing alarms (those that were not created from a template) by applying an alarm template to them. Updating the thresholds will NOT change the frequency range of band alarms or the start frequency of envelope alarms.

To change an existing alarm threshold using a template:

1. Select the machine containing the alarms you wish to update. 2. Click Alarms — The Alarm wizard displays all the alarms at your

selected machine.

NOTE: If you have several different types and units of alarms, filter the alarms displayed using the drop-down box at the top of the window.

3. Select the alarms whose thresholds you wish to update.

TIP: Use SHIFT or CTRL to select more than one alarm in the list.

4. Click the Template button or select Templates > Edit template for selected alarm.

5. Select the template you wish to apply to these alarms. 6. Click Select — The Alarm Summary window displays the new alarm

information. 7. Click OK then Close to finish.


228

Edit Alarms Globally

To update an alarm everywhere it is used, you need to modify the alarm template. Modifying the template automatically changes every alarm using that template.

NOTE: If you want to change alarm settings for a single instance of an alarm, you will need to edit it individually (see Editing Individual Alarms).

To edit alarms globally:

1. Select the folder icon at the top of the navigator. 2. Click Alarms — The Alarm wizard displays all the alarms at your

selected machine.

NOTE: If you have several alarms of different types and units, filter the alarms displayed using the drop-down box at the top of the window.

3. Use EITHER of these methods according to your requirements: • Select Templates > Edit all templates.

• Select an alarm in the list that uses your template > Select Templates > Edit template for selected alarm.

4. Select a template to modify. 5. Click Edit. 6. Click OK to confirm you wish to edit this template. 7. Make the required changes. 8. Click OK — You will be prompted to update any alarms using this

template. 9. Click OK to confirm. 10. Click OK twice. 11. Click Close to close all windows.


229

Edit Individual Alarms

Any alarm based on a template can still be modified individually. Editing an individual alarm breaks the relationship between the alarm and its template. Changes to the individual alarm do not affect the template.

Subsequent changes you make to the original template will no longer be passed onto your alarm. This enables you to apply 'general all purpose' alarms to several machines using your templates. Once you have done this you can customize the individual alarms for more fine-tuned monitoring of problem machines.

NOTE: Changing the frequency range of a band alarm will not break the relationship between the alarm and its template.

You can edit alarms by plotting a recording and manipulating the alarm on the chart (see Editing Individual Band Alarms or Editing Individual Envelope Alarms).

If you are editing several alarms, it is easier to do this from within the Alarm wizard which displays the full listing of all alarms on each machine.

To edit individual alarms:

1. Click Alarms. 2. Locate and select the alarm you wish to edit. 3. Select Alarms > Edit. 4. Edit the alarm as required — This will break the alarm's association

with its template. 5. Click OK. 6. Edit additional alarms by selecting them and repeat the steps

above. 7. Click Close when you are finished.


230

Editing an individual alarm

Delete Alarm Templates and Alarms

You cannot delete an alarm template if it is being used by any alarms.

If you see the following message you will need to delete any alarms that are using the template before deleting the actual template.

To delete an alarm template:

1. Click Alarms. 2. Select Templates > Edit all templates. 3. Select the template you wish to remove. 4. Click Delete.

NOTE: If you see the error message shown above, follow the instructions below for deleting a template and its associated alarms.

5. Click OK to confirm the deletion. 6. Click OK. 7. Click Close to close all windows.


231

Delete Template and Associated Alarms

Deleting a template that is still being used by alarms is a two-stage process. You will first need to delete the alarms so the template is not being referenced by any other objects, and then delete the template.

To delete a template and any associated alarms:

1. Click OK to close the prompt window if you have not done so already.

2. Click Usage to see which alarms are associated with your template. 3. Click OK to confirm — The Tagged Items window lists all alarms

currently using your template. 4. Select the Operations menu or button > Select Delete. 5. Click Yes to confirm. 6. Click OK to close the Tagged Items window. 7. Select the template you wish to remove then click Delete. Click OK

to confirm the deletion. 8. Click OK then Close to finish

Section 6 — Additional Features

232


This section provides information on the additional functions and features available in Ascent.

Use Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries

You can use the Parameter Set / Schedule Entry editor to control the measurement parameters used by your instrument.

Edit existing schedule entry

To edit an existing schedule entry, right-click the schedule entry > Select Edit.

Create new schedule entry

Use EITHER of these methods to create a new schedule entry:

• Right-click a location > Select New > Schedule Entry. • Click the Build button to activate Build mode (click the Manual

Build Mode link if you are using the licensed Machine Builder wizard) > Select one of the [Add Schedule Entry] placeholders.


233

Reminders

A parameter set defines the actual parameters that will be used to take a recording (the measurement units, measurement domain, etc). You can reuse these as many times as you like.

A schedule entry represents a recording that will be taken at a measurement location. A schedule entry gets its parameters from the parameter set assigned to it. In the editor, invalid options are highlighted in red. If you see this, ensure you check the value you have entered.

You can use the Domain area to choose a measurement type or combination of measurements (on instruments that support these functions). This includes multi-measurement 6Packs, Demod spectrum and waveform, and standard spectrum and waveform recordings. Simultaneous multi-measurement types are only available on SCOUT/vbX instrument models, not vbX000 instruments such as the vb1000 or vb3000 or online devices such as the vbOnline or Ranger.

Your instrument can support a wide range of sensor types and their corresponding measurement units.

NOTE: This depends on the version of vb firmware you are using. Contact your local reseller or Commtest Instruments if you are unsure.

To choose a different type of unit or define your own unit, click Other Units.

MORE: See Keypad Schedule Entries to learn more about selecting or creating new units.

You can choose from parameter sets already in use using the dropdown field at the top of the window labeled Select Parameter Set.

NOTE: Switching between the Time, Frequency and Demodulation domains will enable different options on the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor. NOTE: The editor will also change depending on which instrument you are designing the parameter set for. Newer versions of the vb firmware have additional features that will only be visible when that instrument is selected in the Applicable vb Instrument tab.


234

Tabs

You can edit the information contained in the following tabs according to your requirements:

• Parameters tab — Set individual parameters such as the Fmax and number of averages to use.

• Channel/Sensor — Specify a channel and/or sensor other than the default for a particular instrument. You can click the Sensors button to define new sensors and edit existing ones (their sensitivity and settling times, etc). The sensor assigned to any schedule entry must match the type of signal being measured.

• Applicable vb Instrument tab — Choose the vb instrument these parameters will be sent to. This enables Ascent to indicate which settings are valid for that instrument.

• Baseline Overall RMS tab — Enter a baseline value that will display in your instrument when this schedule entry is being recorded. See Baseline Recordings for more information.

• FFT Options tab — Set the window type (Hanning or Rectangular) and overlap percentage.


235

Parameter Set / Schedule Entry editor

Fmin

Your instrument can be instructed to ‘zero out’ frequencies in a spectrum below a particular Hz value. This enables you to remove 'ski-slopes' or create special measurements that exclude low frequencies from the overall value.

The Fmin setting is available in the editor when a demodulation or frequency domain parameter set is being edited.

NOTE: The frequency resolution of the spectrum will not be affected by the Fmin setting. If the Fmin value is 100 Hz, the Fmax value is 125 Hz, and the Lines setting is 400 lines, then 400 lines of data will be taken from 0 Hz to 125 Hz. The lines corresponding to frequencies below 100 Hz will be set to zero.


236

Orders-based Parameter Set

You can specify the Fmax of a frequency-based vibration measurement in Orders instead of Hz. This means no matter what the actual running speed of the machine is, you can specify that the measurement should have a frequency range of 'n' orders of the running speed.

NOTE: Ascent must know the running speed of a machine to be able to display orders.

Create orders-based parameter set

To create an orders-based parameter set:

1. Right-click the machine > Select Edit. 2. Select Ask user for speed — You will be prompted to enter the

speed value when taking measurements. 3. Enter a value in the Default speed field — This will display on your

instrument's screen. You can simply press ENTER on your instrument to continue.

4. Right-click a location in the navigator tree > Select New > Schedule Entry to create a new spectrum schedule entry.

5. Select Orders instead of Hz for the Fmax units. 6. Specify the measurement lines of resolution and other

measurement values. These will vary according to the type of measurement required.

Your instrument will select an Fmax from the normal available Fmaxes that give at least the specified number of orders of frequency. For this reason, the recording will display in the navigator with an Fmax value in Hz/CPM. The range on the bottom axis will probably be slightly higher than the requested number of orders.

For example, if you choose 20 orders and an RPM of 1100: • The running frequency in Hz is 1100 / 60 = 18.33 Hz. • 20 times 18.33 = 366.6. • The smallest Fmax that will give a frequency range of 366.6 Hz

is 400 Hz. • When plotted, the number of orders shown on the bottom axis

will actually be 400 / 18.33 = 21.8 orders.


237

If the tachometer is being used to trigger the measurement, the RPM will be determined automatically.

In addition to setting frequency domain measurements in orders, you can set demodulation domain measurements in orders, and time domain measurements in revolutions.

Edit Parameter Set

The Schedule Entry and Parameter Set editors are integrated into one screen (the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor).

You can edit a single schedule entry by changing its settings in the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor. To do this:

1. Right-click the schedule entry > Select Edit. 2. Make the required changes — If several schedule entries use the

same parameter set, you can edit these collectively by modifying the parameter set assigned to them.

3. Select Edit > Manage > Parameter Sets — The Manager - Parameter Set window opens, listing all parameter sets in the entire site (the site contains all your folders, which in turn contain all your machines).

4. Select a parameter set. 5. Click Edit to open the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor —

Because you are editing the parameter set, rather than an individual schedule entry, the options on the editor that relate to schedule entries will be hidden. Any changes you make will be applied to all schedule entries that use that parameter set. This includes all Child Machines if the parameter set is currently being used by a Template Machine in the templating system.

Editing a parameter set


238

Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries on a Single Folder, Machine, Point, or Location

You can use the P/Sets button to open the Select Parameter Sets window. Here you can add, edit, or delete multiple schedule entries in a single folder, machine, point, or location. To access these options:

1. Select the navigator item containing the schedule entries you wish to work with.

2. Click the P/Sets button: • The Usage column in the Select Parameter Sets window shows

the number of measurement locations using the parameter set. • The Template Type column specifies whether the parameter

sets are template (master) entries. This is indicated by the prefix [T] for template, [C] for child entries, or blank for free entries that are not used by the templating system.

NOTE: Most entries will be blank.

3. Select a template type in the Machine Template Filter dropdown field to filter parameter sets by template type — Only parameter sets of the specified type will display in the parameter set list.

MORE: See the Template Machines section.

4. Click Add to All to open the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor and create a new parameter set — When you click OK, schedule entries will be created using this parameter set. They will be added to all the selected item's subitems.

EG: If you have a machine selected, schedule entries will be added to all locations. If you have a point selected, schedule entries will be added to all locations on that point.

5. Click Edit to open the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor and adjust any parameter sets being used by the schedule entries in this folder, machine, point, or location.

6. Select a parameter set on the Select Parameter Sets window.


239

7. Click Edit — Any changes you make to this parameter set will only be applied to schedule entries that are subitems of the currently selected item.

EG: On your machine structure, you might have two points and two locations at each point (four locations in total). The schedule entries at each location all use the same parameter set. You wish to edit the parameters for the two drive end schedule entries but don't want to change the parameters of the other schedule entries. Select the point labeled Drive End. Click the P/Sets button to open the Select Parameter Sets window. Select the parameter set (only one will display). Click Edit to make your changes. When you click OK, a new parameter set will be created and assigned to both drive end schedule entries. The other two schedule entries will use the old (unchanged) parameter set.

8. Click Remove to remove all schedule entries using this parameter set from the selected folder, machine, point, or location — This is the same as right-clicking individual schedule entries and selecting Delete. Removing the parameter set does not delete it from the database. It will still display in the Select Parameter Set dropdown field in the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor.

9. Click Modify Usage to see how many locations in this folder, machine, etc use the selected parameter set: a. Select a parameter set. b. Click Modify Usage. c. Tick the checkboxes to add or remove the parameter set from

multiple locations.

The bottom of the Select Parameter Sets panel contains configuration information about the selected parameter set:

• The left column specifies the Fmin and Fmax frequencies. It also shows the number of lines of resolution for any individually selected spectrum parameter set.

• The right column displays the waveform measurement duration, number of samples, and number of averages for any individually selected waveform parameter sets.

Select parameter sets panel


240

Columns that are not applicable to the selected parameter sets will be labeled N/A. All parameters will be listed as N/A if more than one parameter set is selected from the parameter set list.

Machine structure with points and locations


241

Clean up Parameter Sets and Schedule Entries

If you have several parameter sets or schedule entries and not all of them are being used, the Select Parameter Set dropdown field will contain unwanted duplicate entries.

NOTE: This field displays when you create or edit a schedule entry.

You can use the schedule entry and parameter set clean-up utility to find and remove entries that are not being used, and merge any duplicate entries into a single item. To access this option:

1. Select Database > Utilities > Clean-up Schedule Entries and Parameter Sets — The Clean-up Schedule Entries and Parameter Sets window opens, containing the following options: • Merge all duplicated parameter sets — Consolidate any

duplicate parameter sets using the same configuration in a single parameter set.

• Remove all unused parameter sets — Delete any parameter sets not currently used in the navigator (i.e. any parameter sets not actively used for measurements).

• Update all schedule entry names — Update the names of your schedule entries. This is useful if you have changed default measurement units, or if you changed the interface language for Ascent after creating a schedule entry.

• Merge all duplicated schedule entries — Consolidate duplicate schedule entries at the same measurement location. Consolidation is most likely to be successful when duplication follows the import of folders or machines from older Ascent databases.

2. Tick one or more checkboxes from the Clean-up Schedule Entries and Parameter Sets window.

3. Click OK then Yes to confirm the action — The clean-up process may take some time to complete.


242

Keypad Schedule Entries

You can create special keypad schedule entries in Ascent that let you define additional machine information you wish to collect (e.g. machine temperature or motor current). When following a route, your instrument will prompt you to enter this information using the keypad.

You can also use these prompts as reminders to perform additional checks (e.g. to check the oil level). When collecting the data, you can enter a value of one (1) for done or zero (0) for not done to record whether the check has been carried out.

NOTE: Keypad schedule entries can only be created in Ascent. They cannot be created or edited in your portable instrument.

Folders containing keypad schedule entries will send/receive to the instrument as normal. When the data has been collected and the folder is received into Ascent, the measurements will display as date/time stamped records in the navigator list (as with spectra and waveforms). The keypad schedule entries display in the navigator tree like a normal schedule entry but are differentiated by their numeric (123) icon.

You can trend the collected data values in the same way as other recordings using the Trend view.

MORE: See Trending Data.

Keypad schedule entry differentiated by numeric icon


243

Create Keypad Schedule Entry

To create a keypad schedule entry:

1. Activate Build mode by selecting Build and clicking the Manual Build Mode link.

2. Select the [Add Location] placeholder in the navigator tree where you want the keypad schedule entry created — The location Keypad Entry in the [Add Measurement Location] dropdown field is provided as a suggested location for keypad schedule entries but they can be placed in any location. In your instrument, the Keypad Entry location will display in the list of directions/axes when you select the machine location.

3. Select Edit > New > Keypad Schedule Entry.

NOTE: There is a faster way to create keypad schedule entries that does not require you to activate Build mode. Instead, you can right-click a location > Select New > Keypad Schedule Entry. This will open the window shown in the previous image. If you use this method you will have to use an existing location (rather than the designated Keypad Entry location) because the placeholders only display when Build Mode is activated.

4. Enter a prompt that will display on your instrument (maximum of 16 characters for vbX000 portable instruments and 50 for SCOUT/vbX portable instruments) — This prompt will be preceded by the word Enter when it is displayed on your instrument.

5. Select the units for temperature (-deg C and -deg F) from the Units dropdown field.

NOTE: To select any other type of unit, click More > Select a unit from the list > Click OK. If you select a unit that has no abbreviation, you will be prompted to enter one. NOTE: The abbreviations you enter are stored in a file called units.ini in the Ascent program folder.

6. Set the number of decimal places you wish to use.

NOTE: This will affect the range of values you can enter. For example, two decimal places allows you to enter values from -599.99 to +599.99. Zero decimal places allows you to enter values from -59999 to +59999. You can enter positive and negative values when collecting data with your instrument.


244

7. Enter a default value to display on the vb screen (optional) — The person collecting the data will not have to record this information unless the value changes.

8. Tick the checkbox provided if you want this data to be recorded as part of a route — Your instrument will prompt you for this data when you perform any route that includes the measurement location containing the keypad schedule entry.

NOTE: See also Associating Process Variables with Vibration Recordings for more information about the 'Display this value on all charts for this Machine' checkbox.

Selecting the [Add Location] placeholder

Create your Own Units

The list of engineering unit types in the unit selection window are based on the MIMOSA CRIS-v1 standard. To create your own units:

1. Click More to open the Units window, 2. Select one of the User defined unit slots (towards the end of the list). 3. Click Edit. 4. Enter an abbreviation for this unit (maximum of 16 characters) —

This abbreviation will be used in the Units and Default value fields. 5. Click OK twice to close the windows and apply your units — Once

defined, this new unit will remain in the list and can be selected like any of the default ones.

MORE: See Associating Process Variables with Vibration Recordings.


245

Edit Value after Collection

If you have entered the value of a keypad schedule entry incorrectly, you can change this once the schedule entry has been transferred to Ascent. To edit the value:

1. Right-click the recording in the navigator list > Select Edit. 2. Change the value as required. 3. Click OK.

Attached File Schedule Entry

Attached file schedule entries are similar to keypad schedule entries. However, instead of being entered via a portable instrument, they are entered directly into Ascent. You can attach image, audio, Word documents, and more to this type of schedule entry measurement for later reference and use. For example, you might want to attach files associated with an oil analysis report to a single location.

Typically alarm states are associated with this function. However, like keypad schedule entries, you can also use attached file schedule entries to collect measurements such as machine temperature or motor current, as well as arbitrary user-defined measurement values.


246

Create Attached File Schedule Entry

To create an attached file schedule entry:

1. Right-click a point or location > Select New > Attached File

Schedule Entry or click the Attached File Schedule Entry button on the creation palette.

2. Enter a schedule entry name into the Description field. 3. Select an appropriate operational mode from the radio buttons

available: • Value Entry Mode is used when you wish to manually enter

numeric measurement values, such as RPM or output current, as a schedule entry recording.

• Alarm Mode is used if you wish to manually enter alarm states (OK, Warning, Alert, Danger, Inoperative) as a schedule entry recording.

4. If you selected Alarm Mode proceed to the next step. If you selected Value Entry Mode, select a measurement unit from the dropdown field or click More to select a standard unit or to create a user-defined unit. Any previously selected user-defined or standard units will be listed in the Attached File Schedule Entry dropdown field.

5. Click OK. The schedule entry will now be created. The attached file schedule entry will display in the navigator tree and can be

identified by its paper clip icon.

NOTE: attached file schedule entries will not be transferred when a folder is sent to a portable instrument.

To edit an existing attached file schedule entry, right-click it from the navigator tree or list > Select Edit (or press CTRL + E).


247

Create Attached File Measurement

To create an attached file measurement:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to access the Attached File Measurement panel: • Right-click an Attached File Schedule Entry > Select New >

Attached File Measurement. • Select an Attached File Schedule Entry > Click the Create an

attached file measurement button from the creation palette.

NOTE: The panel displayed varies according to the mode you selected when creating the schedule entry (Value Entry or Alarm mode).

2. Use EITHER of these methods depending on the type of value you are entering: • Value entry — Enter a numeric value in the Trended Value field. • Alarm state — Select a state from the Alarm State dropdown

field. 3. Adjust the Date/Time fields to change the timestamp of the entry

manually. 4. Click Add to attach a file to the measurement — A standard

Windows selection window opens, enabling you to select the file(s) you wish to attach.

NOTE: You can select any file recognized by the Windows operating system. Attached files are listed in the Attached Files area once selected.

5. Click OK when you have entered a numeric value or alarm state and attached any files you wish to associate with the entry.

6. Edit an existing attached file measurement entry using EITHER of these methods: • Right-click the entry on the navigator list > Select Edit. • Press CTRL + E.

NOTE: Once you have recorded several measurements, these can be trended using Ascent's normal trending tools (e.g. reports and the 'Trend' chart). See Trending Data and Section 3: Reports.


248

Attached File Measurement Panel — Alarm Mode

Attached files

Manage Attached Files

You can use the Attached File Measurement panel to view, delete, or export files attached to a measurement.

View File

You can use EITHER of these methods to view a file:

• Double-click it. • Select it from the file list > Click View.

Delete File

To delete a file, select it from the file list > Click Delete.


249

Export File

To export a file:

1. Select it from the file list. 2. Click Export. 3. Select the location the file will be extracted to. 4. Click OK.

Add file

You can add a new file to any existing attached file schedule entry measurement. To do this:

1. Open an existing attached file measurement. 2. Click Add. 3. Select any files you wish to add to the measurement. 4. Click Open.

Average Value Schedule Entry

Average Value schedule entries are used to determine an average signal level from a specified sensor over a user-specified measurement period. The Average Value numeric value can be trended and alarmed in Ascent. For example, you can use this feature to measure power output from a wind turbine, or a proximity probe gap as well as arbitrary user-defined measurement values.

NOTE: Because the average of an AC waveform is zero, you will need to use DC-coupled sensors for average value schedule entries.

NOTE: Average Value schedule entries for Ranger devices are used exclusively for taking temperature measurements.


250

Create Average Value Schedule Entry

To create an average value schedule entry:

1. Right-click a point or location > Select New > Average Value

Schedule Entry, or click the Average Value Schedule Entry button on the creation palette.

2. Enter a schedule entry name in the Description field. 3. Select a tab that corresponds with the instrument type you will be

taking the measurement with: • vbOnline • vbX • Ranger Temperature

NOTE: Ranger devices can only be used to take temperature measurements using the schedule entry type.

4. Select the instrument channel the measurement will be taken with: • SCOUT/vbX instruments — Select a channel from the Channel

dropdown field.

• vbOnline and Ranger devices — Click the More button beside Channel to open the Device Channel Configuration window > Select an instrument from the vb Device dropdown field > Select a channel (axis for Ranger devices) from the Channel field > Click OK.

NOTE: Average Value schedule entries for Ranger devices are used only for taking temperature measurements.

5. Select the sensor type that will be used to take the measurement. • SCOUT/vbX instruments — Select the sensor type from the

Sensor dropdown field. To add a new or user-defined sensor, click Sensors > Configure a new sensor.

NOTE: To take this new schedule entry measurement when performing a route, tick the Record this schedule entry when performing a Route checkbox.

• VbOnline — Click the More button beside Sensor to open the Configure sensor window. From the new window, select a sensor type from the Sensor Enter dropdown field beside the channel that will be used > Select the ... option to create a new user-defined sensor type.

• Ranger — The Sensor field will be populated automatically after channel selection in the previous step, and cannot be adjusted.


251

6. Select a measurement duration from the Duration dropdown field if taking measurements on SCOUT/vbX or vbOnline devices.

7. Click OK — The new Average Value schedule item displays in the navigator list.

NOTE: See Associating Process Variables with Vibration Recordings for more information about the 'Display this value on all charts for this Machine' checkbox.

Creating an Average Value Schedule Entry

Tachometer Schedule Entry

Tachometer schedule entries are used to record a numeric RPM speed value from a tachometer.


252

Create Tachometer Schedule Entry

To create a tachometer schedule entry:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to access the Tachometer Schedule Entry window. • Right-click a point or location > Select New > Tachometer

Schedule Entry.

• Click the Tachometer Schedule Entry button on the creation palette.

2. Click the More button to open the Device Channel Configuration window.

3. Select the vbOnline or Ranger Station device from the vb Device dropdown field.

4. Select a tachometer input from the Tach dropdown field. 5. Click OK twice — The new schedule entry will displayed in the

navigator list, with the tachometer input selected in brackets.

Tachometer schedule entries

Keyphasor Tachometer Voltage Settings There is support for a wider range of voltage levels when working with a Keyphasor tachometer. This is useful if you want to take a tach-triggered recording to analyze the 1x phase or provide time synchronous averaging. It is also applicable if you simply want to measure the machine speed from the Keyphasor. You can select your preferred threshold for the Keyphasor on your instrument or by editing the appropriate parameter set/schedule entry in Ascent.

TIP: If you select Tach Triggering when the number of averages is higher than 1, the non-synchronous peaks will be averaged away. Consequently, Tach Triggering is NOT recommended when trying to find rolling–element bearing faults.


253

You can set up your database using your estimated appropriate Keyphasor threshold, which will typically be 13V. When you receive Keyphasor tach data from your instrument into Ascent, any threshold changes you made on your instrument while in the field are automatically updated in the database.

Specify Keyphasor settings in Parameter Set

To specify the Keyphasor threshold level in the parameter set:

1. Edit the required parameter set or schedule entry. 2. Enable or disable Tach triggered as required > Click OK.

NOTE: If the Tach Triggered checkbox is unticked, the tach input will only be used to determine the machine speed.

3. Select the required threshold in the Tach Type field.

TIP: Select the default 13V setting if the machine has a Keyphasor but you are not sure which threshold to use.

NOTE: You will be notified if you select 8V or 18V for the Keyphasor and your instrument is NOT compatible with these settings.

Setting up a parameter set for tach-triggered recordings


254

Pulse Count Schedule Entry

This feature applies only to 16-channel vbOnline devices.

You can use 16-channel vbOnline devices to retrieve and storing 'pulse count' rates from pulse output particle detection sensors. That is, the number of pulses detected over a given period, such as pulses per second/minute, where each pulse indicates the detection of a single ferrous particle in a flowing liquid (typically oil).

Create Pulse Count Schedule Entry

To create a pulse count schedule entry:

1. Right-click a point or location > Select New > Pulse Count Schedule Entry or click the Pulse Count Schedule Entry button ( ) on the creation palette.

2. Click the More button to open the Device Channel Configuration window.

3. Select the 16-channel vbOnline from the vb Device field. 4. Select a tachometer input from the Tach field that will be connected

to the oil sensor. 5. Click OK. 6. Enter a measurement duration in the Time Duration field. 7. Select a measurement duration unit from the unit field — The

available options are seconds, minutes, or hours. The maximum permitted measurement duration is nine hours.

8. Click OK — The new schedule entry displays in the navigator list, appended with the tachometer input selected, measurement duration, and unit type (Hz) in brackets.

Creating a pulse count schedule entry


255

Cumulative Pulse Count Schedule Entry


You can use Ascent to store ‘pulse count rates’ from particle sensors for a single specified duration (up to nine hours) using the Pulse Count Schedule entry, but not as an ongoing 24-hour monitoring task. For this task, the Cumulative Pulse Count Schedule Entry type is required. This schedule entry type provides a way to store cumulative values from these sensors. I.e. the cumulative number of ‘pulses’ detected over a user-specified period, rather than the ‘rate’ of pulses detected (per minute/hour/day etc.).

Sensor monitoring using this schedule entry type must be considered only 'nearly' continuous by virtue of the fact that tachometer readings of particle levels can only be taken while the 16-channel vbOnline device's multiplexed tachometer inputs are not being used by other processes to record vibration data. For this reason, tachometer data is 'compensated' to smooth data across the measurement period.

The compensation process divides the total number of pulses detected over a 24-hour period, then adjusts this number based on the actual time the tachometer takes particle measurements rather than vibration measurements. For example, if the tachometer input was used to take vibration measurements for a total of one hour over a 24-hour period, and 115 pulses were detected during the 23 hours it was monitoring an oil sensor, the compensated particle detection count would be 115 * 24 / 23 or 120 particles/pulses detected over the 24 hours (not however that the compensation process occurs at every stage of the measurement, not at 24-hour intervals).


256

Enable Pulse Counting on 16-channel vbOnline

Before you can create a Cumulative Pulse Count schedule entry, the 16-channel vbOnline you are using to acquire and store this measurement data must be configured and the feature enabled. To enable pulse counting on a 16-channel vbOnline:

1. Select Edit > Online device setup. 2. Click Add > Select the 16-channel vbOnline you will use to take

measurements. 3. Click Edit.

NOTE: If your 16-channel vbOnline is not listed, it has not yet been added to Ascent. See Add Instrument to Ascent.

4. Select the Setup tab. 5. Click Configure beside Cumulative Pulse Count — Cumulative Pulse

Count settings for the selected instrument display beside the text header Enabled or Disabled to indicate whether your instrument has been enabled to support pulse counts, and the tachometer that will be used as the signal input.

6. Tick the Enabled checkbox to activate the cumulative pulse count feature.

7. Choose the tachometer from the Count Using Tachometer field that you will use to collect measurements — 16-channel vbOnline devices include two tachometer inputs. You can use either of these.

NOTE: To disable Cumulative Pulse Counting on a 16-channel vbOnline, simply repeat the previous steps and untick the Enabled checkbox.


257

8. Click Send — The instrument is configured and a success notification displays.

9. Click OK. 10. Click Close — The Cumulative Pulse Count text displayed on the VB

Device Properties panel will update to reflect the instrument and tachometer configuration. You can now create the Cumulative Pulse Count Schedule Entry.

Count Mode Status


258

Create Cumulative Pulse Count Schedule Entry

To create a cumulative pulse count schedule entry:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to open the Cumulative Pulse Counting Schedule Entry window: • Right-click a point or location in the navigator > Select New >

Cumulative Pulse Count Schedule Entry. • Select a point or location in the navigator > Click the

Cumulative Pulse Count Schedule Entry button on the creation palette.

2. Click the browse button to open the Device Channel Configuration window.

3. Select the 16-channel vbOnline being used to acquire and store this measurement data from the vb Device field.

4. Select the tachometer input from the Tach field that will be connected to the oil sensor's pulse signal output — The tachometer you select must be the same as that configured previously in the Enable Pulse Counting on an Instrument section.

NOTE: If you select a tachometer input that has not been enabled for Cumulative Pulse Counting, a message displays, stating 'The selected Tachometer is not enabled for Cumulative Pulse Counting'. Return to the Cumulative Pulse Count Options panel (described in the 'Enable Pulse Counting on an Instrument' section above). Select the alternative tachometer input.

NOTE: If the 16-channel vbOnline has not been enabled for Cumulative Pulse Counting, a message displays, stating 'Feature Cumulative Pulse Count is currently DISABLED on the device'. Return to the Cumulative Pulse Count Options panel (described in the 'Enable Pulse Counting on an Instrument section' above). Tick the Enable checkbox > Choose a tachometer input > Click Send > Click OK > Click Close.

5. Click OK to close the Device Channel Configuration panel. 6. Click OK to close the Cumulative Pulse Counting Schedule Entry

panel — The new pulse count schedule item displays in the navigator list beside a Cumulative Pulse Count icon.

7. Use EITHER of these methods to test your schedule entry configuration: • Right-click the new navigator list item > Select Online Devices >

Record Now. • Press CTRL-ALT-R.


259

8. Trend pulse count values over time (if required):

a. Select Chart > Trend.

b. Select all pulse count measurements in the navigator.

c. Press F4.

d. Select Edit > Online Device Setup.

e. Assign recording intervals using the Intervals and Criteria option in the wizard.

NOTE: Cumulative Pulse Count measurements are acquired as specified in Ascent by the OnlineManager application. See Configure Recording Intervals in the vbOnline Instrument Reference Guide for more information.

NOTE: If you are using an oil particle sensor with a DC status output (e.g. a GasTOPS device), you should now create an Average Value Schedule Entry to monitor this output using any free 16-channel vbOnline device analog input.

Creating a Cumulative Pulse Count Schedule Entry


260

Reset Cumulative Values on 16-channel vbOnline

You might need to periodically reset or adjust the cumulative pulse value stored in the vbOnline device's onboard memory. For example, this might be necessary when an alarm threshold is exceeded, or after an oil change or overhaul if the particle sensor is changed.

To reset cumulative values on 16-channel vbOnline:

1. Select Edit > Online device setup. 2. Click Add > Select the 16-channel vbOnline device currently being

used to take Cumulative Pulse Count measurements. 3. Click Edit — The VB Device Properties panel opens. 4. Select the Setup tab > Click Configure beside Cumulative Pulse

Count. 5. Tick the Reset Cumulative Count checkbox. 6. Enter a new number in the integer field — This is the figure the

cumulative count stored in the 16-channel vbOnline device's onboard memory will be set to.

7. Enter 0 to reset the cumulative pulse count value stored on the 16-channel vbOnline.

8. Click Send — The instrument's stored Cumulative Pulse Count value will be set to the specified value. A success notification displays.

9. Click OK then Close.

Resetting cumulative values on 16-channel vbOnline


261

Associate Process Variables with Vibration Recordings

Numeric schedule entries can be useful tools for recording machinery process variables, i.e. the state of various processes and components in a mechanical system as a whole (e.g. wind turbine power output and speed, drive temperatures, process flow rates or any number of other measurements). When you compare process variable measurements and vibration measurements taken at approximately the same time, these snapshot recordings can frequently provide valuable insight into the underlying conditions that may have resulted in a particular vibration measurement, or vice versa. If configured appropriately, you can use Ascent to automatically display Average Value, Keypad, SDI (Serial Data Input) and OPC import measurements on spectrum and waveform vibration charts in the same way.

MORE: For more information on these measurement types, see OPC Import, Keypad Schedule Entries, Average Value Schedule Entries, and 'Serial Data Import' your Turningpoint Instrument Reference Guide.

Once an association between a given process variable and vibration measurements has been configured, any spectrum or waveform charts within the specified machine will also display the process variable measurement taken closest to the time of the vibration measurement. This text information displays in the top right corner of the chart window, together with an indication of the time differential between the acquisition of the vibration measurement and the process variable measurement.

NOTE: If you open a multi-chart view, such as SpecStack (stacked spectra) or a waterfall display of several measurements, the closest process variable displayed and/or the time differential specified in the top right corner can be updated by selecting individual measurements in the chart panel with your mouse cursor.


262

Process variable measurements taken within 24 hours of a vibration measurement will list the time differential of the process measurements relative to the vibration measurement in hours and minutes, or minutes and seconds, and 'later' or 'earlier' than the vibration recording. Measurements taken more than 24 hours from the vibration measurement (but the closest measurement taken, nonetheless) will state a difference of greater than 24 hours 'before' or 'after' the collection of the vibration measurement.

For example, you can have an Average Value measurement named Average Value with a value of 11.787 Volts. This may have been taken 1 hour and 38 minutes before the vibration measurement being charted. The vibration measurement was taken at 9:28 a.m. and the Average Value measurement was taken at 7:50 a.m. This measurement was the closest recording taken to the spectrum measurement.

To associate an existing Average Value, Keypad, SDI or OPC schedule entry with vibration data within a Machine:

1. Right-click an existing schedule entry in the navigator > Select Edit. 2. Tick the Display this value on all charts for this Machine checkbox. 3. Click OK.

NOTE: To associate a new schedule entry with vibration data, tick the Display this value on all charts for this Machine checkbox when creating the new entry.

In future, measurement data for this item will display in the top right corner of vibration charts for the machine. To remove the association, edit the Average Value, Keypad, SDI, or OPC process variable schedule entry, untick the Display this value on all charts for this Machine checkbox and save (OK).


263

Associating process variables with vibration recordings

Demodulation

Demodulation is a useful process for extracting very low amplitude, high frequency signals associated with impulse or impact events. Demodulation is also useful as an early warning device because it detects bearing tones before they are visible in a normal spectrum.

The process works by passing the data through filters to eliminate high amplitude/low frequency data, extracting the ‘envelope’ around the remaining signal, and displaying the results in a frequency/acceleration spectrum.


264

Demodulation Setup

The high frequency signals demodulation aims to extract are very localized. Consequently you need to take extra care to ensure the accelerometer is mounted correctly. You will need to ensure that the accelerometer is:

• Mounted close to the vibration source. • Well coupled, using either stud mounting or a very strong

magnet on bare metal. A handheld probe or stinger is not recommended.

• Consistent between visits.

The bandwidth determines which range of frequencies the demodulation process will use.

Access Suggested Suitable Demodulation Bandwidth

You can use Ascent to suggest a suitable demodulation bandwidth using the machine's RPM. To access this option:

1. Right-click a machine in the navigator > Select Edit. 2. Specify a default RPM. 3. Specify any restrictions related to your instrument capabilities (as

available bandwidths vary by instrument model and age). 4. Select the Parameters tab. 5. Click the Recommend button on the Schedule Entry editor panel.

The table outlines some typical bandwidth recommendations you can make.

NOTE: If your instrument is a 16-channel vbOnline, Ascent might suggest alternative higher values are suitable for stud-mounted accelerometers.

Demod Bandwidth Recommended Speed Range

250 Hz - 10 kHz <100 RPM

500 Hz - 10 kHz 100 - 300 RPM

1 kHz - 10 kHz 300 - 1000 RPM

2 kHz - 10 kHz 1000 - 3000 RPM

4 kHz - 10 kHz >3000 RPM


265

Determine Appropriate Bandwidth

If a default machine speed has not been configured, Ascent will not be able to recommend a bandwidth. You will need to manually select a bandwidth option suitable for the application. You can use the following procedure to determine an appropriate bandwidth:

1. Take a measurement using the following parameters: • Domain Enter — Freq • Quantity — Accel • Fmax value — 20 kHz (1200 kCPM)

2. Examine the chart for a region of broadband high frequency noise (‘haystack’).

3. Examine where the haystack starts and ends > Choose a corresponding Hz (or kCPM) range/bandwidth.

EG: A range of 4 kHz to 20 kHz (240 to 1200) kCPM is best for the chart below, as most unwanted low frequency noise falls below 4 kHz (240 kCPM).

It is very important that you reject all the large amplitude/low frequency peaks. If no significant haystacks display, we recommend a standard bandwidth of 2 kHz to 10 kHz (120 to 600) kCPM).

For low-speed machines, you can reduce the Demod bandwidth lower limit, however ensure you keep this at least 100X running speed.

EG: For a machine that runs at 600 RPM (10 Hz), a 1-10 kHz band should be appropriate.

Example haystack


266

Analyze Demodulation Data

The process for measuring, recording, and viewing demodulation data is the same as for a frequency/acceleration spectrum. You can transfer the demodulation spectra to Ascent and analyze it using the same techniques that are available for normal spectra (e.g. trend plots, alarms, fault frequencies, bearings, and gears).

Remember the following points when analyzing demodulation data: • As a bearing deteriorates, the baseline noise level increases and

bearing tones develop running speed sidebands. • In the final stages of bearing wear, the bearing tones might

become less prominent as cracks and pits become more rounded and distributed over the race.

• A raised noise floor is often the result of a lubrication problem.

Set / Update RPMs for Multiple Recordings

There are several ways to control how RPM values are applied to schedule entries and/or recordings. The range of affected recordings may be restricted by date range.

You can ignore recordings with RPM values that are already set.

You can use RPM multipliers to take gearbox ratios and other point variances into account.

MORE: See Defining the RPM of a Recording to set an individual recording's RPM value.

Define RPM Value

You can apply an RPM value directly from the 1X peak of a chart or type in a value, and then apply this to your chosen recordings. To do this, you will need to set your RPM value using one of the methods described below, and then follow the instructions in the next topic to apply this value.

NOTE: Regardless of the method you use, the RPM value will not propagate to any recordings until you choose the options where you want it to be applied (see next topic).


267

1 — Using the 1X Peak

This method enables you to enter an RPM value without knowing the running speed of your machine. When you position your cursor on the 1X peak, Ascent will calculate the running speed for you.

To set the RPM value using the 1X peak:

1. Open a chart. 2. Double-click the first big peak. 3. Press CTRL + 1 to display the value in the Set 1X RPM window and

click Apply to Machine. 4. Follow the steps provided in next topic — Apply RPM value.

2 — Manually Enter RPM Value

This method is useful if you already know the RPM value but want to manually select a date range of recordings to apply this to.

To set the RPM value manually:

1. Select a machine/point/location/schedule entry. 2. Use EITHER of these methods to access the Set RPM window:

• Select Edit > Set Speed.

• Right-click the machine/point/location/schedule entry you selected > Select Set Speed.

3. Enter an RPM value in the field provided. 4. Follow the steps provided in next topic — Apply RPM value.


268

3 — Manual Entry with Predetermined Date Range

This method enables you to preselect a date range over which to apply an RPM value. This is useful where you want to use the same recording date range on other locations at the same machine.

To set the RPM value manually with a predetermined date range:

1. Select recordings across the required date range in the navigator list.

TIP: Use SHIFT to select multiple recordings.

2. Use EITHER of these methods to access the Set RPM window: • Select Edit > Set Speed.

• Right-click the machine/point/location/schedule entry you selected > Select Set Speed.

3. Enter an RPM value in the field provided. 4. Follow the steps provided in next topic — Apply RPM value.


269

Apply RPM Value

You can apply the RPM value to a range of recordings and schedule entries. The RPM value will be applied to the recordings/schedule entries you have selected on the navigator.

EG: If a single point is selected, the RPM value will only be applied to the recordings/schedule entries at that point.

• Set RPM to — This is the RPM value that will be assigned to schedule entries and/or recordings (or the speed if the machine has been specified as Linear Speed).

• Apply RPM Multiplier at each Point — This will apply a point-level RPM Multiplier to all recordings on the selected machine points. The Point RPM Multiplier will typically be used on linear speed machines where the rotational speed may vary between points. You can set the RPM Multiplier by right-clicking a point and selecting Edit, or by clicking the Edit Multipliers button on the Set RPM panel to open the Machine Speed Utility.)

• Only apply where there is no RPM set already — This will apply your RPM value to all recordings and/or schedule entries that do not have an RPM value. Recordings/schedule entries with existing RPM values will not be affected.

• Start Date/End Date — Use the drop-down box to apply the RPM value to all recordings/schedule entries within your specified date range.

Applying an RPM value


270

Linear Speed Support

On linear speed machines (e.g. paper machines) the rotational speed of individual machine components differs according to the various diameters of rollers or pulleys, much like the output of a gearbox. If you enter these diameters into Ascent, along with the linear speed of the machine while the recordings were taken, Ascent can calculate the actual RPM value at each point.

Some of your measurement locations are likely to be on non-roller parts of the machine (e.g. roll drive motors). Ascent can calculate the appropriate RPM values for these points if you supply the ratio of the motor RPM compared to the roll RPM. For example, if the drive motor gearbox has a reduction ratio of 0.333 (the motor is turning 3 times faster than the roll), enter 3 in the RPM Multiplier field.

NOTE: If the diameter for a point is not defined, the linear speed setter will have no effect.

To specify the relevant data in Ascent:

1. Right-click a machine > Select Edit. 2. Select Linear speed as the speed type. 3. Click OK. 4. Right-click a point > Select Edit. 5. Enter an RPM Multiplier value.

TIP: Leave the default setting as it is if you don't want to use the multiplier.

6. Enter the diameter of the roller or pulley. 7. Click OK. 8. Select the machine you want to set the linear speed for. 9. Use EITHER of these methods to:

• Select Edit > Set Speed. • Right-click the selected machine > Select Set Speed.

10. Enter the linear speed of the machine.

MORE: See Applying the RPM Value for more information on the various settings.

11. Click OK when you have finished selecting options.


271

Setting the linear speed for a recording


272

Collect RPM Value while Measuring

This option does not apply to online devices such as the vbOnline or Ranger. If the machine RPM is available when you take a recording (e.g. from an installed rev counter or hand held tachometer), you can enter the RPM using the keypad on your vb instrument.

NOTE: If you are using a Ranger Station and Ranger sensor, the Ranger Station tachometer RPM will be appended automatically to waveform measurement values displayed in Ascent if the RPM value is used as a criteria for the recording. See the Ranger Reference Guide for more information on criteria and RPM measurements.

To activate the collecting RPM feature:

1. Right-click the required machine > Select Edit. 2. Select Ask user for speed — When collecting data you will be

prompted to enter the speed value when the measurement is taken. 3. Enter a value in the Default speed field — This default value will

display on the instrument screen. Simply press ENTER on the instrument to continue.

NOTE: The speed value entered is saved with the recording and automatically transferred to Ascent next time you run the Receive operation.

You can enable Ask user for speed on every schedule entry on a machine. The instrument will not reprompt you when new measurements are collected. Instead it instrument remembers the speed value you last entered on that machine and automatically reuses it for subsequent recordings. If you wish to be reprompted at a certain part of the machine (for example after a gearbox), change the Default RPM for those schedule entries.

MORE: See Setting/Updating RPMs for Multiple Recordings for details on how to set the default RPM for all schedule entries on a machine.

Collecting the RPM value while measuring


273

Baseline Recordings

A baseline recording is a vibration measurement taken on a machine considered to be in good condition. The baseline is used as a comparison recording with which to observe changes in vibration patterns.

You can set a recording as a baseline recording by right-clicking it and selecting Set Baseline. When this recording is plotted, the label Baseline will display at the top of the chart and in the chart legend.

The baseline overall RMS value is shown in the Parameter Set/Schedule Entry editor's Baseline Overall RMS window. You can edit it here (see next topic).

Display baseline value on portable SCOUT/vbSeries instrument

Once you have taken a recording on your instrument you can display the RMS value of the baseline recording and compare this with the measurement you have just taken.

To display a baseline value on your instrument:

1. Select Alarms > Update Baselines in this Folder. 2. Send the folder to your instrument — The baseline RMS value

displays at the top right of the screen after a measurement is taken.

TIP: If you intend to update your baselines intermittently, you should select Alarms > Update Baselines Before Send. Every time you set a new recording as a baseline, this will be transferred to your vb instrument automatically when you click Send.

Display last measurement's value instead of baseline value

As an alternative to using baselines, you can display the measurement values from your last recording session.

To display the previous measurement's RMS value, select Alarms > Use Last Measurement if no Baseline. This value will be labeled as a baseline on your instrument.


274

Remove baseline from instrument display

To hide a baseline from displaying on your instrument:

1. Right-click the schedule entry containing the baseline recording > Select Edit.

2. Select the Baseline Overall RMS tab. 3. Click Clear then OK. When you next send this folder to your vb

instrument the baseline value will no longer be displayed.

Hiding a baseline from your instrument display

Order Tracking

If machine speed varies significantly while a recording is being taken, the resulting spectral peaks might display as smeared bumps instead of sharp peaks. Subtle spectral features that indicate early bearing or mechanical defects may no longer be clearly resolved in the spectrum.

This problem does not apply to normal constant-speed machines. It relates to variable-speed machines, and is of particular concern on low speed machines. Low speed measurements tend to be very long, allowing time for the machine’s speed to change significantly while a recording is taken.

The number of orders being recorded is also a significant factor that must be understood in relation to this peak 'smearing'. Consider a wind turbine that experiences a gust-induced speed increase of 2% during a recording. This speed variation will have relatively little impact on the first order running speed peak. However, at 50 Orders the impact will be significant. The peak will be smeared from its original location to the original location of the 51st order (2% x 50 Orders = 100% of an Order).

The Order Tracking system prevents this smearing of spectral peaks by automatically adjusting the data sampling rate to obtain a constant number of samples per revolution of the machine. To provide the precise


275

timing information required, a tachometer sensor must be installed. This tachometer should be positioned on the highest speed shaft if the machine uses a gearbox, as this will provide the most frequent timing information to the Order Tracking system.

To achieve Order Tracking, the 16-channel vbOnline digitally resamples data during acquisition at the required samples-per-rev rate. The digital processing techniques employed ensure very high signal quality and are able to tolerate significant speed variations of between half and twice the machine speed at the start of recording.

Order tracked recordings have an anti-alias filter at 6000 Hz. This means any signals above that frequency will be attenuated. The Fmax for an order tracked recording is calculated as follows:

Number of Orders multiplied by the Point RPM Multiplier multiplied by the Default Machine RPM divided by 60.

Automatic Sample Rate Adjustment over Varying Speeds


276

Enable Order Tracking

To enable order tracking:

1. Right-click a machine > Select Edit. 2. Ensure the RPM-based radio button is selected for the Speed type. 3. Enter an RPM value in the Default speed field — This is the

approximate speed of the rotating equipment. The default RPM is used only as an initial starting check, as explained below. It is not recorded. Only the actual RPM measured from the tachometer is stored in the recording. The RPM is measured throughout the recording and then averaged to get a final weighted RPM.

4. Click OK.

5. Click the P/Sets button to open or create a parameter set.

6. Click Add to All or click the Schedule Entry icon on the creation palette — The Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry window opens.

7. Select a spectrum measurement type in the Domain area. 8. Select the tachometer type in the field provided. 9. Enter a numeric value in the Fmax field — This value is the number

of orders that will be tracked. It must be between 0 and 3000. 10. Select the Orders option for spectrum measurements. 11. Tick the Order Tracked checkbox. 12. Select the number of lines of resolution from the Lines field — Order

tracked recordings are limited to 6400 lines of resolution for single, and 3200 lines for dual channel recordings. It is important to understand the relationship between orders and default RPM when configuring Order Tracking. The Order Tracking system only operates effectively at frequencies below 6 kHz (360 kCPM). The combination (i.e. multiplication) of RPM and orders should not exceed this frequency ceiling.

EG: A default RPM of 1000 up to 20 orders will result in a maximum frequency of 20 kCPM (1000 x 20). This is well within the range of Order Tracking frequencies.

A higher speed shaft at 4000 RPM can have Order Tracking applied at up to 80 Orders (4000 x 80 = 320 kCPM). If the actual machine speed increases such that Order x Speed exceeds the 360 kCPM limit, Order Tracking will be maintained but data above the 360 kCPM limit will be attenuated. For typical applications, this can easily be avoided as these high frequency recordings are recorded very quickly. The machine speed is unlikely to change significantly during the recording, so Order Tracking


277

is not required. To be 100% sure, you can apply Dynamic Criteria to automatically reject any recordings that experience speed variations.

The Order Tracking feature is now configured. If you are creating a new schedule entry rather than editing an existing item, you should now specify:

• A schedule entry name • Measurement Fmin • Lines of resolution • All other relevant measurement parameters

MORE: See Use Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries.

Activating Order Tracking


278

Tach pulses

When taking order-tracked recordings, you can send the tach pulse data you have collected to Ascent for review. Tach pulses display as dots in the Ascent charts.

Viewing tach pulses on an orbit plot chart

Viewing tach pulses on an orbit plot chart


279

Triaxial Measurements

Triaxial recordings are available on vb6 and vb8 portable instrument models only. To configure a triaxial on-route recording on a vb6 or SCOUT140/vb8 instrument:

1. Create three locations at a single point using Ascent (i.e. Horizontal, Vertical, Axial) — Each of these locations must be set to correspond with one of the three available triaxial sensor axes (X, Y or Z), matching the orientation of the sensor when mounted.

2. Open Ascent. 3. Right-click a location > Select Edit. 4. Select an axis from the Triax Axis dropdown field. 5. Repeat the above steps for each of the three locations, choosing

one of the three available axes for each — When you have done this, send the route to your instrument for data collection (see Transferring Folders to a vbSeries Portable Instrument).

NOTE: Each of the three locations must have a unique Axis name and triax axis. Do not assign the same axis to more than one location.

MORE: See your Instrument Reference Guide to learn how to take a triaxial measurement.


280

Sensor Settings

If you use more than one accelerometer for data collection, you can store each sensor's sensitivity and settling time in Ascent. When setting up schedule entries, you can select different sensors for taking the measurements. To access these options:

1. Select Edit > Manage > Sensors. 2. Click Add or Edit to enter or change the details of your sensor.

NOTE: If you have specified any sensor setup details on your instrument, you will NOT be able to transfer this data to Ascent.

NOTE: If you have set up sensors in Ascent, these will overwrite any sensors with the same name on your instrument.

Selecting sensor settings


281

Bias Voltage Enter

You can use the Bias Voltage Enter feature as a warning system for any errors or fault conditions (e.g. short-circuits, faulty sensors or open-circuits). This involves comparing the actual sensor bias voltage with the expected voltage range.

To use the Bias Voltage Enter feature:

1. Select Edit > Manage > Sensors. 2. Use EITHER of these methods according to your requirements:

• Click Add to add a sensor > Select the sensor type. • Click Edit to edit an existing sensor you have selected.

3. Click the Other button beside Bias Voltage Check on the Sensor Setup window.

NOTE: Most accelerometers have an output voltage cantered on 12 V DC. Consequently, the default bias voltage range Ascent provides is 8 V to 16 V (4 Volts of headroom above and below the typical output value). Ranger sensors have a narrower bias voltage range of 3 V to 3.7 V. NOTE: Some sensors may use a lower or higher bias voltage. If using such a sensor, review the manufacturer's documentation and create a new bias voltage range to suit. To create a new Bias Voltage setting:

4. Click the Add button — The new bias value window opens. 5. Enter a name for the new bias value range entry in the Description

field. 6. Enter the required minimum bias voltage value in the Min Bias field

— This value should typically be 2-5 Volts below the anticipated minimum output voltage used by the sensor.

7. Enter the required maximum bias voltage value in the Max Bias field — This value should typically be 2-5 Volts above the anticipated minimum output voltage used by the sensor.

8. Click OK to save the new entry.

NOTE: To edit an existing bias voltage record, select it from the Bias Voltage Enter list > Click Edit.


282

Bias Voltage Enter


283

Manually Enter Vibration Data


You might already have vibration data recorded on paper or in a spreadsheet. You can enter this into an Ascent database manually if required. To do this:

1. Select Edit > Edit Measurements. 2. Fill in the information for the timestamp, units, x values, and sample

data. 3. Click the Create at this location button to add the measurement to

the current location: • Timestamp — The date/time of the recording.

X units:

for waveform: secs, ms

for spectra: Hz, CPM

• X start and X stop — The range of x axis values. • calc 1st line — Sets X start to (X stop ÷ number of samples). • Y units — The left axis amplitude values (g, adB, mm/s, vdB SI,

mm). • Post scaling — Spectrum only. The amplitude values (peak, RMS,

peak-peak). • Assoc. RPM — The RPM of the recording. • Demod — Demod spectra only. Select this option if this is a

demod recording. Enter the demod bandwidth in the two blank fields.

• Complex Data — If checked, 'real' amplitude values must be given followed by all the 'imaginary' values. For each frequency bin in the spectrum there is a 'real' and an 'imaginary' amplitude. Together these define a 2d vector. Ascent calculates the amplitude and phase for that frequency from this vector.

NOTE: You will need to paste the amplitude values into the blank text area on the right. The number of samples will be determined automatically when you click Create at this location.


284

4. You can also click Load from Measurement to fill in the form using the currently selected measurement.

5. Right-click the sample value text area to access some useful options that enable you to manipulate your data: • Create single column, remove text — Remove all text, leaving

only numeric values. • Remove first column — Remove the first column of data if there

is more than one. • Remove right columns — Remove any columns to the right,

keeping only the first.

Entering vibration data manually


285

Customize Axis Name

When you are in Build mode, you can define new axis or location names as you create your machines. To do this:

1. Click Build to activate Build mode. 2. Click an [Add Measurement Location] placeholder > Select <other>

from the list. 3. Click OK. 4. Enter a name for this location. 5. Click OK again to assign it — This new location displays in the

dropdown field. You can assign it to other locations if required.

Defining new axis or location names as you create your machines

Edit, Add, or Delete Location Names

You can edit any location name you define (and some of the defaults).

NOTE: The first five default names in the list cannot be edited.

To edit your location names:

1. Select Edit > Manage > Axis Names. 2. Select the item you wish to add. edit, or delete. 3. Click the appropriate button.

NOTE: Ascent prevents you from accidentally deleting a location name if it is being used by a machine.


286

Tagging

Tagging provides a way to group selected items so you can carry out collective operations on the grouped items. You can tag any data item.

Once you have tagged items, you can carry out the following collective operations:

• Delete — Delete all tagged items. • Update RPMs — Change the RPM value of all tagged items. • Export Tagged to File — Export all tagged items and their

contents to a .vb file. • Automated Report — Run a report on all tagged items. • Set Channel/Sensor to Default — Reset all tagged schedule

entry channel and sensor settings to default. • Create Route — Create a route from all tagged measurement

locations.

You can access all these operations by selecting Tag > View Tagged Items.

Tag items

You can tag items:

• Manually — Select the required items in the navigator. Press CTRL + T. To untag, repeat the process.

• Automatically — Select Tag > Search and Tag to search the database for data that matches specific criteria.

TIP: If you have several items to tag, it may be quicker to use the 'Search and Tag' option and then untag individual items. For example, to add all but a few measurement locations to a route, you could tag all locations at once and then untag the ones that are not needed.


287

Store Reusable Components in Library

You can use EITHER of these methods to create a new machine:

• Build a new machine from reusable components • Copy and rename existing machine

To save yourself setup time, you can store commonly used components in the Ascent library (e.g. alarm bands and envelopes, user-defined bearings, gears, machines, etc). You can use these components to build new machines. Having one central storage area saves you having to search through your folders to find the components you wish to copy. One way to set this up is to create folders within the library to store different types of machines, and other folders for each type of component.

Add Item to Library

To add an item (e.g. a machine) to the library:

1. Right-click the item in the navigator > Select Library > Add Selection to Library — The Save As window displays, showing the list of the folders currently in your library. If you don't have any folders set up you can create them at this time by clicking the Create New Folder button on the top section of this window. A New Folder icon will display in the list. Rename this to whatever you want and click away from the folder to save this name.

2. Open the folder you wish to store your component in so it displays in the top dropdown field.

3. Click Save.


288

Retrieve Item from Library

To reuse a component stored in the library, you need to import it. To do this:

1. Right-click the required component in the navigator area > Select Library > Commtest (or the folder you saved the component in).

2. Select your required template file — This will be called <name of component>.vb.

3. Enter a name for the new component. 4. Click OK — Your new component displays in the navigator tree. Any

changes you make to this new component will not affect the template stored in the library because this component is a copy of the template.

NOTE: The supplied library templates use orders-based parameter sets. Once you have imported a machine from these templates, select the machine (or point in the case of a gearbox) > Select Edit > Set speed. Enter the running speed of the machine. Deselect the option Only apply where there is no RPM set already.

Edit Library

You can edit the library to delete unused templates or change the names of template files. To do this, select Library > Edit Library. Copy, move, or rename the library files and folders as required.

Open Entire Site

If you work with several folders and spend lots of time switching between these, you can open the entire site. This will list all the site's folders in the navigator tree, enabling you to access the machines within them more quickly.

To open an entire site:

1. Click the Open button — The window displayed shows all your sites and folders.

2. Select the site you wish to open. 3. Click OK. 4. Double-click a folder in the navigator tree to open it.


289

Expand and Collapse Folders

You can hide or show the contents of some or all folders (i.e. each machine and its points, locations, etc):

To show or hide the full contents of a particular folder, right-click the folder > Select Expand Branch or Collapse Branch.

To show or hide all folders in a database, right-click the top level database folder > Select Expand Branch or Collapse Branch.

Expanding the selected folder


290

Bearing Database

This section provides information about the bearing database.

Use Quick Search to Find Bearing

When you add a bearing to a point, the Bearing Search window provides a short list of options. If the bearing you require is not listed, you can locate it in the archive.

To find a bearing using the quick search:

1. Click Search the Commtest Bearing Archive. 2. Select the bearing's manufacturer from the dropdown field. 3. Enter the bearing part number.

NOTE: If you know the manufacturer's name but not the part number (or vice versa), enter the information you know.

4. Click Search now — The bearing archive is searched and a list of the closest matches is displayed. If you only entered the manufacturer's name or the part number, the list will show all known bearings from that manufacturer or all bearings that match that part number. Scroll down the list if necessary to locate your bearing.

5. Select a bearing. 6. Click Use selected bearing — This will return you to the Bearing on

Point editor. 7. Enter a name in the description field.

8. Click OK to add the bearing to the selected point — A bearing icon now displays in the navigator list whenever this point is selected.


291

Bearing search window

Conducting a quick search for a bearing


292

Advanced Search

You can use the advanced search option to help find the correct bearing in the archive. This is a useful option even if you don't know the manufacturer and part number. Advanced search uses the information you provide to retrieve a list of bearings that match your criteria.

To conduct an advanced search:

1. Click Search the Commtest Bearing Archive. 2. Click Advanced search — A range of search options displays,

enabling you to narrow the archive's list of bearings. 3. Select an attribute you know the value of in the first Attribute

dropdown field.

EG: If you know the outer diameter of the bearing you require, select Outer diameter.

4. Select the option that will be used to match your information in the Search type dropdown field.

EG: For the Outer diameter option, you can choose equals or greater than the diameter you specify.

5. Enter the information you know about the required bearing in the Search key field.

EG: For the purposes of this example, you would enter the outer diameter of your required bearing.

6. If you have other information that will aid the search, enter this in the lower fields.

7. Select Match case if you want the search to match the lower and upper case letters you entered.

TIP: The more information you provide to narrow the search, the shorter the final list of bearings will be.

8. Choose whether you want the search to match all criteria or any criteria you specify.

9. Click Search now — The bearing archive is searched. A list of the closest matches displays.

10. Select a bearing from this list or add more information. 11. Start a fresh search to narrow the list of possible bearings. 12. Click Clear search to clear all information from the screen. 13. Click Quick search to return to the quick search window.


293

Conducting an advanced search

Section 7 — Transfer Data

294


This section explains how to transfer data to and from Ascent.

Import and Export Data

You can transfer data to and from an Ascent database using the Import and Export functions.

You can transfer folders, machines, and individual recordings using the Export command. Doing so creates .vbz3 files. You can attach these to an email and use the Import command to transfer them to a PC.

When importing data, ensure you first select the location on the navigator tree where you wish to insert the data.

EG: If you have tagged and exported a measurement location, you will need to select a point in the navigator tree when you import it.

Export Data

To export the current folder to a .vbz3 file:

1. Open the folder. 2. Select File > Export Folder to File. 3. Use ONE of these methods to tag the item (e.g. machine):

• Select Tag > Tag. • Right-click an item in the navigator list > Select Tag. • Press CTRL + T.

4. To build a set of machine templates, select Tag > Clear Tags to untag any existing items. Select Tag > Export Tagged to File.

5. Select File > Export Folder to File to create a .vbz3 file that contains recordings from a specific date range.

6. Tick the top checkbox to restrict data to a specific date range. 7. Use the dropdown fields to select the start and end dates for this

range. 8. Click OK.


295

Exporting data

Import Data

To import data from a .vbz or .vb file (earlier versions of Ascent):

1. Select File > Import File. 2. Locate the .vbz file. 3. Click Open — The data is transferred into the current folder:

• Click Yes to only import new data from a .vbz file into the existing folder — Any data you already have in your database will not be duplicated.

• Click No to create a new folder for this data.


296

Import or Export to File via Command Line

You can use DOS commands to export .vbz3 files from an Ascent database, or import .vbz3 files into an Ascent database. This command causes Ascent to export or import data using a standard set of instructions.

This feature is useful if you wish to:

• Automate regular importing and exporting tasks • Transfer large amounts of data • Import or export data from large numbers of databases and

.vbz3 files

When you save the DOS commands as a conventional Windows batch file (.bat format), you can schedule these operations to occur at regular intervals using the Windows scheduling system.

Create Batch File

A batch file is a small file containing a sequence of Windows commands written in plain text. Once you have created the export and import commands described in Command Line Layout, you are ready to create a batch file.

NOTE: It is possible to run a sequence of export and import commands in a single batch file. You may wish to export a .vbz3 file then immediately import this file into another database. You can also export .vbz3 files from a large number of databases. To do this, simply paste all export and import commands within the same batch file, separating each command line with at least one line break.


297

To create a batch file:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Notepad. 2. Paste the export or import command line into the application. 3. Copy and paste the following text in the top of the text file: @ECHO

STARTING DATA TRANSFER — You will be notified when the export or import action has started.

4. Copy and paste the following text to the bottom of the text file: @ECHO FINISHED — You will be notified when the export or import action is complete.

NOTE: Export or import commands must be composed on a single line. If a command contains line breaks, it will not function.

5. Select File > Save As in the Notepad main menu. 6. Select All Files in the Save as type dropdown field. 7. Select a location to save the file from the Save in dropdown field. 8. Enter file name in the File name field — The file name must end with

the suffix .bat. 9. Click Save — The batch file is ready to use. 10. Double-click the batch file. 11. Right-click it > Select Open. 12. Copy and paste the batch file in its final destination folder on your

computer — This folder will also contain the log files generated by each export or import sequence.

MORE: See Log File.

Text file example


298

Log File

During the export process, a log file is created in the folder that contains the export and import command batch file. This log file contains:

• Details of the export and import actions performed • Files generated (if any) • The result of the export/import process (success or failure)

To view the log file:

1. Browse to the folder containing the batch file you created — The folder contains a file named Ascent_vbz3_log.txt.

MORE: See Create a Batch File. NOTE: The log file is generated during the export process. If you have not yet run the batch file contained in the folder, no log file will be present.

2. Double-click the file to open it in your default text editor.

Example of individual log record

The record in this image indicates that at 12 a.m. on January 1st 2000 an export process commenced (as indicated by the date at the top of the record). During the export process the C:\ExportTest\ASCENT_DATABASE.FDB database file was opened, and a .vbz3 file exported to the folder C:\MyExportFolder. The name of the .vbz3 file created was ASCENT_DATABASE_Example Data[2000-01-01 12-00-00].vbz3. The final line indicates the export process was successful.

The log file will be appended every time an export or import process is initiated.

MORE: See Delete Existing Log Command in Additional Commands to create a new log file with each sequence.


299

Additional Commands

In addition to the core commands specifying the export or import tasks to be completed, the command line export feature also enables you to perform secondary tasks. This includes deleting existing log files or .vbz3 export files that are still contained in the target export directory.

Delete Existing Log File

Enter the following text at the top of your batch file to delete previously created log and .vbz3 file.

@echo off

@echo DELETING EXISTING VBZ3 AND LOG FILES

del "C:\vbz3ExportFolder\*.vbz3"

del "C:\FolderContainingBatchFile\*.txt"

These examples will delete all .txt format log files in the folder C:\FolderContainingBatchFile\ and all .vbz3 format files in the folder C:\vbz3ExportFolder\.


300

Display Error Messages During Export / Import

You can insert the following text after the primary export/import command (i.e. at the bottom of the batch file) if you wish to view a brief description of the most common export or import error messages you may encounter using the export tool. These may be useful during your initial configuration of the batch file. However, they are typically removed once the file has been correctly configured.

if %errorlevel%==1 goto one

if %errorlevel%==2 goto two

if %errorlevel%==3 goto three

if %errorlevel%==4 goto four

if %errorlevel%==5 goto five

if %errorlevel%==6 goto six

if %errorlevel%==7 goto seven

if %errorlevel%==8 goto eight

goto end

:one

@echo database does not exist

goto end

:two

@echo failed to create output directory

goto end

:three

@echo input file or folder not found


301

goto end

:four

@echo no vbz3 files found in folder

goto end

:five

@echo import folder not found in database

goto end

:six

@echo failed to open database

goto end

:seven

@echo error querying database for version

goto end

:eight

@echo database mismatch

:end

@ECHO FINISHED

Pause


302

Export or Import Schedule Data

You can use the Windows Scheduler to run your data export or import batch file at regular intervals. To do this:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Double-click Scheduled Tasks. 3. Double-click Add Scheduled Task > Click Next. 4. Click Browse to locate and select the batch file created previously (in

Create a Batch File). 5. Enter a name for your new scheduled task in the top field. 6. Use the radio buttons provided to specify the frequency at which the

file should be run > Click Next. 7. Specify a start time in the field provided — This is the time of day the

file will be run. 8. Use the Perform this task options to specify how often the task

should be completed — Every day, week days only, or a manually specified frequency.

9. Use the Start date dropdown calendar to specify the date this scheduled task will commence > Click Next.

10. Enter your Windows password in the field provided. 11. Re-enter your password in the Confirm password field. 12. Click Next then Finish — The batch file will be executed at the

regular intervals you have configured.

Scheduling data


303

Import or Export as XML

You can export folders and their associated routes and schedule entries from an Ascent database as XML files. You can also export XML files containing measurement data from a SCOUT/vbX portable instrument that has a USB host port. Once you have exported the XML file, you can import it into Ascent.

NOTE: SCOUT/vbX instruments with serial numbers above 40800 have a USB port. vbX000 instruments do not have a USB port.

This process provides a way to transfer data between an Ascent database and your instrument without a direct, real-time connection. You can also use it to generate an XML file containing a route and all associated machines and schedule entries:

1. You email the file to an instrument operator in the field. 2. The operator imports it using their instrument's USB host port. 3. The operator collects the route as normal. 4. The operator exports the measurements in XML format using the

USB Host port and emails the file back to you. 5. You import the file into Ascent and conduct a normal measurement

or route analysis.

Export as XML

To export the current folder to a .xml file:

1. Click Send. 2. Select Export to File in the Comms Method field. 3. Tick the checkbox beside the folder(s) you wish to export. 4. Click Export. 5. Select the Save as type dropdown field > Select a file version that is

compatible with your instrument.

TIP: The easiest way to determine the suitable file version is to check your instrument's current firmware version. You can then select the corresponding file version that lists this firmware version. If an incorrect file version is selected, the XML file cannot be imported.

6. Click Save in > Locate and select the .xml file to be exported. 7. Click Save — You can now import the XML file into your instrument.


304

Import as XML

To import a .xml file exported from an instrument:

1. Click Receive. 2. Select Import from File in the Comms Method field.

3. Click the browse button to locate and select the import .xml file (e.g. on a USB flash memory drive).

4. Click Import.

NOTE: A file exported from Ascent cannot be re-imported directly into Ascent. The file must first be imported into an instrument, then exported from that instrument. The file exported from your instrument can then be imported into Ascent. Only files exported from instruments included on your CLK license can be imported into Ascent.


305

Remote Comms Functionality

Once you have completed the initial setup requirements for the Remote Comms system, you can exchange data between Ascent and your Remote Comms server.

MORE: See the Remote Comms Reference Guide on the Commtest website.

Receive data from Remote Comms server into Ascent

To receive data from your Remote Comms server into Ascent:

1. Open Ascent. 2. Click Receive. 3. Select Remote Comms Server in the Comms Method field. 4. Select the server in the field provided. 5. Expand the relevant item in the site tree > Select the folder

containing the data you wish to receive. 6. Tick the checkboxes beside the data you wish to receive. 7. Click Receive. 8. Select an existing site or click New Site to create a new one > Click

OK.

Preparing to receive the selected data from the Remote Comms server into Ascent


306

Send data from Ascent to Remote Comms Server

To send data from Ascent to your Remote Comms server:

1. Open Ascent. 2. Click Send. 3. Select Remote Comms Server in the Comms Method field. 4. Select the server in the field provided. 5. Tick the checkboxes beside the folders you wish to send. 6. Click Send.

Sending data from Ascent to the Remote Comms server

OPC Import

The OLE for Process Control (OPC) Import feature currently supports only versions 2 and 3 of the OPC protocol.

MORE: Associating Process Variables with Vibration Recordings.

OPC is a series of open standards based on Microsoft OLE technology. It is used to support the movement of real time data from process hardware such as PLCs, DCSs, and other control devices to Human Machine Interface (HMI) display clients.

The Ascent OPC Import function enables you to record process parameters exported from OPC-compatible devices to an Ascent database. Wind turbines, drives, refrigeration units, or other hardware equipped with internal sensors and monitoring equipment that is able to provide OPC-compatible output values can be added to the OnlineManager's schedule of measurements, alongside standard vibration and process measurements taken via vbOnline or Ranger


307

devices. This ability enables Ascent to trend values from existing data sources. It also enables customers to use any compatible measurement device.

You can trend and alarm these process control parameters in Ascent. You can also use them to control the scheduling of other recordings.

In Ascent, OPC schedule entries define:

• Which OPC server to read the data from • Which data source to record • How to scale the raw data obtained • Which engineering units to save data as


308

Configure Engineering Units and Scaling

To configure engineering units and scaling, you need to set up a special 'virtual sensor' in Ascent. To do this:

1. Select Edit > Manage > Sensors. 2. Click Add. 3. Select Standard Sensor. 4. Select Input from OPC in the Input Range and Coupling dropdown

field. 5. Enter a description for this OPC sensor in the Desc/Serial No field.

EG: Its signal type or OPC source — WTG RPM from OPC.

6. Use EITHER of these methods according to your requirements: • Select a sensor unit from the Sensor Units dropdown field. • Click Other if the signal type you wish to assign to the OPC

value is not listed — This opens the Units window where you can select the unit your sensor will measure. You can also define your own units by clicking Add and entering an abbreviation for your new unit.

7. Enter a numeric value in the Gain field — This value specifies the multiplier that will be applied to the raw data from the OPC input sensor. The default value is 100, but you can choose any value, including 1 to record a raw, unaltered, input value.

8. Enter a numeric value in the Offset field to directly alter the OPC input following gain adjustment — The offset addition or subtraction and gain multiplier work together to enable basic mathematical manipulation of the OPC input value. This ability can be useful for converting between units or adjusting output trims.

EG: To convert an OPC value of Kelvin into Fahrenheit, select a Sensor Unit of Fahrenheit then set a gain value of 1.8 and an offset of -459.72. 1 OPC unit (in Kelvin) x 1.8 (Gain) - 459.72 (Offset) = Fahrenheit conversion.

9. Click OK to finish defining the sensor — You can now assign the new sensor to an OPC schedule entry.


309

Configuring engineering units and scaling


310

Configure OPC Schedule Entry

Before you can configure an OPC schedule entry, an OPC server must be running and available for connection. Contact your network administrator if you require the OPC server's IP address and host server.

To create an OPC schedule entry:

1. Open the Ascent Creation Palette. 2. Use EITHER of these methods to add an OPC schedule:

• Click the Add OPC Schedule button. • Right-click a point or location > Select New > Add OPC Schedule

Entry. 3. Enter a name for the new schedule entry in the Description field. 4. Select the OPC sensor configured above from the OPC Sensor

dropdown field — If no sensor is selected, the raw OPC values will be stored in Ascent without scaling or engineering units.

5. Enter the IP address or host name of the OPC server host computer in the OPC Host field — An IP address will normally come in the form of 192.168.1.X or 172.168.1.X where X is a number between 1 and 256. The exact number sequence varies in each network situation. Contact your network administrator if you require assistance.

6. Select an OPC server from the OPC Server dropdown field — Servers will only be listed if the OPC Host field was correctly completed in the previous step, enabling the AscentOPC application to successfully connect Ascent to the OPC server.

7. Select an OPC data source from the OPC Data Source field. 8. Click OK — The schedule entry will display beside an OPC icon in the

navigator list, beneath the measurement location.

MORE: See Associating Process Variables with Vibration Recordings for more information about the 'Display this value on all charts for this Machine' checkbox.

9. Select the Manual Entry tab if the OPC tag entries are NOT displayed in the Browse window — I.e. they are NOT being openly broadcast.


311

10. Enter the tag names of the OPC data items you wish to import — You may need to contact your IT department or access the OPC server control panel for these details. The source you select should correspond with the process signal output you wish to record.

MORE: See Taking Recordings Manually to learn how to perform a simple test of the new OPC schedule entry to confirm it is working as expected.

Once you have configured the OPC sensor and OPC schedule entry, you can assign an appropriate interval to the schedule entry using the steps detailed in Step 4: Configure Recording Intervals. You can also use these recordings as criteria to control the acquisition of other recordings. For example, you may only wish to take vibration readings when OPC informs Ascent that the machine is running. This is explained in Criteria and Conditional Monitoring.

Create OPC schedule entry


312

Serial Data Input

This feature only applies to 16-channel vbOnline devices. It will only be available to you if it is included as part of your license agreement.

MORE: See Add Serial Data Input Support to 16-channel vbOnline Device for the license installation procedures.

If you wish to enable this feature, please contact [email protected] or your distributor for more information.

The Serial Data Input (SDI) feature on the 16-channel vbOnline facilitates communications with external serial-connected devices using standard protocols such as MODBUS RTU (Remote Terminal Unit). This feature enables data polling between Ascent and compatible hardware devices, including PLC controllers and oil analyzers.

Ascent communicates with external MODBUS sources using a standard 16-channel vbOnline as an intermediary. Ascent and the 16-channel vbOnline communicate using a standard Ethernet connection. The 16-channel vbOnline and the MODBUS device communicate using a standard Serial (RS232 RJ12) connection.

NOTE: The RS232 communication rate for SDI MODBUS communications is fixed at 19200 baud. The MODBUS server must be configured accordingly.

This reference guide details the configuration steps required within Ascent. It does not detail the configuration required in the source device, PLC, or oil analyzers. See the device's documentation for this information before proceeding. The steps detailed below assume that the MODBUS source is already installed and configured.


313

Configure Engineering Units and Scaling

You can configure engineering units and scaling by setting up a special sensor in Ascent. To do this:

1. Select Edit > Manage > Sensors. 2. Click Add. 3. Select Standard Sensor. 4. Select the Serial Data Input option from the Input Range and

Coupling field. 5. Select the engineering units for the final scaled values — The Other

button provides an extensive list of options. 6. Enter a numeric value in the Gain field — This value specifies the

multiplier that will be applied to the raw data from the Serial Data Input. The default value is 100, but you may choose any value, including 1 to record a raw, unchanged serial input value.

7. Enter a numeric value in the Offset field to change the serial input following gain adjustment — The offset addition or subtraction and gain multiplier work together to enable basic mathematical manipulation of the input value.

8. Enter a description for this serial data scaling in the Desc/Serial No. field.

9. Click OK then Apply — The serial data sensor is created. You can now select it when creating a schedule entry.

Assigning Engineering Units and Scaling


314

Configure SDI Schedule Entry

SDI schedule entries can only be created for 16-channel vbOnline devices. In order to configure a SDI schedule entry, a 16-channel vbOnline must be present in the Ascent database. To add a device, press CTRL + ALT + S > Select Add > Select Online Device.

To configure a SDI schedule entry:

1. Select Edit > Manage > SDI Modbus. 2. Click Add. 3. Use the vbOnline Modbus Assignment window to configure your

schedule entry. 4. Enter a name for the schedule entry in the Description field. 5. Select a protocol value from the Data Enter field — This controls the

type of data to be read. For example, Coils and Inputs are simple on/off values. Registers are typically 16- or 32-bit integers.

NOTE: Consult your MODBUS source documentation to determine the type suitable for the attached equipment.

6. Enter an address in the RTU Address field — This address may be any value between 1 and 247. Consult your source device for address details.

7. Enter a 1-5 digit address in the DATA Address field — This address can be any value between 1 and 10000. It will vary depending on the Protocol selected earlier and the MODBUS source device configuration. The table lists the available address ranges.

RTU Protocol Name Starting Address

Coil Bits, binary values, flags 00001

Digital Input Binary inputs 10001

Analog Input Binary inputs 30001

Register Analog values, variables 40001

8. Select a SDI sensor in the Sensor Desc/Serial No. field — This will define the engineering units and scaling of the values. Any SDI sensors created using the steps described in Configure the Engineering Units and Scaling above will be listed.


315

9. Click OK — The SDI configuration will be saved and listed in the Configure Serial Data Inputs window.

10. Select an item. 11. Click Edit to make any required changes. 12. Click OK to close this panel.

MODBUS Setup Interface

New SDI MODBUS Input


316

Apply SDI Schedule Entry

To apply a SDI schedule entry:

1. Select or create a point, location, or schedule entry from the navigator list.

2. Use EITHER of these methods to open the SDI Schedule Entry window.

3. Click the SDI button on the Creation Palette. 4. Right-click the item > Select New > SDI Schedule Entry. 5. Select a SDI Schedule Entry item from the field. 6. Click OK — The schedule entry displays beside a SDI icon in the

navigator list (under the measurement location).

NOTE: Ascent and the OnlineManager treat SDI schedule entry items as conventional vbOnline schedule entries.

7. Select Edit > Online Device Setup to assign recording intervals or use SDI measurements as criteria — SDI measurements are acquired as specified in Ascent by the OnlineManager application. MORE: See Criteria and Conditional Monitoring and Step 4: Configure Recording Intervals.

NOTE: You can chart and trend SDI measurements using the Chart options on the main menu or Numeric Data Alarms applied.

MORE: See Associate Process Variables with Vibration Recordings for more information about the 'Display this value on all charts for this Machine' checkbox.

SDI schedule entry on navigator list


317

Offline Recordings with 16-channel vbOnline


If there is a network communications failure between the 16-channel vbOnline and the OnlineManager software, you can program the 16-channel vbOnline to store measurement data.

NOTE: Data is typically stored in an 8 MB memory block allocated to offline recordings for 40 days.

This memory acts as a simple circular buffer with new recordings added at regular intervals. Older recordings are overwritten by newer recordings when the device's internal memory capacity is reached.

Once network communications are re-established, all stored measurement data is automatically transferred from your instrument to the appropriate Ascent database via the OnlineManager application. This feature ensures trendable recordings are available even after extended network or server outages.

The Offline Recording Configuration panel includes options for specifying the recording interval to be used:

• In the event of a network failure (e.g. every 12 hours) until network communications are restored.

• For clearing the measurements stored in a 16-channel vbOnline. • For simultaneously sending all individual offline recording

configurations to their respective 16-channel vbOnline devices in a database (one-click updating).

NOTE: The offline recording feature is designed to act as a measurement repository in the event of a temporary network outage. To avoid data loss as a result of a power outage, you can install an external battery capable of supplying power to the 16-channel vbOnline.


318

Initial Criteria are not applied to Offline Mode. Instead, the recordings are always taken, regardless of the criteria state. This is because Initial Criteria decisions are made in the OnlineManager, not in the vbOnline device. The required information might not be available on the device. If criteria are essential for your application, you might consider Dynamic Criteria as these are evaluated on the vbOnline device.

Set up Offline Recording Intervals

To set up offline recording intervals:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to open the Online Device Setup panel: • Select Edit > Online Device Setup. • Press CTRL + ALT + S.

2. Select the 16-channel vbOnline from the selection window. 3. Click Edit.

NOTE: This step assumes you have already added the 16-channel vbOnline to the Ascent database. If you have not, select Add > Online Device and double-click the device to add it.

4. Select the Setup tab. 5. Click the Configure button in the Offline Mode section. 6. Tick the Enabled checkbox to activate the offline recordings feature. 7. Select a radio button in the Interval area:

• Use Global Interval — Use the default recording interval.

TIP: You can click Change to modify the default measurement interval. An interval of 12 hours is suitable for typical applications.

• Override — Specify a recording interval. 8. Click Accept. 9. Click Send to send this interval value to the vbOnline device, along

with the details of all the conventional scheduled recordings.

MORE: The steps required for configuring conventional online recordings are described at the beginning of this section (Create Machines and Measurement Setups).

NOTE: Once all conventional schedule entries have been set, sensors specified, and recording intervals configured, you can send the offline configuration by clicking the Send button.

10. Click OK to apply the recording interval to the selected instrument.


319

Setting up offline recording intervals


320

Update configurations on several 16-channel vbOnline devices simultaneously

You can update the configurations on several 16-channel vbOnline devices simultaneously. To do this:

1. Select Edit > Offline Configurations. 2. Tick the checkbox beside each vbOnline device you wish to update,

or click Select All to select all listed instruments. 3. Click Send.

Updating configurations on several 16-channel vbOnline devices simultaneously

Change Offline Measurement Global Interval

To change the offline measurement global interval:

1. Select Edit > Offline Configurations. 2. Click Interval — The Change Offline Recording Interval window

opens, displaying the current global default recording interval. 3. Edit the interval period and unit. 4. Click Accept. 5. Click Refresh on the Send All Configurations window to update the

window with the new interval. 6. Ensure the relevant vbOnline instrument checkboxes are ticked. 7. Click Send to update the affected vbOnline instruments.

Changing the offline measurement global interval


321

Clear Offline Recordings from 16-channel vbOnline

To clear any unretrieved measurement data from a 16-channel vbOnline, click the Clear button on the vbOnline Offline Options window.

Clearing offline recordings from a 16-channel vbOnline

Identify Offline Measurements in Ascent

In the event of a network outage, measurements retrieved from a vbOnline device will be identified with an offline measurement icon in the Ascent navigator window. The following image of a recording shows this.

Identify offline measurements in Ascent


322

Template Machines

This feature is available with Ascent Level 3 software. It will only be available to you if it is included as part of your license agreement. If you wish to enable this feature, please contact [email protected] or your distributor for more information.

The Template Machines system enables any new or existing collection of tree items in Ascent to be marked as a Template. This template consists of a machine and its associated point, location, and schedule entries. You can then deploy and use this to generate or update any number of duplicated child machines. This function is useful if your site includes several instances of common hardware components (e.g. drive motors, fans, or turbines).

The ability to deploy templates greatly simplifies the setup and maintenance time required for larger site installations. You can also modify each master template machine. This includes changing its point, location, and schedule entry configuration. You can then simultaneously propagate these changes to all associated child machines.

You can identify template and child machines in Ascent by their status tags. Template machines and associated items are listed in the navigator with a [T] label beside them. Child items are labeled with [C].

You can also change and deploy templates in the VantagePoint web application.

NOTE: Setting and applying templates are individually licensed features. Under normal circumstances, only a single 'master' Ascent instance will be licensed to create and edit template machines. All other associated instances will be allowed to apply these template machines to update or generate child machines. However, you will not be able to change existing template machines or create new ones. If the Template Machines feature is used on a single Ascent installation in a closed-loop environment, both license capabilities should be applied to the same Ascent installation.


323

Create Template Machine

To create a machine template:

1. Select an existing machine or configure a machine containing the required number of points, locations, and schedule entries — You can configure any schedule entry types. It is not necessary to assign a vbOnline device to schedule entry recordings if you will export then import the template file to another installation of Ascent (e.g. at another location). This is because your instrument must be assigned locally.

NOTE: When using the templating system, any changes you make to a parameter set that is used by a template machine will also affect child machines.

2. Right-click the machine name in the navigator panel > Select Template > Set As Template.

3. Enter a template name in the field provided.

TIP: We recommend you enter a version number as part of the template name. This will enable you to track template versions as you make changes over time and propagate to child machines.

4. Click OK — The template is created and a confirmation message displays. The machine name and elements listed in the navigator list display in bold. All element names are labeled with a [T].

NOTE: The template name is used as the default name for exported template files — See Export or Import a Template File. You can edit the template name by right-clicking a template machine and selecting Edit. You should update the version number of the template whenever you edit it to ensure each version is tracked.

Template machine with labels in bold


324

Export or Import Template File

Once you have created and configured a template machine, you can export the template information as a vb template (.vbt) file. You can then send this file to another copy of Ascent (e.g. via email) and import it. You can create any number of child machines using the template file. You can also update child machines you created previously using older template files, with newer template files.

Export Template File

To export a vb template file:

1. Right-click a template machine in the navigator list > Select Template > Export Template File.

2. Navigate to an appropriate location. 3. Click Save — The default file name will be the template name. 4. Click OK.

NOTE: Although it is possible to change the name and version number of the exported file at this point, we recommend you only update only the template name to avoid confusion. To do this, right-click Template Machine in the navigator list > Select Edit. When you import the .vbt file, the template name will display regardless of the vb template file name. You can leave the .vbt default file name untouched to ensure the template name and exported file names match each another.

Import Template File

To import a vb template file:

1. Right-click the folder icon > Select Template > Import Template File. 2. Choose a vb template file (.vbt). 3. Click Open. 4. Use the Import Template window to:

• Create new child machines using a vb template file — See Create Child Machine.

• Update existing child machines with a newer vb template file — See Update Child Machine.

• Preview changes made to vb template files — See Preview Template Changes.


325

Import Template

Create Child Machine

To create a child machine:

1. Right-click the folder icon > Select Template > Import Template File. 2. Select a vb template file (.vbt). 3. Click Open. 4. Click New Child Machine. 5. Select the folder you wish to create the new child machine in. 6. Enter a name for the child machine in the field provided. 7. Click OK.

Update Child Machine

To apply an updated template file to existing child machines:

1. Right-click the folder icon > Select Template > Import Template File. 2. Select a vb template file (.vbt) > Click Open. 3. Tick the checkboxes beside the required child machine(s) or click

Select Children to select all child items. 4. Click Apply — The selected child machine(s) will be updated.


326

Apply Machine Template to Existing Machine

You can apply an existing machine template to any existing machine in a database. To do this:

1. Right-click the existing machine name in the navigator list > Select Template > Import Template File.

2. Select a vb template file (.vbt). 3. Click Open. 4. Click Apply — The template machine is applied to the existing

machine. Any new points, locations, and schedule entries contained in the template machine will be overlaid onto the existing machine. Any points, locations, and schedule entries already contained in the existing machine will be retained as independent, 'free' items.

In the example above, note that the 3-Gen-E point, Vertical location and velocity spectrum schedule entry are retained as free items when the template machine is applied. You can edit these items normally. The template machine's Drive End point, Vertical location, and acceleration spectrum schedule entry are added as new child items. The machine itself is also converted to a Child of the Machine template.

Machine before Template applied

Machine after Template applied


327

Preview Template Changes

To preview template changes:

1. Right-click the folder icon > Select Template > Import Template File. 2. Select a vb template file (.vbt). 3. Click Open. 4. Select a machine to compare the new vb template against. 5. Click Preview — The Preview Report panel shows the selected

machine as it will display with the selected template applied. New items that will be added to the machine by the new template file are listed with an [Add] tag. Items that will not change name in the new template machine file configuration are listed as [Matched] (although the included schedule entries may have been modified).

NOTE: If the vb template file is applied to a child machine with independently created points, locations or schedule entries, these will be tagged as [Free]. These items will be left untouched if the vb template file is applied. Applying a vb template does not delete or change 'Free' category items.

Previewing template changes

Change Template Name

To change a template name:

1. Right-click a machine in the navigator list > Select Edit. 2. Enter a new template name in the field provided. 3. Click OK.


328

Release Child or Template Machine

To release a child or template machine:

1. Right-click a child or template machine.

TIP: You can identify child machines by their [C] tag and template machines by their [T] tag.

2. Select Template > Free Template — The machine is released and converted to a free item.

MORE: See Apply a Machine Template to an Existing Machine to learn how to reapply a vb template file.


329

Audit Template Database

The template system provides an efficient mechanism for ensuring machine setups used in the field conform to existing corporate standards. You can use the Structure report in Ascent to quickly and easily confirm which template is applied to each machine and the version number of that template.

To confirm the template status of your child machines:

1. Select a folder containing child machines in the navigator list. 2. Select Report > Structure Report.

NOTE: Depending on the folder size, the report might take some time to open.

3. Right-click the structure report > Select Setup Report. 4. Select Machines in the Structure Detail dropdown field. 5. Select the Click here to continue button — The structure report is

updated. It lists all machines in the folder, together with their associated template versions and status (child or template).

TIP: If child machines display with an inappropriate or incorrect template version, simply apply or reapply the correct template version as detailed in Update Child Machine.

NOTE: It is critical that you update template names consistently with appropriate version numbers whenever you modify a template. To do this, right-click the template machine in the navigator, select Edit > Update the Template Name field. The Structure report will only reflect the current template name. If this name is not updated to accurately reflect changes to the template, the Structure report might become misleading over time.

Example Template Structure report


330

GMT Handling and Time Zones

If you take recordings in a time zone different to that of your local PC, the GMT offset will be shown in brackets beside the recording in the navigator.

Recording with GMT offset

All recordings are internally stored in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The local time offset is also stored with each recording. This value is used to show the correct date or time for a recording in the local time of the instrument that recorded it.

Edit Local Time Offset for Recording

To change the local time offset for a recording:

1. Right-click the recording in the navigator > Select Edit. 2. Change the GMT offset in the top right of the window.

Edit GMT Time Offset for vbOnline or Ranger

To adjust your instrument's time zone setting:

1. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 2. Select the required vbOnline or Ranger instrument using EITHER of

these methods: • Double-click the instrument. • Select the instrument > Click Configure.

3. Ensure the Properties tab is selected. 4. Enter a GMT offset in the Time Zone field — This will be used for

recordings received from this online instrument. The default setting is Same as PC, which means the system time zone will be used.

Edit Windows System Time Zone

You can change the Windows system time zone by double-clicking the clock in the bottom-right of the Windows taskbar and selecting the Time Zone tab.


331

Configure vbX000 Instrument Communication

This topic applies only to vbX000 instruments such as the vb3000 and vb2000 analyzers.

If Ascent cannot detect your instrument when you click Send or Receive, you can change the COM port being used. To do this:

1. Select Options > Configure VB Comms. 2. Select the COM port from the drop-down box or click Find to let

Ascent automatically detect this for you.

Changing the COM port


332

Connect Instrument via Serial COMs

To connect your instrument via serial COMs:

1. Connect your vbX000 instrument to your computer using a serial cable.

2. Click Find — Ascent starts scanning your computer's COM ports. If an instrument is found it will be connected automatically and the window will close. If an instrument is NOT found, Ascent will continue scanning ports until you click Close or Cancel.

3. Select a serial port manually: a. Select the Serial Port dropdown field on the VB Communications

window. b. Select the port your instrument is connected to. c. Click Test.

Connecting a vbX000 using serial COMs

Reduce Settling Time

When you select Send schedule entries in an order which optimizes settling time, Ascent will reorder the schedule entries when sending a folder to your instrument. This ensures measurements at the same location are taken in the most efficient order (e.g. acceleration measurements, then velocity, then displacement, which has the longest settling time). Reordering measurements will reduce your data collection time.

To reduce settling time, select Options > Configure VB Comms > Tick the appropriate checkbox.


333

CPU Intensive Comms

When you enable CPU Intensive Comms mode, your PC will use 100% CPU time while communicating with your instrument. If you are using a laptop and want to reduce keep battery consumption, you can disable this option. It will make a difference of 0-10% of the download times, depending on the speed of your PC. If Rush Data is activated, this option will not make much difference.

Rush Data

This option is available with vbX000 firmware 2.15 and higher.

When Rush Data mode is enabled, your PC will try to download data from your instrument in larger chunks. This will make the download time about three times faster compared to when Rush Data is NOT activated.

If the serial communications line is prone to errors, Rush Data might slow down significantly. If this happens, simply deactivate Rush Data.

Synchronize Instrument and PC Date and Time

There might be a difference between the date or time on your PC and vb instrument. This is likely if you are receiving recordings that were taken in a different country or time zone. You can synchronize the time clock on your instrument and PC. To do this, you set your instrument's clock to update automatically each time you click Send or Receive.

To activate this option:

1. Select Options > Configure VB Comms. 2. Select Synchronize VB Date and Time with the PC — Once

activated this feature remains switched on.

Troubleshoot vbX Network Communications

This topic applies only to SCOUT/vbX series instruments such as the vb7 and vb8 analyzers. It does NOT apply to vbX000 instruments such as the vb3000 analyzer.


334

Check Firewall Settings

Before changing your network configuration, ensure a firewall is not responsible for your communication difficulty. To check this:

1. Temporarily disable any active firewalls (e.g. Windows Firewall). 2. Check that the masvb32.exe file has permission to access your

network (i.e. it has an 'exception' rule applied to it, if using a firewall).

Change Ethernet Network Address

SCOUT/vbX series instruments and Ascent use a default network address to communicate. You should not need to change this address unless the default network settings conflict with your current network settings. You can check for a conflict by observing whether other network connections are lost while your instrument is connected to your computer, and restored when you unplug your instrument. To fix this problem, you can change the network settings in Ascent and your instrument.

NOTE: Your changes will only take effect once your instrument hardware is reset.

NOTE: If you change the network address you must change it in your instrument and software to ensure they can communicate. This does not apply if you are only changing the last digit of the IP address).

1. Switch on your instrument. 2. Plug it into the network using an Ethernet cable. 3. Open Ascent. 4. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 5. Select your instrument. 6. Click Configure. 7. Select the Setup tab. 8. Enter a new IP address In the Ethernet field.

NOTE: If this field is unavailable, untick the Obtain an IP address automatically via DHCP checkbox.

9. Click Apply — You will be informed that the IP address has changed. The instrument screen will prompt you to reset your instrument.

10. Press + to reset. 11. Click OK twice. 12. Click Close to close the Ascent windows.

Section 8 — Manage Data Storage Effectively

335


Once you have set up a program for collecting and storing machine information you will be able to store thousands of recordings in your Ascent database. However, if your database becomes very large, it will eventually slow down data retrieval and display in Ascent.

Although it is important to collect enough historical data to be able to trend a machine's condition over time, you do not need to keep every recording ever taken on each machine.

To reduce the size of your Ascent database you will need to reduce the number of recordings stored in it. There are several approaches you can take to do this:

• Periodically thin your database by deleting old recordings (e.g. those that are more than a year old).

• Back up your database regularly (every few months) and store these old recordings separately on your hard drive or a CD-ROM. Once you have done this you can delete all recordings from the active copy of your database. If you use the Data Thinning function in Ascent, you can selectively delete all recordings, except for baselines.

MORE: See Data Thinning for more information.

• Use the Ascent database optimization tools to compact the database and reclaim lost space. This will help speed up Ascent.

MORE: See Database Optimization to learn more about backing up your database and using the database optimization tools.


336

Data Optimization (Thinning)

You can use data optimization/thinning to thin out your recordings by removing unneeded historical data. This can significantly reduce the size of your database, thereby improving the speed of data retrieval and display. A thinned database will also take up less room on your hard drive.

NOTE: Databases must be compacted as part of the optimization process before hard drive space will be reclaimed.

You can use the data thinning feature to keep different numbers of recordings for different time periods. For example, you might want to keep most new recordings but only a few recordings from 6 months ago and even fewer recordings from 1 year ago. You can also create a backup file before the thinning process takes place. You can use the backup file to restore the deleted data in the event of any accidental deletions.

NOTE: If you are using a vbOnline device rather than a vb portable, you can configure the OnlineManager program to regularly run the thinning process automatically. See the vbOnline Reference Guide for more information.


337

Data thinning enables you to selectively remove recordings from a database, site, folder, individual machines, points, locations, or schedule entries. To execute data thinning:

1. Select a level in the navigator from which you wish to remove recordings.

EG: Select the entire folder or an individual machine or location).

2. Select Database > Data Optimization. 3. Select the required data optimization option:

• OPTION 1: Backup database before thinning — This will create a backup file or a complete copy of the database before it is thinned. This enables you to recover data at a later stage if

recordings are accidentally deleted. Use the browse button to navigate to the backup folder and save the backup or database file.

• OPTION 2: Selectively thin old recording data — This option will thin recordings that are older than an age you specify in days, weeks, months, or years. It will only keep a selected number of recordings for the specified interval.

EG: "For recordings older than 6 months, keep one recording per 12 hours".

4. Use the radio buttons to select the data you wish to apply the setting to (entire database, site, folder, or navigation list item).

5. Choose the number of recordings you want to keep over a specified period — Use the drop-down boxes and enter numbers in the blank fields to complete the sentence, For recordings older than X days/months keep one recording per X minutes/hours.

EG: "For recordings older than 2 days, keep one recording per 6 hours".

6. Click Add Row to specify additional periods — Any additional rows must have a time defined further in the past than the preceding rows.

NOTE: Selecting Add Row or Delete Row will always add or delete the bottom row.

7. Tick EITHER of these checkboxes: • Keep baseline recordings to keep all baseline recordings. • Keep recordings with notes or remarks to only keep

recordings that have notes or remarks associated with them.


338

8. Click Preview to see the specific schedule entries and number of recordings that will be deleted, and the total number of recordings that exist for that schedule entry.

9. Click Close. 10. Adjust your thinning criteria (if necessary).

• OPTION 3: Compact database — This process will compact then restore the database following the thinning process. This recovers space on your hard drive if recordings have been deleted during the thinning process. If a database is thinned but not compacted, it will remain approximately the same size even though recordings have been deleted.

11. Click Run when you have finished selecting which of the three data optimization actions you wish to perform and have configured them according to your requirements — A confirmation window will display, confirming the actions to be carried out: • Database Connections specifies any other processes on your

computer that are connected to the database being optimized. If no connections are found you can proceed safely. If other processes on your computer or network are connected to the database (e.g. OnlineManager or other instances of Ascent), you should shut down these processes before optimization begins. When you have disconnected all external processes, click Refresh to confirm that all process connections have been terminated.

• Backup indicates whether a database backup will be created before database thinning starts, and the location at which it will be saved.

• Thinning indicates what data will be thinned (database, site, folder), whether recordings with baselines and notes will be thinned, and the specified thinning parameters.

NOTE: If you make a mistake you can select Database > Restore > Restore from Backup to restore the data using the backup file if this option was selected. NOTE: If the thinning options you selected have not been previewed, this will be indicated at the bottom of the panel. We recommend previewing all thinning actions before they are performed to prevent the accidental loss of recording data. NOTE: If a recording that has a corresponding multi-channel recording is marked to be kept, these recordings will be retained. This does not guarantee preservation of orbit plots. These may only contain an x axis or a y axis after thinning.


339

12. Click Proceed to start the database optimization process — This may take some time for larger databases. When the process is complete, you will be asked whether you wish to view the event log of the actions that have just been carried out.

13. Click Yes to view the log or No to close and finish.

NOTE: If you selected the 'Compact database' option, the database will automatically close when the compacting process is complete (sequential backup and restore). You will need to select Open to reopen the database.

Preparing to thin your database

Option 2 — Selectively thin old recording data


340

Option 3 — Compacting a database


341

Database Optimization Event Logs

Whenever you optimize a database using the Database Optimization panel (data is backed up and/or thinned and/or compacted) the actions carried out are stored in a log file. You can access this logging information by selecting Database > View Event Logs — This opens the Event Log Viewer panel.

The left column lists:

• The start of the database action (typically DBOptimization for database optimization)

• Exception if the action failed • The date and time the action began and finished • Whether the action was successful — The icon to the left of the

log entries indicates the type of log file it is:

• The blue icon indicates the log is stored in the Ascent database and as a text file in the folder location specified at the bottom left of the window.

• The white icon indicates the log is only stored as a text file in the folder location specified at the bottom left of the window, and not in the Ascent database. Typically this is because the log was deleted from the database at some point. To fully delete a log, it must be removed from the Ascent database and the log text file must be deleted.

Selecting any log entry in the left column will display the full log details in the right panel. This includes the results of each individual optimization stage (backing up, thinning, compacting) as well as the new database size (if compacted) and the total process running time.

To select a different folder location for the log text files, click the browse

button.

To open the selected folder and view the log text files, click the Open Folder button.


342

To copy the text contents of the expanded log file (displayed in the right half of the panel), click the Copy to Clipboard button.

NOTE: You can manually delete individual log entries by selecting them from the log list on the left, pressing Delete, then confirming the action.

Data optimization event logs


343

Back up Database

A backup of your database provides a known good point to revert back to in case your database ever becomes corrupt.

TIP: Ensure you back up your Ascent and Machine Assessment report databases regularly to avoid the risk of data loss.

MORE: See Machine Assessment Report.

Select Database > Backup Now! to back up a database.

NOTE: This action will immediately create a backup of the Ascent database. The Machine Assessment Report database will NOT be backed up unless you have previously configured the backup system to do this. The configuration steps required to back up both databases is described in Configuring Database Associations.

Backup files are automatically named with the date and time the backup was performed. This includes the name of the database that the backup file was taken from. Machine Assessment Report backup files use the same naming convention, but are appended with the text _Report. They are stored in .gbak format rather than the .backup format used for Ascent databases.

NOTE: We recommend you save copies of your backup files to a network server or CD-ROM, in case of computer hard disk failure.


344

Automatic Periodic Backups

You can use the Backup Options window to set options for creating and deleting backup files automatically, and for restoring a database from a backup file. To access these options:

1. Select Database > Backup Options. to open the Backup Options window.

2. Select a compression method in the dropdown field. 3. Select any other options as required.

NOTE: Setting the 'Days without backup before reminder is displayed' option to a value less than two and enabling the 'Start automatically' option will cause backups to be taken every 15 minutes when Ascent is idle. This is not recommended.

4. Select the Ascent Files tab. 5. Click Backup Now! if you want to back up the database

immediately. 6. Click OK when you are finished.

Backing up a database


345

Change Backup Directory

By default, backup files are stored in a folder named Backup in the directory Ascent was installed into. To change the location:

1. Select Database > Backup Options — The backup directory location is listed at the bottom of the window.

2. Use EITHER of these methods to specify the new location: • Enter your new path in the Backup Directory field. • Click Browse > Navigate to the location where you would like

your backups stored.

Back up Files to Shared Network Folder

To specify a shared network folder for backups:

1. Follow the instructions in the previous topic for changing the backup folder.

2. Enter the network path using the following format: \\ServerName\share_name\file_path

Archive Large Database

As your Ascent database increases with the addition of new recordings, it may cause Ascent to slow and eventually become unwieldy. Your routine vibration analysis tasks may take longer to complete. To minimize this effect, you may need to pro-actively reduce the size of your database.

The easiest way to reduce the size of your database is to delete older recordings you no longer require. You can use the Database Optimization tool to do this.

If you wish to retain data you use only occasionally, you can create a backup archive database. Once you have created an archive database, you can import any old data you wish to file away from the source database. You can then regularly update the archive database with the newer data being acquired in the source database. You can then purge older data from the source database to reduce its size and increase the speed of Ascent operations.


346

To ensure your source database retains a manageable size:

1. Ensure you regularly export newly collected data from the source database.

2. Add it to the archive database. 3. Thin the source database. 4. Perform a backup and restore sequence to compact the database —

This will ensure that while the archive database continues to increase in size, the source database remains only as large as absolutely necessary.

TIP: We recommend you perform this archiving and thinning process at least once every month. Depending on your rate of data collection, it might be best to do this once a week.

Create Archive Database

To create an archive database:

1. Close Ascent. 2. Open Windows Explorer. 3. Navigate to the Firebird database containing the data you wish to

archive.

TIP: Typically this database will be located at C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents or C:\Program Files\Commtest\Ascent. For computers running the Windows Vista, Server 2008 or 7 operating systems the database will be stored by default in C:\Users\Public\Documents.

4. Right-click the database file (.fdb extension) > Select Copy. 5. Right-click the folder containing the database > Select Paste — A

copy of the database will be created within the folder. 6. Right-click the new database copy in Windows Explorer and rename

it, adding archive to its title.


347

Thin Source Database

Before thinning the source database, ensure the newly created archive database is intact and contains all required measurement information.

IMPORTANT! You should only thin the source database when you are certain this data is present. If the database does not contain this information, repeat the archive creation process.

To thin the source database:

1. Start Ascent. 2. Open the source database.

NOTE: This is the original database, NOT the archive copy created in Create and Archive Database.

3. Select File > Database > Database Optimization. 4. Tick the Selectively thin old recording data checkbox. 5. Tick the Compact database checkbox. 6. Select the data you wish to remove from your source database

using the options listed beside Selectively thin old recording data: • Specify the data to be thinned (the entire database, site, folder

or navigator selection). • Specify the recording types by classification (baseline

recordings, recordings with notes attached, and number required per hour/day/month/year etc.).

• Specify the age. 7. Click Preview to verify you wish to remove the selected recordings. 8. Click Run when you have selected the correct recordings. 9. Ensure the thinning options displayed are correct in the

confirmation window that displays. 10. Click Proceed — The database is thinned. I.e., the data you have

specified as unnecessary is removed. 11. Click Yes if you wish to view the event log of the thinning process or

No to exit — The database will now contain only the remaining data that was specified during the thinning process. It may be significantly smaller than the original database, allowing Ascent to perform analysis tasks more efficiently.

NOTE: See Data Thinning for more information on this process.

12. Click Save & Close.


348

Thinning the source database


349

Export Data from Source to Archive Database

We recommend you perform the following process regularly (typically weekly). This should ensure your newly thinned source database does not get too big. No data should be lost during this process. Exported data should merely move from one database to another. This archive data is not deleted and can be viewed at any time in Ascent.

To open the source database containing the data you wish to archive:

1. Open Ascent. 2. Click Open. 3. Select your source database from the first Database dropdown field. 4. Click OK — The database opens in Ascent. 5. Select File > Export Folder to File. 6. Tick the Only export measurements/notes made between the

following dates checkbox. 7. Select the Start Date dropdown field — The calendar interface

opens. 8. Use the left and right arrows to select the date you last exported

data to your archive.

NOTE: If this is the first time you have exported data to the archive, choose the initial creation date of the archive database. The End Date will list today's date. You do not need to change this.

9. Click OK — The Ascent Export window opens. 10. Enter a name for your .vbz3 export file in the File Name field. 11. Navigate to the location where you wish to save the file (e.g. your

desktop). 12. Click Save — The .vbz3 format export file is generated.


350

Exporting data from the source database to the archive database


351

Import Data to Archive Database

To import data to the archive database:

1. Select Open. 2. Click the Change button — The Select Database window opens. 3. Click the Browse button — The Open Database window opens. 4. Select your archive database. 5. Click Open. 6. Select a folder or site name in the Open window. 7. Click OK. 8. Select File > Import File — The Ascent Import window opens. 9. Select the .vbz3 export file created previously (as described in Export

Data From Source Database). 10. Click Open — A message displays asking if you wish to update the

currently selected folder with data contained in the export file. 11. Click Yes — The data will be imported. Any new data will be added to

the archive database. 12. Ensure the archive database contains the specified measurement

information. 13. Thin the Source Database once you are sure the data has been

imported successfully,

IMPORTANT! If the archive database does NOT contain the newly exported data required, do NOT thin the source database. Simply repeat the export and import processes detailed in the previous topics.

Import data to archive database


352

Thin and Compact Source Database

To thin and compact your source database:

1. Start Ascent. 2. Open your source database.

NOTE: This is the original database, not the archive copy.

3. Select File > Database > Database Optimization. 4. Tick the Selectively thin old recording data checkbox. 5. Use the radio buttons to select the data you wish to thin:

• Entire database • Current site • Current folder • Correct selection in navigator

6. Tick the Compact database checkbox. 7. Click the Run button. 8. Click Proceed in the confirmation window that displays — The

database is thinned. I.e. the data specified as unnecessary is removed. This process may take some time. You will be notified when it is complete.

9. Click Yes to view the event log or No to exit.

NOTE: Once the database is compacted it will close automatically. You will need to select Open to reopen it. The database may be significantly smaller and will not contain the data exported to the archive database.


353

Restore Ascent or Machine Assessment Report Database

If your computer's hard disk fails or your database becomes corrupt, you will need to select your latest backup file and restore the Ascent database. You will also need to restore the Machine Assessment Report database, if you are using this.

Restore Ascent Database

Use EITHER of these methods to restore your Ascent database:

• Select Database > Restore > Restore from Backup: a. Click Browse to navigate to a particular backup file. b. Click Open. c. Click Next. d. Ensure the backup file chosen is correct. e. Click Finish — The restore process starts.

• Select Database > Restore > Restore from Factory Default to create a new factory default database.

NOTE: The backup will overwrite your active Ascent database. Any recordings you have been taken since the last backup will not be in this file and will therefore be lost.

Restoring an Ascent database


354

Restore Machine Assessment Report Database

To restore a machine assessment report database:

1. Select Database > Restore > Restore Report — An message warns you that restoring a Machine Assessment Report database will erase all data in the database you currently have open and that the Ascent database must be no older than the Reporting database you are restoring.

2. Click Yes to continue. 3. Navigate to a specific backup file (.gbak format). 4. Click Open — The restore process begins. When this is complete,

review the process text to confirm the process was successful and without errors.

5. Click Close. 6. Select View > Advanced Reporting Editor to reopen the Machine

Assessment report editor.

NOTE: The backup will overwrite your active Machine Assessment Report database. Any reports that have been created since the last backup will not be in this file and will therefore be lost.

Database Management

The database engine Ascent uses stores the entire database as a database file (.gdb or .fdb). This section describes how to ensure the database file is being used efficiently.

NOTE: If you have Database Replication set up, please contact Commtest Support for recommendations on using database optimization.


355

Where to Store Database Files

The database file must be stored on a hard disk of the computer running the database server. If you are running Windows XP and Vista, there is a feature called System Restore that will track changes to your system setup by monitoring changes to files that are not stored in document folders. If the database file is not stored in a document folder, System Restore will log all changes to that file, causing the software to slow down during database access.

NOTE: A document folder is any folder that belongs to the Documents and Settings folder on the hard disk. Any other folder, such as a folder in the Program Files folder, will be subject to System Restore.

To get around the System Restore problem, save your database file (.gdb or .fdb) in a folder within the My Documents folder, rather than in Program Files.

Relocate Database

You can use the following steps to relocate the database for optimal performance:

1. Start Ascent. 2. Back up the database. 3. Select Database > Create Database > Create from Backup. 4. Click Browse > Locate and select the backup file you wish to restore

from.

NOTE: Ensure you use the newest backup file.

5. Click Next. 6. Click Browse > Locate and select your My Documents folder >

Name and save the database here. 7. Select the dropdown field at the top of the screen to navigate to My

Documents. 8. Click Next. 9. Ensure the file paths specified are correct. 10. Click Finish — The original database file remains in the same

location. You can delete it if required.


356

Reduce Database Size

You can back up and restore a database to help reduce the size of the database and increase its speed. When you do this, unused space in the database file is reclaimed and the data is defragmented.

To reduce the size of a database:

1. Select Database > Backup Now! to create a backup of the database.

2. Select Database > Create Database > Create from Backup to create a new database.

3. Select the backup file you created before. 4. Save your backup file to replace the existing database.

Rebuild Database

Rebuilding a database reindexes the tables and reorders items. This makes it easier to access a database. Once several records have been added or deleted from the database, you can rebuild the database indexes to achieve a slight improvement in database speed.

To rebuild a database, select Database > Rebuild Database.

Section 9 — Handle Large Amounts of Data with Views

357


This section explains the best ways to view large amounts of data.

Walkthrough — Create your own Views

You can create your own customized views to display data in any combination of ways. For example, you can create a view that plots a stacked chart of the last four velocity spectra on the left of the screen, and a trend of the last 50 overall RMS measurements on the right of the screen. You can specify whether you want alarms, notes, and chart remarks visible on your custom view and set axes to use the units of your choice. You can also specify a target to apply your custom view to. For example, you might wish to plot data from an entire machine or individual points, locations, etc on a selected machine.

NOTE: If you have any trouble creating a specific view for your needs, please contact [email protected] with details of the kind of view you are trying to build.

To create a custom view:

1. Create an empty view. 2. Split the screen into segments to create a layout for the view (if

required). 3. Add components to the view (e.g. a report or chart). 4. Set a target for the view (if required) so you can apply it to a

particular navigator item — The default target for a view is the schedule entry. You can change this to have your view applied at the machine, point, or location level.

5. Further customize the view (if required): • Include or exclude details such as notes. • Restrict the amount or type of data displayed — E.g.: You can set

the number of recordings to plot and only display velocity data.

TIP: Another good way to create a custom view is to start with a view that already exists. You can then select View > Save View As > Enter a new name for the view, and build on it from there. This technique is explained in Saving Changes to a View.


358

EG: Set up combined Waterfall and Trend View

You can design as many views as you want. The following walkthrough guides you through setting up a combined Waterfall and Trend view. The waterfall chart will plot the last 6 recordings only. The trend chart will plot all available recordings. When this task is complete, we will explore some of the more detailed features that can be included in a view.

To design a combined Waterfall and Trend view:

1. Open a folder containing some recordings so you will have some data to plot as you create the view.

2. Select View > Create new View. 3. Enter the title WaterfallTrend for the new view. 4. Click OK — The title you entered is also used by default as the file

name (WaterfallTrend.av) for this view in the Autoview folder. You now have an empty view (blank chart or report) that is ready to accept components. The Select Auto View Component window opens in the middle of the screen.

NOTE: The components shown in this window might differ from those on your PC. Ascent only displays the features you are licensed to use.

NOTE: The Select Auto View Component window contains all the basic components for building your views. You can select an item to display a description of it in the right pane of the window. You can select some components now and read their descriptions so you can learn more about what can be displayed in a view.


359

5. Choose Splitter from the Select Auto View Component window to add a splitter to the view so you can split the screen into two parts.

6. Click OK — The Click here to add a component to this splitter label displays in the middle of the screen. You can now choose to split the screen top to bottom or left to right.

7. Right-click the chart > Select Layout Top-Bottom — This will split the screen into two halves so you can add your trend and waterfall charts.

NOTE: The split will only be visible when you add a component.

8. Right-click anywhere in the empty view > Select Set Top Component to add your first chart to the view.

9. Select Trend under Vibration Views on the Select Auto View Component window.

10. Click OK — You will see a trend chart at the top of your view.

NOTE: The trend chart is empty because you haven't yet selected any data to plot. You can test your view by single-clicking a schedule entry. Double-clicking the schedule entry will plot the latest recording.

11. Click the empty bottom half of the screen to open the Select Auto View Component window and add the waterfall chart to your view.

12. Choose Spectrum. 13. Click OK. s


360

14. Modify the spectrum to turn it into a waterfall chart: a. Right-click the empty spectrum > Select Chart Display >

Waterfall. b. Right-click the empty spectrum again > Select Set plot

limit. c. Enter 6 as the value to restrict the waterfall chart to

displaying only 6 recordings. d. Click OK. e. Right-click the empty spectrum to test your view again >

Select Waterfall Trend (Parent) > Update — Your view should look something like this:


361

15. Select View > Save to save your view now that you know it is working correctly.

16. Add your new view to the Report or Chart button list.

TIP: Because your view is a chart, it would be better to place it under the Chart button.

17. Select View > Category > Charts to move your view to the Chart button list.

18. Select View > Save. 19. Click the Chart button — You will see your view listed here.


362

Edit Custom View

Once you have created a custom view, you can edit it as required:

• Resize view — Press F11 to make the view fill the entire screen. Press F11 again to resize the view.

• Rename view — Open the view by selecting it from the Chart dropdown field > Select View > Save View As, and enter a new name.

• Move view — To move a view between the Report or Chart lists, open the view > Select View > Category > Make the appropriate selection > Select View > Save to save the view in this location.

• Delete custom view — Open the custom view you have created > Select View > Delete.


363

Define AutoView Components

The Ascent AutoView components are all fully customizable. Once you have added one to your view, you can right-click it to select the required options and make the required adjustments.

The next few topics take a closer look at AutoView components, explaining what they are and how you can customize them.

Selecting AutoView components


364

Building Blocks

Building blocks are used to divide your screen into sections so you can place display components in the required positions. For example, you might want to display components side by side or stacked on top of each other:

• Panel — May contain any number of other components (including more panels). You can use panels to help arrange the AutoView components. To do this, you divide the panels into sections using a splitter.

• Splitter — Contains up to two components side by side, or one on top of the other.

• Selector — Provides a dropdown field for selecting a target navigator item. For example, you might want to select a machine, location, or schedule entry. You can also use the selector as a filtering mechanism to restrict the data displayed. You can filter the data by:

• Axis — E.g. only show recordings taken on the horizontal axis.

• Measurement type — E.g. only show recordings taken in acceleration.

• Domain — E.g. only show demodulation recordings.


365

Vibration Views

Vibration views are the normal vibration charts such as spectra and waveforms. Once you have added a vibration view, you can further customize it by setting plot limits, choosing a chart mode (stacked, waterfall), or adjusting the axes:

• Spectrum — Displays the most recent spectra from the selected schedule entry.

• Waveform — Displays the most recent waveform from the selected schedule entry.

• Trend — Displays a trends of overall values, alarm levels, numeric data, and more. You can select the data that displays. To do this, right-click the chart > Select Data Enters as the data type.

• Spectrum/Waveform — Displays spectra from the selected schedule entry in the navigator. If no spectra are found, it display waveforms. For optimal performance, use the Waveform or Spectrum component where possible, instead of this general purpose component.

Reports

This option is provided for advanced SQL users only. This is a completely configurable HTML report based on SQL queries on the database. To create the SQL report right-click the blank report > Select Edit Report Definition.

NOTE: Displays machine, point, location, and measurement notes applicable to the current selection, looking back a maximum specified number of days. To set the number of days, right-click the report and enter the required number of days into the message.

• Balancing Report — Displays the latest balancing report for the selected machine.

• Text Based Trend — Displays a table of trend values e.g. alarm band levels, spectrum overalls etc. This report has a similar structure to the Last 8 Measurements report.

• Exception Report — Displays a summary of alarms at each machine.


366

Analysis

Frequency Based Waveform Analysis — A two-section chart used to analyze waveforms. The chart displays a time waveform in the lower half and plots a spectrum of this recording in the upper half. You can drag a range of frequencies in the spectrum to filter out the frequencies in the waveform and display the filtered waveform below.

Partial Waveform Analysis — A two-section chart that lets you select a portion of a time waveform and convert it to a spectrum. The chart displays a time waveform in the upper half and plots a spectrum of this recording in the lower half. You can drag a range of samples to show the spectrum of that section in the bottom chart.

Further Customize your View

You can fully customize the display components of a chart or report in the same way as a regular chart or report. For example, you can:

• Set the axis units on the chart. • Display a stacked or waterfall chart. • Make the alarm bands and envelopes visible. • Display baseline RMS values.

MORE: Several of the available shortcut menu options are explained in Using Charts.

Shortcut menus are context-sensitive. This means when you right-click an item, the shortcut menu displays commands that apply to that item. You can right-click a chart in a view to open the main chart display menu. If you right-click a special part of a chart, (e.g. as an alarm band), this will open a submenu containing commands specific to alarm bands. All context-sensitive menus have an option named Other which you can use to access the main chart display menu.


367

Assign Keyboard Shortcuts

There are keyboard shortcuts for some of the default views. For example, you can press F7 to open the SpecTrend view.

TIP: Click the Chart button to see the list of views and their assigned shortcuts.

You can assign keyboard shortcuts to your own views. This enables you to access these from the Chart button and your keyboard.

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a custom view you have set up:

1. Open your custom view. 2. Select View > Set Shortcut — This opens the Select Shortcut window

which contains a list of available key combinations you can assign to your view.

3. Select a keyboard shortcut from the dropdown field. 4. Click OK. 5. Click the close button at the top right to close the view. 6. Click Yes when you are prompted to save your changes. 7. Press your chosen key combination to open the view and test the

shortcut.

Creating a keyboard shortcut


368

Reuse Part of Existing View

Reusing components from existing views can save setup time, especially if a component has been extensively customized. You can copy and reuse a component within the same view, so that further adjustments can be made to the copied item. Alternatively, you can copy a component from an existing view and reuse it in a new view.

To reuse part of an existing view:

1. Open the view you want to copy the component from. 2. Open the view you wish to copy the component to. 3. Ensure you have an empty space in which to place the copied

component (split the panel to create a space). 4. Right-click the component you wish to copy > Select Component

Functions > Copy Component. This saves the component temporarily so you can retrieve it later.

5. Select the View tab in the bottom left corner of the navigator to display the view where you will paste this component (if necessary).

6. Right-click the empty panel > Select the appropriate Set Component option (left, right, top or bottom) — A message will display, asking Would you like to use the Control that is on the clipboard?.

7. Click OK to paste the copied component into the view.


369

Save Changes to View

Because Ascent does not save changes to any view until you tell it to, you can make temporary changes to any view (including the system-defined ones) to change the way your data displays on a chart or report. This might only be a small change such as changing the left axis units or hiding alarm bands to increase the size of your display area. When you close the view, you will be prompted to save your changes. Click No to discard all changes.

Alternatively, if you have made several adjustments, you might decide it is worth keeping this view intact. You might want to keep the original view too. You can select View > Save View As to achieve this. It enables you to make as many changes to a view as you like and then save the new view under a different name. It also enables you to use any of the system-defined default views or any of your own views as a starting point to create new ones. For example, you could plot a spectrum, then use View > Component Functions > Split Left-Right, to create a new blank panel on the right of the screen. You could then add components to the blank panel and further customize the layout before saving the view under a different name.

Restore System Default Views

If you save changes to one of the system-defined views, you can undo your changes at any time by selecting View > Reset Default Views. Doing so will restore any system defined views to their original format. When you click Yes to confirm, if you have any user-defined views, you will be asked whether you want to delete these as part of the restore process. Choose No to keep any user-defined views or Yes to delete these.


370

Change View File Name

When you name a view, the .av (view) file is created in the Autoview folder by default. This file uses the same name as the view, minus any spaces and special characters. You can rename the .av file independently of the view to ensure the file uses a different name from the one that displays in the Chart dropdown field.

To rename a view file:

1. Open your view > Select View > Set ID. 2. Enter a new name for the .av file. 3. Click OK.

Use Selector

When you open a view to plot data, there will often be more than one set of data that could be displayed on a chart. Consequently, Ascent will choose one by default. A selector is a dropdown field at the top of a chart that enables you to select the data you want to display in that chart. The list contains measurements (or locations, schedule entries, etc) that match the criteria you specify. This could be something like include in the selector list, all locations that have demodulation data. When you select an item in the navigator tree, the selector will create a list similar to the one below.

Using a selector


371

EG: Using Selector

To see an example of how selectors are used:

1. Choose a point that has several measurement locations (or select an entire machine or folder).

2. Select Chart > Vel+Demod to open the Vel+Demod view. Because this view targets measurement locations (axes) to decide which data to plot, the selectors will display. This is because there is more than one location to choose from.

3. Select a schedule entry — The selectors will disappear because there is only one target to choose from (the location containing this schedule entry).


372

Add Selector

To include a selector in a view, you must add the selector before adding the component it is attached to. You cannot add a selector directly to an existing report or chart. However, there are several ways of working around this. These solutions are described at the end of this topic.

The following method describes how to add a selector to an empty view or panel (i.e. a panel that does not already contain a component):

1. Open your custom view. 2. Choose Selector from the Select Auto View Component window.

NOTE: If this is not currently open, you will need to right-click and use one of the Set Component commands.

3. Choose the type of component that will display the data listed in the selector (e.g. a chart).

4. Right-click the empty panel > Select Create child component. 5. Select a component from the list or click the grey panel to open the

Select Auto View Component window and select a component. 6. Use the selector shortcut menu to tell the selector what type of data

to look for and where to look for it.

NOTE: The menu item 'Selector1' is the default name chosen for the first selector. If a selector has been created previously (by you or someone else) this name will be different e.g. 'Selector2'.

7. Right-click the component > Hover on Selector1 (Parent).

NOTE: This gives you options for choosing what the selector will choose. Move the mouse over each submenu item in turn, from Target downwards, to get an idea of how these options are used.

8. Choose a target for this part of the view — The target is the navigator item you want the selector to choose (e.g. machine, point, schedule entry, etc). When you click a navigator item, the selector will list all the targets under this item.

EG: If you choose 'location' as your target, selecting a point will cause the selector to list all the locations at this point that contain the data that you have chosen to display in your chart or report. If you select a machine, the selector will list all locations on this machine. Selecting a folder will list all locations in this folder.


373

9. Restrict the data listed in the selector by choosing items in the axis, units, and domain submenus.

EG: You can right-click and select Selector1 (Parent) > Restrict to units > Acceleration. This will force the selector to only list schedule entries that specify acceleration data.

10. Right-click > Select Selector1 (Parent) > Select by default to set the default data for this component > Select the required menu item — The default specifies which data from all the available targets is displayed in your chart or report (until you make a selection in the selector). The default item becomes the first item listed in the selector.

EG: An example is to set the target to schedule entry, and the default to 'Worst alarm state'. When you select a folder/machine/point/location, all schedule entries that belong to it will be listed in the selector. The schedule entry with the worst alarm state will be selected by default (i.e. this schedule entry is listed first in the selector, and the displayed chart or report will show data from this schedule entry).

11. Select an item in the navigator when your selector is complete to test it.

12. Use the Previous and Next buttons or press the keyboard spacebar to jump from one target to the next in navigator tree.

NOTE: By default, machines and points display in the navigator tree in the order in which they are created. You can change the default order by selecting Screen > Sort Navigator by Alarms or Screen > Sort Tree Alphabetically. When you choose the default target for the selector, the first and last default target options refer to the position of the target in its default order. If the navigator tree has been reordered, the position of the first and last targets might change from their original creation order. This means the selector might choose different first or last targets to those you expect.


374

Add Selector to Existing Chart or Report

To add a selector to an existing view, you can split the view, thereby creating an empty space in which to place the selector and component. Alternatively, if you don't want to change the layout of your view, you can use the copy and paste functions to remove and then replace a component once you have added a selector. Copy holds the component in memory so you can delete it from a view without permanently removing it. After adding a selector, paste puts the component back into its original place. This technique is recommended if you have spent a lot of time customizing a chart or report and do not wish to recreate it.

To add a selector to an existing chart or report:

1. Open your custom view. 2. Right-click the component you wish to add a selector to > Select

Component Functions > Copy Component — This saves the component temporarily so you can retrieve it later.

3. Right-click the component > Select Component Functions > Delete to delete the component.

NOTE: If the view contained only one component, e.g. a single chart, you will now have an empty view. If there was more than one component, the remaining components will now expand to fill the whole screen. In this case you will have to resplit the view to create space for the selector.

4. Right-click > Select Component Functions > Split Top-Bottom (or Left-Right) to split the screen (if required).

5. Right-click the panel > Select one of the Set Component options (top, bottom, left, or right) > Choose Selector from the Select Auto View Component window.

6. Ensure your selector is in place. 7. Paste the deleted component back into position. 8. Right-click the panel under the selector > Select Component

Functions > Paste Component.

NOTE: The selector can now be customized as described earlier in this topic.


375

Assign Priority and Target

When you create a view you can control how it behaves in the view system. For example, you can specify which data types the view applies to and whether your view will be opened as the default action when you double-click an item to plot data.

Each view that displays in the Chart dropdown field is assigned a priority value. When you double-click an item in the navigator, if several views could be used to plot the data, the view with the highest priority will be used by default. For example, double-clicking a frequency domain measurement will open a spectrum by default (rather than the SpecTrend or SpecStack views) as this view has the highest priority for frequency data.

To assign a priority and target:

1. Open your custom view. 2. Select View > Icon and Target. 3. Select the data types applicable to this view (i.e. time or frequency

domain data) and the navigator item(s), such as schedule entries, that will open this view when double-clicked.

4. Assign a priority value to this view — This can be any integer value (e.g. 20 or 150).

5. Select a target for this view — The target is the item the navigator will jump to when you use the Previous and Next buttons. For example, if you select Measurement Locations as the data type, clicking Next will take you to the next location in the navigator and plot the data at that location.

6. Select a menu icon — This will display in the Chart dropdown menu. 7. Click Save to finish.

TIP: To get a better idea of how to set the behaviour of your view, open one of the factory default views > Select View > Icon > Target. This will display the data types, priority, and target for that view.

NOTE: If you plot data using a view other than the default, you can open the default view by right-clicking the assigned target and selecting Open Default View.

NOTE: The Add, Edit, and Delete buttons are not currently used. They are included for future compatibility.


376

Assigning a priority and target


377

Design View Layout

A view may consist of a single chart or report, or it can be made up of several parts. When you create views that consist of more than one component, you will need to define a layout. This is so Ascent knows where you want your components placed. To create a layout you need to use Panels and Splitters as building blocks to divide the view into parts.

You can think of a panel as a blank canvas onto which you place displayable components (e.g. charts and reports). A splitter is used to split the panels into halves so more than one component can be displayed. The Waterfall Trend chart created in the walkthrough consisted of a single panel split in two. However, you can create views with as many parts as you like.

The following image demonstrates how you can build up a view by splitting a panel in two, adding a panel to each half, then splitting those panels and repeating the process.

You can split a panel left-to-right or top-to-bottom to organize the components of a view according to your requirements. When creating multi-part views, you might find it useful to first sketch out on paper where you would like the parts to be, and then use panels and splitters to create the view layout.


378

The process for creating a multi-part layout is as follows:

1. Open your empty view. 2. Add your first component to the view (e.g. a chart) — By default this

will fill the whole screen. An empty view already has a panel as its base so components can be placed directly onto it.

3. Create a space to add other components. 4. Split the base panel from left to right or top to bottom e.g. right-click

> Select Component Functions > Split Left-Right.

NOTE: Your first component will fill half the screen while the other half remains blank until a component is added to it. Nothing will display yet as no data is selected.

5. Set a component for the empty part of the screen i.e. click anywhere in the empty half to open the Select Auto View Component window.

6. Select the required component — This can be a displayable component such as a report, note, or chart, or another panel so you can split the layout again.

NOTE: You can further subdivide the view by adding and splitting panels to create a four-part view. Alternatively, you can split one panel to make a three-part view. The view can be as complex or simple as required. Components can be stacked on top of each other. For example, you can have a base panel containing several components. If you delete the bottom panel, this will also delete all the components on top of it.

7. Right-click a component, select Component Functions > Delete to delete it.


379

How Parts of a View Fit Together

This topic examines the way the parts of a view fit together. Once you are familiar with this, you can explore the options for manipulating a layout,

To learn more about how the parts of a view fit together:

1. Select the Chart button > Open the SpecTrend view. 2. Right-click the spectrum to open the chart shortcut menu:

TIP: Ensure you do NOT right-click a special item such as an alarm band or note as this will open a special menu item.

• Halfway down you will see the relevant menu items: • The Component Functions menu item contains a submenu of

options for working directly with a component.

TIP: You can right-click a component in a view to access this menu directly.

• The Splitter1 (Parent) submenu contains two child components (the spectrum and trend charts). Its submenu contains commands for placing child components within the splitter. The Splitter1 (Parent) submenu contains its own Component Functions item for working with the splitter component (e.g. copy, rename, or delete the splitter. Splitting a splitter component will resize it to only fill half of the space. This creates an empty area for you to add new components.

3. Select Splitter1 (Parent) > Component Functions > Split Left-Right to split a splitter so you can see the effect — You can undo this split when you close the view by clicking No when you are prompted to save changes to the view.

NOTE: If you delete a splitter, any child components will also be deleted. This is because they are contained in the splitter.

NOTE: SpecTrend (Parent) is the name of the view. All the components (trend chart, spectrum and splitter) are contained within this parent. Its submenu contains commands for working with the view as a whole (for example, setting its target or updating and saving the view). The SpecTrend (Parent) submenu contains its own Component Functions item so that you can rename the view or add more components.


380

4. Select Design from this submenu.

NOTE: Design mode shows you the underlying structure of a view. You can create your views in Design mode if required, as all the right-click menus are available here. Design mode is useful if you are making changes to a complex view. This is because it shows you how the view has been put together (what components are contained within others).

5. Switch off Design mode. 6. Right-click the spectrum > Select SpecTrend (Parent) > Design.

How parts of a view fit together


381

Change Layout

You can access the commands for manipulating a component by selecting that component (e.g. delete, copy, split, etc), and selecting Component Functions.

When you add components to a view, Ascent assigns them a default name (e.g. Splitter1, Selector1, Panel1, etc). The instructions in this topic use the default names. These may differ from what you see on your computer.

NOTE: Several items in the Component Functions submenu are included for the purpose of backward compatibility. They will only be visible when other options are selected first. In previous versions of Ascent, the options 'Set Alignment', 'Set Size', and 'Set Position' were used to create the layout of a view. Splitters are now used in place of these positioning options.

Add New Component

To add a new component to a view, you must first split the view to create an empty space to place your component in. To add a new component:

1. Right-click the component you wish to split > Select Component Functions > Split Left-Right (or Top-Bottom).

2. Right-click the empty panel > Select the appropriate Set Component option (left, right, top, or bottom) > Select the component you wish to add.

Swap Positions of Two Components

When there are two components on the same split panel (e.g. two charts stacked one above the other) you can swap their positions around. To do this, right-click one of the components > Select Splitter1 (Parent) > Switch.

You cannot select a component directly and use the switch command because both components are contained 'in Splitter1'. Consequently they must be accessed through this component.


382

Rename Component

If you are building multi-part views that contain several panels, splitters, and selectors etc, you might want to rename these components so you can identify them more easily. Once you have renamed a component, when you right-click it, the new name will display in the menu instead of the default name.

To rename a component:

1. Right-click it > Select Component Functions > Rename. 2. Enter a new name. 3. Click OK.

Resize Component

You can resize sections of a multi-part view. To do this:

1. Move the cursor over a separating border until the cursor becomes a double-headed arrow.

2. Drag the cursor up-down or left-right.

Using cursors to resize a component

Unsplit View (Delete Component)

If you have split a panel but not yet added any components you can unsplit it. If components have already been added, remove the one you don't want. Deleting a component removes the split. The remaining component will expand to fill the space.

To unsplit a panel:

1. Right-click the empty part (grey area) > Select Unsplit. 2. Right-click a component, select Component Functions > Delete to

delete it.

Delete View

To delete a view, open the view > Select View > Delete.

Section 10 — Use Machine Builder Wizard

383



Introduction

The Machine Builder wizard automates the process of building machines by stepping you through the machine setup process and creating appropriate points, locations, schedule entries, and alarms based on the information you supply.

The wizard implements several ISO standard alarms for assessing overall RMS levels and The Proven Method from Technical Associates of Charlotte, P.C. The Proven Method defines up to six power band alarms per point for your machine. This is based on machine classification, rotational speed, number of gear teeth and blades, etc.

Whichever alarm standard you use, the process is essentially the same. You will specify the type of machine to build, then the alarms will be built for you. The ISO standards require less detailed information. However, the alarm bands generated are overall alarm bands only. The Proven Method requires more detailed information about the machine. It also generates more detailed alarm bands targeted at specific components of the machine.

The rest of this section provides a walkthrough of how to use the Machine Builder wizard. We will use The Proven Method to create power band alarms that will be used to monitor a direct-coupled pump.


384

Walkthrough — The Proven Method

The following image shows the direct-coupled pump we will be monitoring.

Direct-coupled pump

To monitor a direct-coupled pump:

1. Click the Build button or select Alarms > TA & ISO Alarm Creator — The Machine Builder wizard is presented in the form of HTML-style documents. You can click the blue underlined ISO standard or Proven Method links to access a walkthrough of the setup process for creating machines with predefined alarms and alarm thresholds.

2. Click the Manual Build Mode link to create your own machines and alarms and exit the Machine Builder wizard — This opens a machine placeholder structure in the navigator tree, enabling you to manually set up your machines, points, and locations.

MORE: See Creating Machines Using Build Mode.

3. Select the measurements units you wish to use. 4. Click the Set Wizards link at the bottom of the screen. Use in/sec 0-

pk and CPM for this walkthrough. 5. Select other units from the dropdown fields (if required) > Click Set

these units. 6. Click the Return to index link to redisplay the Machine Builder

wizard screen. 7. Click the The Proven Method 4th Edition link to continue.


385

Machine Builder wizard

Selecting the required measurement units


386

Overall Condition Rating

The first step in The Proven Method is to determine an overall condition rating for the machine. This gives overall vibration levels for GOOD, FAIR, and ALARM operation that will be broken down into individual alarm bands in the next section.

You can press F11 to toggle full-screen mode. You can make the forms fill the entire screen or return the screen to normal size.

Establishing the overall condition rating for a machine


387

Select Overall Condition Rating

To select an overall condition rating:

1. Examine the list of machine types to find one that best describes your machine.

2. Examine the GOOD, FAIR, and ALARM thresholds listed for this machine.

3. Select this machine and continue if the thresholds appear suitable for the machine you are monitoring.

NOTE: If the thresholds are NOT suitable, adjust them before proceeding.

4. Enter a value in the All ratings are currently % higher than normal field to adjust the alarm thresholds to use higher (or lower) values.

5. Click Update — This will reset all values in the table. 6. Set the overall condition manually if you cannot find a machine type

that matches yours. 7. Enter your values in the Manual Entry fields at the bottom of the

page to set the manual thresholds > Click GO.

NOTE: The remaining steps in The Proven Method will be the same regardless of the overall condition rating you select. The machine type you select specifies numerical values that are substituted into behind-the-scenes equations in the next stage.

8. The selection that best describes our machine is General Purpose Horizontal Pump – Direct Coupled (under Centrifugal Pumps in the machine list).

9. Click this link to continue.

Selecting the overall condition rating


388

Select Cases

The machine you selected, along with its alarm thresholds, is displayed at the top of the screen. At this stage you are given a selection of cases. Each case will create different alarm band setups suited to the machine component they describe. Almost all machines will have Case A or Case B measurements on the bearing housings. The remaining cases are for more specialized measurements.

You know the number of vanes on the pump (8), so you will use CASE G TYPE 1 on the pump bearings.

The motor is an AC Induction Motor so you will use cases E and F on the motor itself.

If you wanted to monitor a simple bearing point, you would use Case A or B. Case G incorporates information for the bearing, so you will not need to use Case A or B in this example.

Selecting cases


389

Case G Type 1

This case provides an example of a driven centrifugal component with a known number of vanes (or blades) and rolling element bearings.

1. Click the CASE G type 1 link.

2. Select all the checkboxes at the top right of the form to apply all alarm levels.

3. Enter the following information in the form: • Typical machine RPM — 3000. • Number of blades — 8. • The bearings are ball bearings — All other bearing types.


390

4. Click Continue — Ascent performs all calculations defined in the Proven Method to give you specific alarm bands for this measurement point. The results of the calculations are summarized in a table at the bottom of the screen (you will need to scroll down to see this).

NOTE: This step would normally take several minutes to complete if you were using The Proven Method document manually with a calculator, pen, and paper.

Calculation results

NOTE: You can now apply the alarm bands to an existing machine or create a new machine and point. To use a point on an existing machine, you will need to select it in the navigator before you fill out the form. For the purposes of this walkthrough, you will need to create a new machine to apply the alarm bands to apply to. You may need to scroll down to see the lower part of the form.


391

5. Enter Pump #3 in the first blank field. 6. Click Create Machine — This machine displays in the navigator tree. 7. Change the default point name from Bearing Housing to Pump

Inboard. 8. Leave the checkbox ticked to create this new point. 9. Leave the Speed field empty — This will create a new point with the

same default speed as the machine. I.e. it will use a point multiplier of 1. If you enter a new point speed, a point multiplier will be calculated and applied to the new point or all points on the machine.

MORE: See Applying Different Rotational Speeds Across a Machine to learn about point multipliers.

10. Leave the checkboxes ticked for Step 3 on the form to create horizontal, vertical, and axial locations at this point.

11. Click Create Alarm & Measurement.


392

Example of navigator tree when you create the alarm and measurement

12. Create a second point using the same settings. 13. Change the point name to Pump Outboard in the Machine Builder

wizard. 14. Click Create Alarm & Measurement again.

Example of navigator tree when you recreate the alarm and measurement


393

Cases E and F

These two cases define special measurements to detect problems specific to AC induction motors.

1. Click the Return to Case selection link at the bottom of the Machine Builder wizard form to return to the Case Selection screen.

2. Click the CASE E link under AC Induction Motors.

NOTE: Case E requires no specific information to create its alarm bands. The alarm level choice does not affect the alarm thresholds, It only determines the kind of alarm raised (Warning, Alert or Danger) when these fixed thresholds are exceeded.

3. Leave the Alarm Type as Alert. 4. Click Continue — The Machine Builder wizard is now ready to create

alarm bands and schedule entries on your machine. This measurement should be taken on the Outboard Bearing, Horizontal point as indicated on the form.


394

5. Select Pump #3 in the navigator — You are going to add these alarm bands to the same machine.

6. For Step 2, change the point name to Motor Outboard. 7. Click Create Alarm & Measurement — This will create a new point

for Pump #3 called Motor Outboard. 8. Click the Return to Case Selection link. 9. Click the CASE F link under AC Induction Motors — You are prompted

to enter information to create alarms for the inboard bearing.

10. Enter the electrical AC line frequency as 50 Hz. 11. Leave the Alarm Type as Alert. 12. Click Continue — Ascent is now ready to generate alarm bands and

measurements.


395

13. Select Pump #3 in the navigator — You are going to add these alarm bands to the same machine.

14. Change the point name to Motor Inboard. 15. Click Create Alarm & Measurement. 16. Click the Return to Case selection link at the bottom of the Machine

Builder wizard form to return to the Case Selection screen.

Example of navigator tree when you create the alarm and measurement


396

Case A

The Case E and F measurements do not look for bearing problems. For this we will use Case A, which deals with general rolling element bearing components without vanes.

1. Click the CASE A link under General Purpose — You are going to add these alarm bands and schedule entries to the Motor Inboard and Motor Outboard points that have already been created.

2. Leave the bearing type as ball bearing. 3. Click Continue. 4. Untick the Create a new Point checkbox. 5. Select the Motor Inboard point on the navigator tree. 6. Leave all settings as they are. 7. Click Create Alarm & Measurement. 8. Select the Motor Outboard point > Click this button again. 9. Click the Close button in the top right corner to close the Machine

Builder wizard. 10. Select one of the schedule entries in the navigator tree — The

associated alarm icons display in the navigator list.

NOTE: Now that the machine structure is complete, you can now create a route and send this folder to your instrument for data collection.

TIP: If this is a common machine type, we recommend you right-click the machine and add it to the library. This will enable you to retrieve and reuse the template in the future. See Storing Reusable Components in the Library, for more information.


397

Example of final machine structure (schedule entries not shown)

Example of alarm icons displaying on the navigator tree

Section 11 — Statistical Alarms

398



Statistical Alarm Overview

ISO standards and The Proven Method provide excellent starting points for setting alarm thresholds. However, once you have a history of data for your machines, or data on many similar machines, you can use statistical analysis of that data to generate new alarm thresholds that are tailored specifically for those machines.

Statistically derived alarms take the specific vibratory characteristics of your machines into account. They provide more reliable and accurate alarms that will trigger when a machine is vibrating more than normal. You can generate statistical alarms for envelopes, peak bands, and power bands. Once you have collected a reasonable amount of data (6-12 surveys) you can fine-tune your existing alarm thresholds using statistical analysis. You can use a history of data to generate some statistics, or run statistics across a family of similar machines.

MORE: See Machine Families.

The following example shows how you can use statistically derived alarms to fine-tune existing alarm thresholds on a machine. This machine uses several power band alarms created with The Proven Method.


399

Combined spectrum and trend chart of the machine before statistics are applied.


400

The bottom trend plot suggests all except one of the alarms have their thresholds set too high. The alarm trends are on the zero axis. You cannot see them without zooming. The one visible alarm possibly has its thresholds set too low as this alarm has already reached Warning level.

Same machine after the statistics are used

The alarm thresholds have been reset to levels that are more accurate for this machine. I.e. the alarms will now trigger if there is any significant increase in vibration.


401

Ascent comes with a number of predefined statistical alarms that you can apply to your data. If you want to use the predefined statistical alarms, and you do not intend to create your own alarms, you do not need to read the entire section. The following list of topics includes the minimum reading necessary to get you started (we recommend you read the rest of the section once you are comfortable with using the predefined statistical alarms):

• What are Generation Parameters — How Ascent creates statistical alarms.

• Applying Predefined Alarms — How to apply predefined alarms to your machines.

• Redefining Thresholds for Existing Alarms — How to generate new thresholds for existing alarms.

• Updating Alarm Thresholds — How to create more accurate and reliable alarm thresholds.

If you intend to create your own statistical alarms, or make adjustments to the predefined ones, you will need to read the entire section. This will give you a thorough understanding of:

• How alarm thresholds are created and adjusted. • The mathematical processes involved. • The data needed to make statistical threshold calculations.


402

Generation Parameters

When you create a statistical alarm, Ascent needs to know what:

• Type of alarm to create — Envelope or band. • Amplitudes to set for the alarm thresholds.

This information is provided in the Generation Parameters used to create the alarm. Generation parameters are statistical alarm templates that specify which settings will be used to generate statistical alarms for your machines.

For example, a set of generation parameters might specify that the:

• Alarm created will be a band alarm. • Alarm thresholds will be calculated using a history of collected

data. • Thresholds will be set for Warning, Alert, and Danger.

The system-defined generation parameters included in Ascent are based on standards from ISO and the Technical Associates of Charlotte, P.C. These provide excellent starting points for setting up your statistical alarms. You can use them to create alarms for machines that do not yet have alarms set up, or to redefine thresholds for your existing alarms to make them more accurate.

Window showing a selection of predefined generation parameters


403

Apply Predefined Alarms

You will need to create some alarms before statistical alarm thresholds can be calculated for your data. If you have a machine with no alarms, or a machine with alarms that aren't working effectively, you can use the Alarm wizard to create new alarms.

The Alarm wizard is an alarm management tool you can use to create statistically derived alarms quickly and easily. To do this: 1. Select a machine to create the alarms for. 2. Select a set of predefined generation parameters to apply — These

specify the alarm type (band or envelope) and alarm thresholds to create.

3. Select the schedule entries you wish to apply the alarm to. 4. Specify a frequency range for the band alarms. 5. Click OK — The wizard analyzes your data and builds the alarms at

each schedule entry you have chosen.

TIP: If you are going to use the Alarm wizard to build new alarms, envelope alarms are the most effective type to create. If you want more detailed band alarms with predefined frequency ranges, use The Proven Method to create appropriate bands before redefining their thresholds using statistics (see Redefining Thresholds for Existing Alarms).


404

Create and Apply Alarms

To create and apply alarms:

1. Select the machine that you wish to build alarms on. 2. Click the Alarms button to open the Alarm wizard — Any existing

alarms display in this window.

Alarm wizard showing existing alarms

3. Select any existing alarms you wish to remove > Click Delete. 4. Click OK to confirm the deletion. 5. Select the Tasks tab to return to the main screen. 6. Click Add to create your new alarms.

7. Click the browse button to open the Alarm Templates window.

Alarm Templates window


405

8. Highlight the generation parameter set you wish to assign to these alarms.

TIP: The descriptive names should help you decide which generation parameters are most suitable.

9. Click Select to open the Alarm Creator window.

Alarm Creator window

10. Tick the schedule entry checkboxes you wish to apply the alarms to.

NOTE: If you are creating peak or power band alarms you will need to manually set the frequency range for these alarms.

11. Select the Alarm Band Frequency Range tab. 12. Enter the start and stop frequency values.


406

13. Click OK to create the new alarms — Your data is analyzed. The generation parameters you selected are used to create the thresholds for these new alarms. The Alarm Summary window displays the results of the generation process: • OK — Indicates new thresholds were generated. • Black exclamation ! mark — Indicates thresholds were

generated, however a minimal amount of data was used (the Warn if less than value has not been reached).

• Warn if less than value — Refers to the number of vibration recordings used as source data for statistical calculations.

• Red exclamation ! mark — Thresholds were NOT generated. Either there was not enough data or another error occurred.

NOTE: The furthest column on the right contains more information about the generation process. For example, you might find information about how many outliers were rejected and whether there were any suspicious recordings.

Alarm Summary window displaying results of generation process

14. Select the Source Data tab to access a more detailed breakdown of the data values used in the generation process.

NOTE: In the expanded navigator tree, calculated unit values display in your preferred units. This is based on the unit preferences currently configured in Ascent (under Options > Unit Preferences), the units of the template, and the alarm band units.


407

Using the Source Data tab to access more information

15. Click OK to save these new thresholds — Ascent creates the alarms and writes the new thresholds to the database.

NOTE: If you click Cancel, the alarms will not be changed and you can try selecting a different set of generation parameters to fine-tune the thresholds before generating them.


408

Redefine Thresholds for Existing Alarms

When you apply generation parameters to existing alarms, their thresholds are recalculated using statistical analysis of your collected data. The generation parameters you select determine how the thresholds are calculated.

To redefine thresholds for existing alarms:

1. Select the folder, machine, point, location, or schedule entry containing the alarms.

2. Click the Alarms button to open the Alarm wizard — Create, update, and generate alarm thresholds on all the selected alarms at once.

Alarm wizard

3. Press SHIFT or CTRL while you select the alarms you wish to update thresholds for.

4. Click the Template button to open the Alarm Templates window — This window contains a list of currently defined alarm generation parameters. You can apply the parameters to this alarm and later include your own parameters. If there are no suitable alarm generation parameters for these alarms None will display.


409

Alarm Templates window

5. Select the appropriate generation parameter set.

TIP: The descriptive names should help you decide which generation parameters are most appropriate.

6. Click Select — The Alarm Summary window displays the new alarm information. An icon beside each row in the threshold summary shows whether new thresholds were generated successfully for each alarm: • OK — Indicates new thresholds were generated. • Black exclamation ! mark — Indicates thresholds were

generated, however a minimal amount of data was used (the Warn if less than value has not been reached).

• Warn if less than value — Refers to the number of vibration recordings used as source data for statistical calculations.

• Red exclamation ! mark — Thresholds were NOT generated. Either there was not enough data or another error occurred.

NOTE: The furthest column on the right contains more information about the generation process. For example, you might find information about how many outliers were rejected and whether there were any suspicious recordings.

NOTE: The suitability of generation parameters is based on the type of alarm. For example, if you select a band alarm, the generation parameters will be hidden.


410

Alarm Summary window

7. Click the Source Data tab to access a more detailed breakdown of the data values used in the generation process.

NOTE: In the expanded navigator tree, calculated unit values display in your preferred units. This is based on the unit preferences currently configured in Ascent (under Options > Unit Preferences), the template units, and the alarm band units.

8. Click OK to save these new thresholds — Ascent writes the new thresholds to the database.

NOTE: If you click Cancel, the alarms will not be changed. You can select a different set of generation parameters to fine-tune the thresholds before generating these.

Redefine Thresholds for Single Alarm

To update a single alarm using statistics:

1. Double-click a recording to display the alarm on a chart. 2. Right-click the alarm on the chart > Select Update Thresholds. 3. Select the appropriate generation parameter set > Click Select. 4. Click OK to save the new thresholds or Cancel to discard them.


411

Update Alarm Thresholds

The accuracy of statistically generated alarm thresholds is largely determined by the number of recordings used. A larger number of recordings will provide a more accurate estimate of the mean and standard deviation. As you collect a history of data, we recommend you update your alarms periodically (e.g. every 6-12 surveys) so that reliable alarm thresholds can be established. Whenever thresholds are updated, statistical outliers will be rejected during the update.

When you update alarms, Ascent uses all recordings available at that time to generate statistics. It then perform calculations on these to determine new thresholds. The number of recordings used and the locations from which they are sourced are determined by the settings of the alarm generation parameters you selected when you created the alarms.

You can update several alarms at once. Doing so will generate new thresholds based on the generation parameters assigned to each alarm.

To update alarms:

1. Click Alarms to open the Alarm wizard. 2. Use the menu to select the alarms you wish to update.

TIP: Press SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple alarms.

3. Select Alarms > Update alarm from template — The Alarm Summary window displays, showing you whether the new thresholds were generated successfully for each alarm and what the new thresholds are.

4. Click OK if you wish to save these new thresholds.

NOTE: If you click Cancel the alarms will not be changed and you can try editing the generation parameters to fine-tune the thresholds before updating again.


412

Update Thresholds for Single Alarm

To update a single alarm;

1. Double-click a recording to display the alarm on a chart. 2. Right-click the alarm on the chart > Select Update Thresholds. 3. Click OK when the Alarm Summary window opens if you wish to

save the new thresholds.

Apply Statistics to Alarms

To generate statistical alarms, Ascent applies statistical calculations to your data (vibration recordings) and uses the end results to set the alarm thresholds:

1. Given a set of data, Ascent calculates the mean and standard deviation values.

2. It then sets alarm levels at mean plus a number of standard deviations above the averaged spectrum so only outlying data values (higher than normal amplitudes) will trigger an alarm: • For envelope alarms this involves calculating the mean and

standard deviation of each frequency in each spectrum. • For peak and power alarms this involves calculating the mean

and standard deviation of the Peak or Power value within the alarm's frequency range for each recording.

When calculating the mean for a sample of recordings: • For envelope alarms, the mean = the average value of each

frequency. • For power band alarms, the mean = the average value of the

power in that band. • For peak band alarms, the mean = the average value of the

highest amplitude in that band.

NOTE: If there are less than 25 vibration recordings in your sample, Ascent will use the (n -1) denominator in the standard deviation calculation. This provides a standard deviation estimate of the population from a sample. This is the standard employed by the American Society of Quality Control. If there are 25 or more vibration recordings, the (n) denominator is used.

If the measurements are distributed normally along a bell curve, 99% of the data values will fall within mean plus or minus three standard deviations. This is regarded as the normal level of vibration.


413

If you set your alarm levels at mean plus three standard deviations, you would expect less than 1% of normal data to trigger an alarm. However, unusually large data values (those higher than mean plus three standard deviations) will trigger the alarm.

Statistical Outliers

Statistical outliers are data values that are much larger or smaller than the mean value.

NOTE: Spectral points that exhibit unusually high or low levels of vibration are classified as outliers.

Ascent detects any statistical outliers in your data and excludes them from its calculations. This reduces the likelihood of false or non-triggered alarms.

Outlier Detection and Suspicious Recordings

Ascent uses the Median Absolute Deviation (MAD) method to automatically identify statistical outliers. Values that are more than 3.5 estimated standard deviations from the estimated mean are rejected from the calculations. For peak and power bands, this means the entire recording is rejected (because each recording only produces one value).

You can change the default value of 3.5 estimated standard deviations to control how much outlier removal is used. You can access this option from the Statistics Option tab.

Suspicious Recordings (envelopes only)

When generating envelope alarms, a data point which is an outlier does not cause the entire measurement to being rejected. If Ascent finds that more than 25% of the data points from a recording have been rejected, it regards that recording as suspicious. This is just a flag on the recording. It does not affect the processing. We recommend you mark this recording as bad quality if you think it is an unsuitable measurement. This will ensure all its values are excluded from the statistics.


414

To flag a recording's data quality as bad:

1. Right-click the recording in the navigator list > Select Edit. 2. Select Inspected and Rejected, Quality Bad in the Data Quality

dropdown field. 3. Click OK.

Specifying the quality of a recording

Outlier measurements are shown on trend charts using X markers. Here are the default colors for these X markers:

NOTE: These use the color scheme as described in Schemes.

• Black — The measurement was not included in statistics because its data quality is set to Bad or the measurement did not meet criteria (RPM out of range, not a baseline, data doesn't match, etc) if you are using Statistics by History.

• Red (alarm band trending only) — The measurement was identified as an outlier.

• Dark pink (envelope trending only) — This indicates that more than 25% of the points on the envelope were rejected, making the recording is suspicious.

The following example shows an alarm band that has been updated using statistics. Red crosses mark three measurements that were rejected as outliers. A black cross marks one measurement that was rejected because its data quality flag was set to bad.


415

Example of alarm band updated using statistics

Here is an example of an envelope trend where the last measurement was considered suspicious because more than 25% of its values were rejected.

Envelope trend showing suspicious measurement

Once statistics have been generated, you can get this information in detail from the Source Data tab of the Alarm Summary window.


416

Using the Source tab to access statistics

Statistical Alarm Setup

Statistical alarm thresholds are created by defining generation parameters. Ascent uses this setup information in its statistical calculations.

The generation parameters used with an alarm are permanently associated with that alarm. You can update the alarm at any stage using the same parameters with any new data that might be available. As with parameter sets, you can use a single set of generation parameters on several machines.

You will need to create alarms before you can calculate statistical alarm thresholds for your data. There are different ways to create new alarms. You can:

• Manually create alarms directly on charts — See Using Alarms. • Use the Machine Builder wizard to define the alarms and

measurements using The Proven Method or an ISO standard. • Use the Alarm wizard to create alarms, select generation

parameters, and generate thresholds for these new alarms.


417

Alarm Wizard

You can use the Alarm wizard to create, update, and generate alarm thresholds on all selected items at once. To access these options:

1. Click the Alarms button to open the Alarm wizard. 2. Select the required option:

• Add — Open the Alarm Creator window where you can set the alarm frequency range and access alarm templates and generation parameters.

• Edit — Edit and update individually selected alarms. • Delete — Delete the selected alarm(s). • Template — Open the Alarm Templates window where you can

add or edit the generation parameters associated with the selected alarms.

The next few topics will walk you through each of the alarm setup screens and describe the settings and information you need to supply so Ascent can generate alarms for you.

NOTE: As you explore the Alarm wizard, some parts of the screens will be hidden and will only become visible when you select options or enter information. The instructions will tell you when you need to perform an action.

Using the Alarm wizard


418

General Settings

To specify the general settings for alarms:

1. Click Alarms to open the Alarm wizard. 2. Select Templates > Edit all templates. 3. Click Add. 4. Use the General Settings tab to specify the basic information for

your alarm generation parameters. • Description — This is a unique name you supply for this set of

generation parameters. Before you proceed, enter a name in this field.

NOTE: You will be prompted for a name later if you do not enter one now.

• These generation parameters are for Envelopes (Narrowband Alarms) — Tick this checkbox to specify that you are creating an envelope alarm. Doing so will display the Envelope Options tab in the Threshold editor.

• Use history at each location for statistics — Tick this checkbox to have historical data at each measurement location used to generate mean and standard deviation values. Doing so will display the History Options tab.

Select options to make relevant information tabs display

• Use measurements on other machines in same family for statistics — Tick this checkbox to have measurements at other machines in the same family used for statistics as well. Doing so displays the Family Options tab. You can use historical and family measurements for statistics if required.

NOTE: If statistics are not being used (neither the history nor family is selected for statistics), you can specify absolute alarm levels only (e.g. for ISO 2372 alarm bands).


419

• Maximum RPM difference — When you create a new alarm or update the thresholds, Ascent finds the RPM of the most recent measurement. When you look through the history and family for more measurements, it only uses measurements within this number of RPM from the most recent value. This RPM value is static and will not change until you update the alarm.

• Only consider baseline measurements — Select this option if you wish to set up one of these special case scenarios:

• Used in conjunction with Use history at each location for statistics — If the history limit is set to 1 (on the History Options tab), you can base the alarms on the most recent baseline at each location.

• Used in conjunction with Use measurements on other machines in same family for statistics — If this option is also selected, statistics are generated using the baseline measurements across the machine family.

• With only one data value (the most recent baseline), the standard deviation is calculated to be zero.

However, you can use the other threshold defining attributes, such as Percentage offset from Mean and the Minimum and Maximum values to allow alarms to be specified at a relative or absolute level, based on the baseline at each location.

History Options

The History Options tab displays when you select Use history at each location for statistics. To access history options:

1. Select the History Options tab on the General Settings tab if History Options is not visible.

2. Tick Maximum number of historical measurements to use (at each Schedule Entry) to specify a limit on how many historical recordings will be used. If this is set to 1, the statistics will be based on the most recent recording at each location or the baseline recording if Only consider Baseline measurements is selected on the General Settings tab.

3. Enter a value in this field. 4. Tick Only consider history since most recent baseline if you only

want Ascent to go as far back in the history as the most recent baseline recording.


420

Family Options

The Family Options tab displays when you select Use measurements on other machines in same family for statistics on the General Settings tab.

The following options are available for the Family Options tab: • Group data by axis — Select this option to generate alarms

using data gathered from axes of the same name in a machine family (e.g. all recordings taken on the horizontal axis).

• Group data by point — Select this option to generate alarms using data gathered from points in a machine family that have the same name (e.g. all recordings taken on the Drive End point).

If you select both options, when you collect data for statistical analysis of a particular point on a family of machines, the recordings from axes and points with the same names will be grouped together. I.e. all machines in the family will have their Drive End – horizontal alarms created/updated based on the Drive End – horizontal readings of all the other machines in that family only.

The following table summarizes how Ascent gathers data depending on the options selected. In the following example, the alarm threshold is being generated for Point 1 - horizontal on Machine 1.

MORE: See Machine Families to learn how to create machine families and categorize machines into families.


421

History Family Family

group by point

Family

group by axis

Family

group by point and

axis

Machine 1

Point 1

(alarm) H X X X X X

V X X

Point 2

H X X

V X

Machine 2

Point 1

H X X X X

V X X

Point 2

H X X

V X


422

Thresholds

You can use the Thresholds tab to define your threshold levels for each alarm. To do this:

1. Select the Thresholds tab at the top of the window — The values displayed here are entered using the Threshold editor.

2. Click the arrow beside the Threshold units dropdown field > Select the type of alarm band you wish to create from the list of amplitude units, measurement units, and scaling type (0-pk, pk-pk, rms). The amplitude units you choose must match those of the alarm you are updating or creating. However, the measurement units and scaling type do not have to match.

3. Click Add to open the Threshold editor — This is where you will enter the values displayed on the Thresholds tab.

Using the Thresholds tab


423

Threshold editor

View of Thresholds window once values have been entered in the editor

If you are using statistics (history or family is selected for statistics on the General Settings tab), the Threshold Editor window will contain fields that enable you to calculate a statistical threshold. If you are NOT using statistics, the Threshold editor will contain fields that enable you to specify absolute alarm thresholds. You only need to enter the Alarm Type and Min Value (see the following list of definitions).

This alarm threshold calculation is:

mean + (a number of standard deviations + percentage of mean)

Typically when generating alarm envelopes, you would use mean + 3 standard deviations.

Here are some typical formulae for peak and power band alarms: • A level 1 alarm (Alert) = mean + 2 standard deviations. • A level 2 alarm (Danger) = 1.5 times the level 1 setting (50%

above mean + 3 standard deviations).


424

You can specify min/max values to limit the threshold determined by Ascent:

• Min/max delta limits the part of the calculation enclosed in brackets.

• Min/max value limits the final result (add the mean to the delta).

The following fields are available on this screen:

NOTE: Some of these fields are optional.

• Select the type of alarm that will be raised (required) — This type of alarm will be raised when the threshold is exceeded (warning, alert, etc). The alarm type you choose must match the alarm type you are creating or updating.

• Increase Mean by % (optional, set to zero if not required) — Specifies the percent amplitude the alarm threshold will be placed above the average spectrum (or average peak/power for band alarms). You can also specify negative percentages for those special cases where they may be needed. This value will display in the Percent Offset + field on the Thresholds tab.

• Factor to multiply the Standard Deviation by (optional, set to zero if not required) — Specifies the number of standard deviations to use. For example, entering 2 will multiply the standard deviation by 2 and add it to the mean. This value will display in the S.D Multiplier field on the Thresholds tab.

• Minimum Delta (optional, leave blank if not required) — Specifies the minimum difference between the mean and the alarm threshold. For example, if the Min Delta is set to 1 mm/s and the number of standard deviations + the percentage of mean value is less than 1 mm/s, it is increased to 1mm/s before being added to the mean to get the threshold value.

• Maximum Delta (optional - leave blank if not required) — Specifies the maximum difference between the mean and the alarm threshold. For example, if the Max Delta is set to 1 mm/s and the number of standard deviations + the percentage of mean value is more than 1 mm/s, it is reduced to 1mm/s before being added to the mean to get the threshold value.


425

• Minimum (optional, leave blank if not required) — Specifies a minimum amplitude for this alarm threshold to ensure it will not be set to a very low value (thereby causing false alarms). If the final threshold value calculated by Ascent is lower than the minimum value, the threshold is set equal to this value. This value is displayed in the Min Value field on the Thresholds tab.

• Maximum (Not To Exceed) (optional, leave blank if not required) — Specifies a maximum amplitude for this alarm threshold to ensure it will not be set to a very high value. If the final threshold value calculated by Ascent is higher than this value, the threshold is set equal to this value. This value is displayed in the Max Value field on the Thresholds tab.


426

Envelope Options

The Envelope Options tab displays in the Threshold editor when you select These generation parameters can be used for Envelopes under the General Settings tab.

To access the envelope options:

1. Select the Envelope Options tab — You can use the following options to specify the width of the envelope around peaks in the statistically averaged spectrum. If you select more than one of these options, the greatest width determined by the options will be used at each point (spectral line) in the envelope: • Hz — Specifies a frequency at which the envelope will be placed

either side of a peak. For example, a value of 6 Hz will generate an envelope 3 Hz either side of each peak.

• Lines — Specifies the number of spectral lines between the envelope and each peak in the spectrum. For example, a value of 10 will generate an envelope five lines either side of each peak. We recommend this option for machines that run at or near the same speed from one recording to the next.

• Percentage of frequency — Specifies the frequency percentage at which the envelope will be placed either side of a peak. For example, a value of 10% around a peak at 2000 CPM will place the envelope 5% either side of the peak at 1900 CPM and 2100 CPM. At higher frequencies on the same spectrum, the envelope will become much wider, for example at 60 000 CPM, the envelope will extend 3000 CPM either side. We recommend this option for machines that run at variable speeds or whose RPM varies significantly from one recording to the next.

• Lines (number to ignore) — Specifies the number of spectral lines that will be ignored at the beginning of the spectrum. I.e. the envelope will be drawn around all frequencies except the first few lines. This helps avoid false alarms caused by the ski slope shape often found at the low frequency end of spectra.

2. Enter values in the first three fields. 3. Click OK to return to the Thresholds tab.


427

Accessing envelope options


428

Statistics Options

The Statistics Options tab displays when you select Use history at each location for statistics and/or Use measurements on other machines in same family for statistics on the General Settings tab.

The following options are available when you select the statistics options:

• Use the Peak value of measurements instead of the Mean — If you select this option, Ascent will use the peak value of the data instead of the mean for all calculations. If you use the peak (highest amplitude value) instead of the mean (average value), a higher threshold will be set. This option is typically used for envelope alarms.

• Minimum number of samples required for statistics — New thresholds will not be generated if this number of samples is not available.

• Warn if less than — A black exclamation ! mark displays on the Alarm Summary window after generating thresholds to indicate the Warn if less than value has not been reached. When you save the thresholds, Ascent warns you that a minimal amount of data used.

• Estimated standard deviations — Ascent uses the Median Absolute Deviation (MAD) method to identify outliers automatically. By default, values that are more than 3.5 estimated standard deviations from the estimated mean are rejected. You can adjust this outlier rejection value here.


429

Statistics options


430

Create Statistical Alarm Templates

To create statistical alarm templates:

1. Click Alarms. 2. Select Templates > Edit all templates. 3. Click Add. 4. Select the General Settings tab. 5. Enter a name for this alarm template. 6. Tick the required checkboxes and populated the fields as required. 7. Select the Thresholds tab > Select the appropriate threshold units

from the dropdown field. 8. Click Add. 9. Populate the information fields in the Threshold editor to define the

first alarm threshold. 10. Click OK when you have finished.

NOTE: You can click Add again to define additional thresholds (Alert, Warning, etc).

11. Select the other tabs as required and enter the required information. 12. Click OK when you have finished entering data — Your new template

is selected in the Alarm Templates window. 13. Click OK to finish creating the template and close this window. 14. Select a new template in the Alarm Wizard window to apply it to

your alarms.

TIP: Use SHIFT or CTRL to select more than one alarm in the list.

15. Select Alarms > Add. 16. Select your new template in the Alarm Templates window. 17. Click Select. 18. Tick the checkbox schedule entries you wish to apply the alarms to. 19. Click OK to apply the template to your alarms — The Alarm Summary

window displays the details of the threshold calculations. 20. Click OK. 21. Click Close to finish.


431

Edit Statistical Alarm Templates

Any changes you make to the generation parameters of a statistical alarm template will affect all alarms that use those parameters. The change will be applied when next you update those alarms. If you only wish to change a few alarms that share the same alarm template, you can edit these individually or create a new set of generation parameters and apply these to your selected alarms.

MORE: See Create statistical alarm template.

NOTE: You cannot change the frequency range of an alarm by changing its generation parameters. For information on modifying frequency, see the topics in Section 5 on editing alarms.

To edit statistical alarm templates:

1. Click Alarms. 2. Select Templates > Edit all templates. 3. Select the alarm template you wish to change. 4. Select Edit. 5. Click OK to confirm. 6. Click OK when you have finished making changes. 7. Click OK to confirm you wish to update the alarms — The Alarm

Summary window displays the new details of your alarm template. 8. Click OK to accept or Cancel to discard these changes.

NOTE: Cancelling enables you to try out different settings to see the effect these will have on your alarm thresholds.

9. Click OK then Close to finish.


432

Machine Families

Similar machines exhibit similar vibration patterns. You can compare the vibration patterns of similar machines to learn more about how the machines are expected to vibrate. This makes it easier to detect when they are vibrating abnormally.

A machine family is a user-defined group of machines that have similar characteristics and are used for the same purpose. For example, if you have several identical blowers made by the same manufacturer and all operating under similar loads in similar environments, you can classify these as belonging to the same machine family.

Ascent lets you define machine families so spectra from all machines in that family can be compared and used to generate suitable alarm thresholds.

NOTE: We recommend you use Statistics by history to set up statistically-generated alarms. Statistics by family is useful if you have no history of machine data because it enables you to use statistics after just one single survey.


433

You should consider the following criteria when grouping machines into families:

• Machine type — You can group blowers that perform the same task, pumps with other pumps, etc. Note that you should not group machines of the same type if they operate differently (e.g. horizontal pumps and vertical pumps) as their vibratory patterns will be very different.

• Size/capacity — Machines must be of a similar size/capacity to each other. They must also operate under a similar load.

• Installation/mounting — Machines must have similar supporting framework and be mounted in a similar fashion (e.g. same base material).

• Machine age — An old machine may exhibit a very different vibratory pattern than a newer machine. This could be due to regular wear and tear rather than fault conditions. You should compare spectral patterns closely before including old and newer machines in the same family.

• Location — Machines must be spaced a similar distance from other sources of vibration that may affect their vibration levels.

• Environment — The temperature and humidity of the machines' operating environments must be similar.

• Physical properties — Machines must have similar mass, rotor stiffness, damping, etc and exhibit similar sensitivity to load changes.

NOTE: This list is not exhaustive. Use your own knowledge of the machines studied to look for points of similarity that can be used to group machines into families.


434

Create Machine Families

Machines must be in the same database in order to be grouped together as a family. However, they do not need to be in the same site or folder. A machine can be a member of more than one family at the same time.

To create a machine family:

1. Select Edit > Edit Machine Families — The top half of the Machine Family editor shows all the machine families in the database. When you select a machine family, the bottom half of the screen shows all machines that belong to that family. You can double-click one of these to select that machine in the navigator.

2. Click Add. 3. Enter a name for the new machine family. 4. Select Machines in this family are used for statistics if you want to

use this family to generate statistical alarms. 5. Click OK — Your new family displays in the upper half of the screen.

Creating a machine family

Edit Machine Family

To edit a machine family:

1. Select the machine family. 2. Click Edit. 3. Edit the family as required. 4. Click OK.


435

Delete Machine Family

To delete a machine family:

1. Select the machine family. 2. Click Remove. 3. Click OK to confirm the deletion.

Add / Remove Machine from Family

To add a machine to a family:

1. Select the machine in the navigator. 2. Tick a checkbox beside any machine families that you want the

machine to belong to.

Remove Machine from Family

To remove a machine from a family:

1. Select the machine in the navigator.

NOTE: In the Machine Family editor, any families this machine belongs to will have a tick beside them.

2. Untick a checkbox to remove the machine from this family.

Section 12 — Administrative Tasks

436


This section explains how to complete the various administrative tasks in Ascent.

Set up Ascent for Access by Non-Administrators

You can run Ascent without an administrator account, but doing so requires changes to Windows security permissions. Because administrator permissions are required to perform this task you may need to ask your IT support staff to make these changes on your behalf.

To set up Ascent so that non-administrative users can access it:

1. Log into Windows using an administrator level account. 2. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Commtest using Windows Explorer. 3. Right-click the Start button > Select Explore. 4. Right-click the Ascent folder > Select Properties. 5. Select the Security tab.

NOTE: if the Security tab is not visible, you must disable Simple file sharing in Windows Explorer. Select Tools > Folder Options from the main Windows Explorer menu. Select the Views tab. Scroll to the bottom of the Advanced settings list > Deselect Use simple file sharing (Recommended).

6. Select Users from the Group or user names list. 7. Tick the Allow checkbox beside Full Control under the Permissions

for Users list. 8. Click OK. 9. Propagate the new permissions to all subfolders if you are prompted

do so. 10. Select Start > Run > REGEDIT to open the Windows Registry editor. 11. Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\CLLC. 12. Right-click the CLLC folder > Select Permissions. 13. Select Users. 14. Select Full Control - Allow. 15. Click OK — Ascent now functions correctly under a non-

administrator Windows account.


437

Unlock vbOnline Device Features

Ascent is controlled by the CLK licensing system.

MORE: See Software Licensing.

However, vbOnline device hardware capabilities are managed by a separate licensing system that does not use CLK keys. This alternative licensing system unlocks licenses contained in your software files or the Commtest License Server. Unlocking these licenses provides additional channels on vbOnline devices. You can use this feature if you wish to add support for extra channels after your original purchase (up to the maximum allowed by the device's physical hardware).

If you wish to add this feature, please contact your distributor or [email protected] for details.


438

Unlock Additional vbOnline Channels

To add channels to your vbOnline device you must obtain an unlock license from us. This license is typically downloaded from the Commtest License Server then installed and activated using Ascent. However, if required, it can be provided to you as a standalone license file.

To unlock additional channels on your vbOnline device:

1. Connect your vbOnline instrument and PC using the supplied Ethernet communications cable.

2. Open Ascent on the PC. 3. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 4. Double-click your vbOnline device — The VB Device Properties panel

opens.

TIP: Click Add > Online Device if your instrument is not listed. Select your instrument > Click Add vbOnline. See Adding a vbX, Ranger or vbOnline Instrument to Ascent for more information.

5. Select the Tasks tab. 6. Click the Unlock button beside Unlock Additional Channels. 7. Select the Channels and Tachs tab. 8. Use EITHER of these methods to access your locate your license file:

• Click Check Web to download the license file.

NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to download a license file from the Commtest License Server. If you do not have access to the Internet, contact us to request your license upgrade as a standalone .vuf format file.

• Click Load From File if you have been provided with a standalone license file > Navigate to the file location (.vuf format) > Select the file > Click Open — Details of the unlock license display in the Information field. Contact us if any of the details listed are incorrect.

9. Click Apply — The license is installed automatically. Your new instrument channels are now active.

NOTE: The number of instrument channels available displays on the 'VB Device Properties' panel (Tasks tab) beside the Unlock button.


439

Unlock additional vbOnline channels


440

Add SDI Support to 16-channel vbOnline

To add support for the Serial Data Input (SDI) feature in Ascent to a 16-channel vbOnline, you will need an unlock license from us. This license is typically downloaded from the Commtest License Server, then installed and activated using Ascent. However, if required, it can be provided to you as a standalone license file.

To add serial data input (SDI) to a 16-channel vbOnline:

1. Connect your 16-channel vbOnline and PC using the supplied Ethernet communications cable.

2. Open Ascent on the PC. 3. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 4. Double-click the 16-channel vbOnline.

NOTE: If your instrument is not listed, click Add > Online Device. Select the instrument you wish to add. Click Add vbOnline. See Add Instrument to Ascent for more information.

5. Select the Tasks tab. 6. Click the Unlock button beside Unlock Additional Channels. 7. Select the Serial Data Input tab. 8. Use EITHER of these methods to locate and select the license file:

• Click Check Web to download the license file.

NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to download a license file from the Commtest Web Server. If you do not have access to the Internet, please contact [email protected] to request your license upgrade as a standalone .sdi file.

• Click the Load From File button if you have been provided with a standalone license file > Locate and select the file (.sdi format) > Click Open — The details of the unlock license display in the information field.

NOTE: If any of the details are incorrect, please contact [email protected] for assistance.

9. Click Apply — The license is installed automatically. You can now use the SDI Input feature with your 16-channel vbOnline device.

MORE: See the Serial Data Input section for details on configuration.


441

NOTE: The license status of the SDI feature is displayed on the VB devices panel beside to the Unlock button. When disabled, the text will read 'Serial Data Input is Not available on this device'. When activated, this text will read 'Serial Data Input is enabled via Macom and Modbus'.

Adding serial data input support to your 16-channel vbOnline

Create and Manage User Accounts


System administrators can create user accounts that are password-enabled and have different levels of access to the Ascent database. Only the person logged in as the system administrator can create user accounts.

As a system administrator, you can change your password. However, you cannot delete or change the:

• Default login name, SYSDBA. • Rights of this login name.

This is to prevent you accidentally locking yourself out of Ascent.


442

The user permissions system in Ascent has been enhanced. This feature is particularly useful for larger organisations that have staff with different roles who access databases that are stored on a network.

NOTE: If you are the only person in your organisation using Ascent, the user permissions system will not be particularly relevant to you.

The following user levels are available:

• No Access — User has no access. This level is automatically assigned to a user until you specify a different level for them.

• Read Only — User can view data, including reports, charts, and various settings in Ascent but cannot change the content of the database. However, they can create their own database and modify that as required.

• Update — User has Read Only access but can load new data from the instrument into Ascent. The user has the same access as Read-Only users, with the added ability to manage devices, and send or receive data between Ascent and one or more instruments. Update users cannot change the existing database folder structure.

• Power User — User has full control over the database. They have similar access as a SYSDBA user. However they cannot query or modify the security database. They also do NOT have access to back up and restore or rebuild a database.

• SYSDBA — User has full control, including the ability to set up users and change the default SYSDBA password (if required).

TIP: If you change the default SYSDBA password, ensure you make a note of your new password as this is not easily recoverable if you forget it.


443

The user permissions system caters for varying access to each database. This means the system administrator in your organisation can grant a user full access to a particular database and restricted access to another database.

NOTE: A user with limited access can still create their own database and modify this as required.

Ascent user permission levels


444

Example workflow for setting up user permissions

Here is an example of a typical workflow for setting up user permissions:

1. The SYSDBA user in your organisation creates user accounts for each person using Ascent.

TIP: Contact Commtest Support if you do not know who this is.

2. The SYSDBA user in your organisation assigns appropriate permission levels to each user for each database: • A Read Only user might be a Machine Operator or Plant

Manager. • An Update user might be a data collector. • A Power user might be a vibration analyst.

3. The SYSDBA user in your organisation gives all users their login details.

4. The Power user in your organisation creates a database to monitor a site.

5. Each user logs into Ascent and operates according to the permission level specified for them for each database.

Set up user account

When you a create user account, it will be available regardless of the database you select. However, you can specify the required permission level for each database. For example, John might have Read Only access to one database, but Update access to another.

To set up users with different permissions for a database:

1. Open the required database. 2. Select File > Database > User Management. 3. Click Add User. 4. Enter a username and password for the user in the fields provided. 5. Click OK. 6. Select or right-click a user you have created > Click ONE of these

buttons to specify the permission levels for the selected user: • Read Only • Update • Power User

7. Click Close when you have finished applying permission levels to the user accounts you have created — Your changes are automatically saved.


445

Adding a user


446

Specifying the appropriate permission level for the selected user


447

Log on to Ascent

If your administrator has created a user account for you, you will need to log in and out of Ascent. When you do this, your login details and permission level will display in the bottom right corner of the main Ascent window.

Seeing which user is logged into Ascent

To log into Ascent:

1. Open Ascent. 2. Use EITHER of these methods to log on:

• Select File > Database > Log On.

• Click the arrow beside the Database button > Select Log On.

3. Enter your username and password in the fields provided.

TIP: Contact your system administrator if you do NOT have these details.

4. Tick Remember password if you do NOT wish to re-enter your login details the next time you open Ascent.

NOTE: If you log out of Ascent, rather than close it, you will need to enter your login details the next time you open Ascent.

5. Click Log On. 6. Open or create a database as required.


448

Logging into Ascent

Log out of Ascent

To log out of Ascent:

1. Open Ascent. 2. Use EITHER of these methods to log off:

• Select File > Database > Log Off.

• Click the arrow beside the Database button > Select Log Off.


449

Configure Ascent Directories

You can use the Setup window to manage or change the paths of the Ascent directories. This window displays when you start the Ascent setup program. You can also access it by pressing CTRL while Ascent opens.

You can use the Setup window to change the location of your database directory, backup, files, and more. If you want to make changes without opening Ascent, click the Don't run Ascent button.

Configuring Ascent directories

You can configure the following directories:

• Database Directory — The database directory is the file where the actual Firebird database is stored. This is the same as your site database.

• Database List File Directory — The database list file directory is where the list of known databases is stored.

NOTE: If you are the system administrator you can maintain a master copy of the database list file in a read-only location on the network. You can then control the list of databases that displays in the dropdown field on all client computers in a multi-user environment.


450

• Backup Directory — The backup directory is where the .backup files are stored when you back up a database.

MORE: See Backing up a Database.

• Scheme File Storage Directory — The scheme file storage directory is where the .scheme files are stored. These files contain the information for the various schemes. The three system-defined schemes are stored in Ascent. If you delete them, they will automatically return to their default states. You can send .scheme files to other Ascent users. If they place the file in their scheme file storage directory, it will be available the next time they start Ascent.

MORE: See Schemes.

• HTML Temporary Directory — The HTML temporary directory is where temporary HTML files are stored when reports are generated.

• .vbz Files — .vbz files are used for importing and exporting. They usually contain an entire folder of information, however you can export individual items in the navigator tree by tagging them first. When you double-click a .vb or .vbz file, Ascent will ask whether you wish to import the file into the database. By default, exported files are compressed (.vbz) to reduce file size. However, you can export uncompressed (.vb) files by selecting this option from the dropdown field during the export process.

• .fdb Files — .fdb files are Firebird database files. This is the default format used when you create a new database.

• Site Database — Each piece of data in the database must be identified with a universally unique combination of numbers. You can accomplish this using folders, machines, points, and measurement locations by including the site identification number in the internal identifier for the item. For data such as parameter sets, axis names, and other non-structural data, an additional identifier is included to identify the database in the site that this data was created in. This enables multiple installations of Ascent at a particular site to share data types without the risk of conflicting identifiers. This combination of a site number and site database number is called a Site Database. You can have more than one site database.


451

File Types

You might come across the following file types: • .scheme Files — .scheme files store the settings for your color

schemes (e.g. Black and White or High Contrast). When you double-click a .scheme file, it is installed and selected within Ascent.

MORE: See Schemes to learn more about using schemes.

• .av Files — The views that display on the Chart and Report buttons are stored in .av files. When you double-click a .av file, Ascent installs that view and opens it.

• .hex Files — .hex files store update files for the firmware in your instrument. When you double-click a .hex file, Ascent prepares to send this update file into your instrument. This is equivalent to using the standard Proflash function.

NOTE: This does not include vbX instruments.

• .mpf Files — .mpf files store firmware update files for SCOUT/vbX instruments such as the vb5, vb7/SCOUT100, and vbBalancer devices.


452

Upgrade Instrument using Proflash

We periodically releases updated versions of the firmware on your instrument. These firmware upgrades enable you to take advantage of product enhancements and new features that were created after your instrument was purchased. To reprogram an instrument with newer firmware you will need to PROFLASH the instrument using a new firmware file.

WARNING! PROFLASHING an instrument restores the instrument to the factory default state and deletes all stored information. This includes folders, routes, machines, parameter sets, recordings, and balance jobs. If you wish to save any of this information, you will need to transfer all your folders to Ascent before PROFLASHING your instrument.

To upgrade the firmware on your instrument:

1. Check whether a newer firmware version is available, visit our website at www.commtest.com.

2. Check whether the firmware file version number on the website is more recent than your current instrument firmware.

TIP: When you switch your instrument on, you will see the firmware version in the middle of the screen (Firmware vX.xx).

3. Download the updated firmware file. 4. Proceed with the PROFLASH.


453

Proflash SCOUT / vbSeries Portable Instrument

To proflash a SCOUT/vbSeries portable instrument:

1. Switch your instrument on. 2. Connect the battery charger and switch it on. 3. Use the communications cable supplied to connect your instrument

to your PC. 4. Transfer any information stored on your instrument that you wish to

save to Ascent. 5. Open Ascent. 6. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 7. Double-click your instrument.

TIP: You can identify your instrument by its serial number.

NOTE: If your SCOUT/vbX series instrument is not listed, it has not yet been added to Ascent. See Adding an Instrument to Ascent to learn how to do this.

8. Use EITHER of these methods depending on the type of instrument you wish to proflash:

• SCOUT/vbX — Click the Proflash button under the Setup tab on the vbX Properties window.

• vbX000 — Click the Proflash button under the Tasks tab. The Proflash window displays, listing the available firmware version(s) stored on your PC.

NOTE: If Ascent locates more than one firmware file in the selected folder, it will list all versions present. The recommended vbX version will be highlighted at the top of the list. The text 'Recommended' will also display beside the recommended firmware revision under the Suitability column. You will need to select the recommended/suitable vbX000 update manually.

9. Ensure the required firmware version is selected. 10. Use EITHER of these methods, depending on the type of instrument

you are using: • SCOUT/vbx — Click Proflash. • vbX000 — Click Proflash now.

NOTE: Proflashing your instrument takes approximately one to two minutes. You will see a series of progress messages and then be prompted to reset your instrument. IMPORTANT! Do not interrupt the Proflash process as this will damage your instrument.


454

Apply License for Flex Feature

Once you have purchased a license for a Flex feature, you can apply the license and start using the feature. To this:

1. Connect your instrument to your computer. 2. Select Edit > Manage > vbInstruments. 3. Select your instrument in the Manage Instruments window. 4. Click Configure. 5. Select the Tasks tab. 6. Click Unlock in the Unlock License File area. 7. Locate and select the license file you have purchase and stored on

your computer. 8. Click Open.

Unlocking an extra feature you have purchased


455

Bulk Tasks

You can use the Bulk Tasks feature to perform tasks on several instruments at once. For example, you might wish to proflash all the instruments in a database simultaneously. This feature is useful for environments that contain large numbers of vbOnline or Ranger devices.

To use the bulk tasks feature:

1. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 2. Select all devices you wish to update or modify from the devices list. 3. Select the required instruments.

TIP: Use the CTRL key to select multiple instruments. NOTE: The number of devices you select will show on the Configure

button as they are selected or deselected.

4. Click Configure — The Bulk Tasks configuration sequence begins. Any selected instruments that have not already been added to the Ascent database are added now.

5. Select a task in the Bulk Tasks window. 6. Click Start — The required task is performed for all instruments

selected. If you are proflashing devices, you will be asked for the proflash file's location.


456

Machine Speed Settings Utility

Ascent databases created before the Ascent 2010 release (database versions 208 and below) store running speed values at the schedule entry level. Point level multipliers are then used to calculate correct shaft speeds based on tachometer readings or manually entered machine RPM. This technique, while functional, typically required the unnecessary and repetitive entry of speed data. This situation was corrected in the Ascent 2010 software release to allow default machine-wide speeds to be entered at the higher machine level. RPM or Linear Speed at individual points is then calculated by directly entering an RPM multiplier value relative to the main machine speed as before. Alternatively, for Linear Speed machines, this is achieved by entering the diameter of the roller or pulley (to calculate point RPM) and an RPM multiplier.

This usability improvement necessitated an increase in the number of fields used by the Ascent Firebird database. This changed the database structure. Consequently, older databases that do not contain these new fields (e.g. archived database backups) do not function correctly in newer versions of Ascent until they have been upgraded and these missing fields have been added and populated.

During the database upgrade process, several new default machine speed and point multiplier values can be estimated accurately using existing schedule entries and multipliers. However, some of these estimates will be based on potentially inaccurate averaged values and should be carefully checked for accuracy. To help with this, a small upgrade utility has been added to Ascent. This tool enables you to view machines containing ambiguous speed and multiplier readings, and correct the values entered as required. The upgrade utility is typically only used when transitioning an older database to the new database structure. However, this utility may also be used as a general purpose way to edit existing speed values in a previously upgraded database.

NOTE: When you open a database that was created before the Ascent 2010 release that has not already been upgraded, the database upgrade utility will be display automatically.


457

To access the upgrade utility manually:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to open the utility: • Select Edit > Edit Machine Speed Settings.

• Right-click a machine, point, or location in the navigator list > Select Set Speed > Click Edit Mulitpliers in the Set RPM for Recordings window.

2. Select individual machines from the left navigator panel — The current default speed of the selected machine and its speed type (RPM-based or Linear) display near the top of the information panel on the right.

3. Select a radio button beside the Speed Enter field to change the speed type.

4. Edit the machine's default speed in the field provided (if required) — Linear speed units display in the format currently configured under Options > Unit Preferences > Linear Speed.

NOTE: If the Show Legacy Schedule Entry Speed checkbox is ticked, rows that contain values that have been estimated are highlighted in yellow. You will need to validate these values and correct them if necessary. Once you have edited a machine value, the machine name in the navigator list displays in bold.

5. Double-click the appropriate row in the Point Multiplier and Point Speed columns to edit the point multiplier and speed values of individual points > Enter a new value.

NOTE: Multipliers and speeds are rounded to the four most significant figures.

NOTE: By default, the values you can edit display in bold blue text.

6. Double-click a row in the Diameter column to edit the diameter of individual rollers and pulleys for Linear Speed machines > Enter a new diameter value.

7. Navigate from machine to machine and repeat the steps above for each as required.

8. Click Accept All Changes when you have checked all machine speeds and corrected these if necessary — This commits the machine values to the upgraded database. A notification displays when the changes have been saved.

9. Click Close to exit the utility.


458

Using the Machine Speed Settings utility

DUNS Numbers

DUNS numbers are assigned automatically in Ascent. They are used as primary database keys and cannot be changed manually.


459

Set up Instrument Print Function

You can configure your SCOUT100, SCOUT140, vb7, or vb8 instrument to print balancing reports to USB-connected or PCL-enabled network printers. Configuring this feature requires an in-depth understanding of your network and printer configurations. If you are unfamiliar with these, you may require assistance from your network administrator or technical support department.

NOTE: The steps below assume you have already added your instrument to the instrument database in Ascent.

To set up the print function for your instrument:

1. Connect your instrument to the Ascent host PC using the communications cable provided.

2. Switch your instrument on. 3. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 4. Double-click your instrument. 5. Select the Printer tab. 6. Click the arrow beside the Printer Enter field > Select a printer or

language type.

NOTE: PCL is the most widely supported printer language. Check your printer documentation to determine which option is most appropriate.

7. Select EITHER of these printer connection types from the Port field: • Select USB for printers connected to the PC via USB. • Select Network Printer for printers accessible via your network

(through a print server) — The Network Printer Path field becomes available.

8. Enter the printer's network address. 9. Use the Color/Mono field to choose printing in color or black and

white. 10. Select a paper sheet type.

NOTE: The dimensions of the paper type selected display in the Size area.

11. Select the required page orientation. 12. Click Apply — The settings are transferred to your instrument. 13. Click vbX Print Test to print a test page and check your

configuration is correct.


460

14. Tick the Show Company Logo checkbox to have your instrument's printed balance reports configured to display a specific company logo letterhead.

15. Click the browse button to locate and select the image to use as the letterhead graphic for the report.

NOTE: This image must be in .gif image format. It must NOT be greater than 300 pixels wide x 225 pixels high.

16. Click Yes to confirm you wish to overwrite your instrument's current image or No to abort.

Setting up the print function

Network



461

Connect to Network Database

To connect to a network database:

1. Click Open. 2. Click the Change button. 3. Select the Network Connection tab in the Select Database window. 4. Select TCP/IP in the Connection type dropdown field. 5. Enter the server name, IP address, or DNS name of the computer

that contains the database in the Server field. 6. Enter the path to the database from the server's perspective in the

Path field.

NOTE: The Firebird server application must be installed on any PC being used as an Ascent database server on your network. I.e. this application must be installed on the computer housing the .fdb format Ascent database. Port 3050 must also be open in any installed software- or hardware-based network firewalls. The Firebird server standalone installer is included on your Ascent installation CD-ROM. You can also download it at http://www.commtest.com/.

7. Click Test to check whether the database can be accessed. 8. Click OK to connect.

Connecting to a network database


462

Manage Multi-user Access

On a network, several users can access and change the same database at once. Whenever you make a change (e.g. add or delete an item), the

Save button becomes available. You can click Save to commit your changes to the database.

To revoke a change you have saved, select File > Undo \ Revert.

NOTE: There is only one level of undo. You cannot return to a state that existed several saves ago.

NOTE: If a second user is working with the same database elsewhere on the network, the Refresh button will display in their toolbar when you click Save. This indicates that changes have been made to the database. When the second user clicks Refresh, their view of the database is synchronized with yours and they will be able to see the changes you have made.

NOTE: The second user can also select the dropdown arrow beside the Refresh button to configure an automatic refresh interval. You can set the automatic refresh intervals to one hour, 10 minutes, or every minute.


463

Deadlock / Conflict / Overwrite Protection

Ascent prevents deadlocking and database conflicts by not allowing users to change the same piece of data at the same time. If one user makes changes to the database that conflict with what a second user is doing, they will receive a message advising them that the second user needs to save their changes. Once the second user has committed their changes to the database using Save, the first user can click Refresh and make their changes again.

Section 13 — Troubleshooting

464


This section details some possible problems you might encounter with Ascent and how to resolve these.

Troubleshoot USB Communications

If the version of Ascent and your instrument firmware that you are using was released before 2009, you may occasionally experience difficulty communicating with your instrument when using a USB connection. This usually indicates a communications conflict or firewall activation. We recommend you upgrade to the latest release of Ascent which includes a Plug and Play USB driver.

Alternatively, the following steps might resolve the conflict:

1. Connect your instrument and PC using the USB cable supplied. 2. Switch your instrument on. 3. Open Ascent. 4. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments. 5. Double-click your instrument.

TIP: You can use the serial number to identify your instrument.

NOTE: If your SCOUT/vbX series instrument is not listed, this is because it has not yet been added to the instrument database in Ascent. See Adding an Instrument to Ascent to learn how to do this.

6. Check your instrument's IP address in the field provided.

7. Press Options on your instrument.

8. Press Comms.

9. Ensure the IP listed beside the USB button matches the IP address in Ascent — If the IP addresses do not match, change the address in the Properties window to match your instrument IP

address > Press and hold + to restart your instrument > Close the Properties window > Try to connect to your instrument again. If you are still unable to communicate with your instrument, temporarily disable any firewalls. If communication is restored, add a firewall exception for Ascent (masvb32.exe in the Program Files\Commtest\Ascent folder on your PC) or open port 13000.


465

Upgrade Database Generates ISC Error

When you upgrade a Firebird database while upgrading to a newer version of Ascent, you might receive an error message if more than one person is currently connected to the database. To resolve this:

1. You can upgrade the database normally using EITHER of these methods: • Close all instances of Ascent that are communicating with the

database (local or network). • Restart the Firebird database server:

a. Select Start > Run from the Windows menu or press Start (Windows flag key) + R — The Run Windows interface opens.

b. Enter services.msc in the Open field. c. Click OK — The Services window opens.

TIP: You can also access the Services window using the Windows Control Panel's Administrative Tools.

d. Right-click the Firebird Server > Select Restart. 2. Open Ascent. 3. Proceed with the database upgrade.

Resolving an issue by upgrading a database

Contact Technical Support

If you have any problems, please contact Commtest Support for assistance at [email protected].

We also provide a searchable knowledge base of frequently asked questions (FAQ) on our website — www.commtest.com. Click the Frequently Asked Questions link under the Support menu to access the knowledge base.

Index

466

Index A

Acceleration power level ........................................................................................................................ 140 spectrum amplitude..................................................................................................... 141 waveform amplitude ................................................................................................... 141

Advanced Reporting System configuring ........................................................................................................................... 84 creating a machine assessment report ............................................................... 85 publishing ............................................................................................................................. 90 view report ........................................................................................................................... 88

Alarm alarm report ................................................................................................... 80, 205, 215 applying templates to ................................................................................................. 227 band ..................................................................................................................................... 196 drawing on a chart .................................................................................................. 199 editing ...................................................................................................................199, 201 exceeding ..................................................................................................................... 205 hiding/displaying ...................................................................................................... 201 peak ................................................................................................................................. 197 power .............................................................................................................................. 198 trending ......................................................................................................................... 208

checking alarm status ................................................................................................ 194 envelope ............................................................................................................................. 211 adding to a chart ...................................................................................................... 212 editing ............................................................................................................................. 213 exceeding ..................................................................................................................... 215 hiding/displaying ...................................................................................................... 213 margins, changing ................................................................................................... 212 trending ......................................................................................................................... 217

global editing of.............................................................................................................. 228 ISO standard alarms .................................................................................................... 383 overall RMS ....................................................................................................................... 218 statistical ............................................................................................................................ 398

Alarm templates .................................................................................................................. 221 applying ....................................................................................................................221, 226 creating ............................................................................................................................... 221 deleting ............................................................................................................................... 230 editing .................................................................................................................................. 228

Alarm wizard ......................................................................................................................... 417

Index

467

Archiving items ....................................................................................................................... 66 Ascent configuring directories................................................................................................ 449 locating the database file ............................................................................................ 23 locating the executable file ......................................................................................... 28 System Requirements .......................................................................................................2

Attached File Schedule Entry ........................................................................................ 245 Auto save ................................................................................................................................... 59 Auto-scaling .......................................................................................................................... 144

B

Backing up the database ............................................................................................... 343 backup directory .......................................................................................................... 450

Balancing report..................................................................................................................... 81 Band alarms .......................................................................................................................... 196 adding to a chart ........................................................................................................... 199 editing ........................................................................................................................199, 201 exceeding .......................................................................................................................... 205 hiding/displaying ........................................................................................................... 201 peak ...................................................................................................................................... 197 power ................................................................................................................................... 198 trending .............................................................................................................................. 208

Baseline recordings ........................................................................................................... 273 displaying on the vb ..................................................................................................... 273 including in views .......................................................................................................... 135 removing from the vb ................................................................................................. 273 setting ........................................................................................................................135, 273 update before send ...................................................................................................... 273 use last measurement if no baseline .................................................................. 273

Bearing adding a bearing to ......................................................................................................... 52 defining your own ............................................................................................................ 54 finding in the archive ................................................................................................... 290 interchange bearing ....................................................................................................... 52

Bode plots .....................................................................................................................153, 178 Build mode ................................................................................................................................ 39 Bulk tasks ................................................................................................................................ 455

C

Charts adding on-chart remarks .......................................................................................... 126 changing colours of ...........................................................................................186, 187

Index

468

customizing the scale ................................................................................................. 144 displaying multiple recordings ............................................................................... 121 displaying orders/Hz .................................................................................................... 129 displaying revolutions ................................................................................................. 129 emailing offsite ............................................................................................................... 160 modes .................................................................................................................................. 123 plotting data ..................................................................................................................... 111 printing ................................................................................................................................ 184 trend charts ...................................................................................................................... 160 overall RMS .................................................................................................................. 218 peak band alarms .................................................................................................... 208 power band alarms ................................................................................................. 208

using cursors on ............................................................................................................. 114 waterfall ............................................................................................................................. 123 depth/direction .......................................................................................................... 123 reverse plot order ..................................................................................................... 123

waveforms ........................................................................................................................ 136 zooming and panning ................................................................................................. 112

Commtest Bearing Archive............................................................................................... 52 Compressed files ............................................................................................................... 450 Copying navigator items.................................................................................................... 43 to multiple locations ....................................................................................................... 57

CPM, displaying frequency as ...................................................................................... 142 Creation palette ...................................................................................................................... 30 Crest factor ............................................................................................................................ 138 Cursors ..................................................................................................................................... 114 snapping to a peak ....................................................................................................... 116

D

Data structure ......................................................................................................................... 21 Data thinning ........................................................................................................................ 336 Database .................................................................................................................................... 21 backing up...............................................................................................................343, 450 creating .................................................................................................................................. 34 deadlock protection ..................................................................................................... 462 directory ............................................................................................................................ 449 factory default.................................................................................................................... 34 multi-user access, managing ................................................................................. 462 optimizing the performance of ....................................................................354, 356 rebuilding ........................................................................................................................... 356 reducing the size of ............................................................................................336, 356 restoring ............................................................................................................................. 353

Index

469

selecting another ................................................................................................... 38, 461 storage location ..................................................................................................... 23, 449 transferring data between importing/exporting ................................................................................................ 294

using multiple databases ............................................................................................. 38 Demodulation ....................................................................................................................... 263 analyzing data ................................................................................................................ 266 setup..................................................................................................................................... 264

Design mode ......................................................................................................................... 379 Displacement power level ........................................................................................................................ 140 spectrum amplitude..................................................................................................... 141 waveform amplitude ................................................................................................... 141

Drag and drop ......................................................................................................................... 61

E

Envelope alarms .................................................................................................................. 211 adding to a chart ........................................................................................................... 212 editing .................................................................................................................................. 213 exceeding .......................................................................................................................... 215 hiding/displaying ........................................................................................................... 213 margins, changing ........................................................................................................ 212 trending .............................................................................................................................. 217

Example workflow for setting up user permissions ......................................... 444 Exporting files ....................................................................................................................... 294 compressed files........................................................................................................... 450

F

Fault frequencies ................................................................................................................ 129 defining customized frequencies .......................................................................... 132 displaying on charts ..................................................................................................... 129 nudging ............................................................................................................................... 132

Filter, Navigator ...................................................................................................................... 62 Folder ........................................................................................................................................... 21 creating .................................................................................................................................. 35 deleting .................................................................................................................................. 36 importing/exporting ..................................................................................................... 294 maximum number in Ascent ...................................................................................... 21 opening .................................................................................................................................. 37 sending to the vb .............................................................................................................. 72

Index

470

G

Gear adding to a point .............................................................................................................. 54

Generation parameters ................................................................................................... 416 creating ............................................................................................................................... 430 editing .................................................................................................................................. 431

GMT, timezones ................................................................................................................... 330 Graphics file, creating....................................................................................................... 160 Greenwich meridian time ............................................................................................... 330

H

Hz, displaying frequency as .......................................................................................... 142

I

Importing files ....................................................................................................................... 294 compressed files........................................................................................................... 450 XML........................................................................................................................................ 303

Instruments set vbX IP address ............................................................................................................ 71 vbX send folders to the instrument ............................................................................. 72 send folders to the software ................................................................................. 74

ISO standard alarms ......................................................................................................... 383

K

Keyboard shortcuts ........................................................................................................... 190 Keypad schedule entry .................................................................................................... 242 associating with process variables ...................................................................... 261 editing .................................................................................................................................. 245

L

Language, choosing a ......................................................................................................... 19 Library editing .................................................................................................................................. 287 storing components in ................................................................................................ 287

Licensing Dongle .......................................................................................................................................4 Hardware Dongle ........................................................................................................ 7, 15 software licensing ...............................................................................................................3 Uninstalling .......................................................................................................................... 14 unlocking channels ...................................................................................................... 438

Index

471

upgrade license features ............................................................................................. 13 Linear speed support ........................................................................................................ 270 Log into Ascent .................................................................................................................... 447 Log out of Ascent ................................................................................................................ 448 Logging on.............................................................................................................................. 441 Long time waveforms ...................................................................................................... 140

M

Machine adding an image to ......................................................................................................... 50 copying ....................................................................................................................... 43, 287 creating ....................................................................................................................... 39, 287 storing.................................................................................................................................. 287

Machine Builder Wizard .................................................................................................. 383 Machine families ................................................................................................................. 432 adding machines to ..................................................................................................... 435 creating ............................................................................................................................... 434 deleting ............................................................................................................................... 434 editing .................................................................................................................................. 434 family options .................................................................................................................. 420 removing machines from .......................................................................................... 435

MAD, median absolute deviation ............................................................................... 413 Manually entering vibration data............................................................................... 283 Mean .......................................................................................................................................... 412 Measurements archiving................................................................................................................................ 66 Recordings sorting most recent first ........................................................................................................... 61 oldest first ........................................................................................................................ 61

Multiple items, selecting ..................................................................................................... 66

N

Navigator copying items ..................................................................................................................... 43 filter .......................................................................................................................................... 62 list .............................................................................................................................................. 60 selecting items in .............................................................................................................. 66 sorting..................................................................................................................................... 61 tree ........................................................................................................................................... 59

Network connecting to................................................................................................................... 461

Notes

Index

472

archiving................................................................................................................................ 66

O

On-chart remarks adding.................................................................................................................................. 126 deleting ............................................................................................................................... 126 editing .................................................................................................................................. 126 spreading out .................................................................................................................. 126

OPC import ............................................................................................................................. 306 associating with process variables ...................................................................... 261

Orbit plots .....................................................................................................................153, 170 Orders, displaying on charts ......................................................................................... 129 Overall rms alarms ............................................................................................................. 218 creating ............................................................................................................................... 218 trending .............................................................................................................................. 218

P

Panning .................................................................................................................................... 112 Parameter set creating .................................................................................................................................. 44 editing ........................................................................................................................232, 237 orders-based ................................................................................................................... 236 removing unused sets ................................................................................................ 241 setting the parameters ............................................................................................... 232

Photo, adding to a machine ............................................................................................. 50 Point adding a bearing to ......................................................................................................... 52 adding a gear to................................................................................................................ 54 copying .................................................................................................................................. 43 creating a.............................................................................................................................. 41

Printing charts and reports ........................................................................................... 184 Process Variables........................................................................................... 242, 261, 306 PROFLASH ............................................................................................................................... 452 multiple instruments .................................................................................................... 455

R

Receive data from Server to Ascent ......................................................................... 305 Recordings archiving................................................................................................................................ 66 limiting number displayed in navigator ................................................................ 65 Recordings sorting most recent first ........................................................................................................... 61

Index

473

oldest first ........................................................................................................................ 61 Reports ........................................................................................................................................ 78 alarm ....................................................................................................................................... 80 automated ........................................................................................................................ 109 balancing .............................................................................................................................. 81 creating your own ......................................................................................................... 357 emailing offsite ............................................................................................................... 160 exception .............................................................................................................................. 81 last 8 measurements ...................................................................................................... 82 last measurement ............................................................................................................ 82 machine assessment ..................................................................................................... 83 printing ................................................................................................................................ 184 route ..................................................................................................................................... 106 routes due ......................................................................................................................... 106 structure ............................................................................................................................. 106

Restoring a database ....................................................................................................... 343 Reusing components ........................................................................................................ 287 Revolutions, displaying on charts .............................................................................. 129 Route creating .................................................................................................................................. 68 report ................................................................................................................................... 106 route entry............................................................................................................................ 68

RPM assigning the 1X value ................................................................................................ 128 creating data collector prompt .............................................................................. 272 updating ............................................................................................................................. 266

S

Save .............................................................................................................................................. 58 Schedule entry ............................................................................................................. 44, 232 average value .................................................................................................................. 249 creating .................................................................................................................................. 44 editing ........................................................................................................................232, 237 keypad ................................................................................................................................. 242 setting the parameters ............................................................................................... 232 tachometer ....................................................................................................................... 251

Schemes .................................................................................................................................. 186 customising/editing ..................................................................................................... 187 file storage directory ................................................................................................. 450 sending scheme files ................................................................................................. 450

Selecting multiple items ..................................................................................................... 66 Send data from Ascent to Server ............................................................................... 306

Index

474

Sensor calibration values .......................................................................................................... 280 editing ........................................................................................................................232, 280 settling times ................................................................................................................... 280 triaxial .................................................................................................................................. 279

Serial data input associating with process variables ...................................................................... 261

Serial port ................................................................................................................................... 72 Set up user account .......................................................................................................... 444 Shortcut keys ........................................................................................................................ 190 Site opening an entire site ................................................................................................. 288

Software Licensing...................................................................................................................3 Standard deviation ............................................................................................................ 412 Statistical alarms ................................................................................................................ 398 creating ............................................................................................................................... 403 deleting alarms ............................................................................................................... 403 envelopes........................................................................................................................... 426 generation parameters ....................................................................................402, 416 creating.......................................................................................................................... 430 editing ............................................................................................................................. 431

MAD, median absolute deviation .......................................................................... 413 mean .................................................................................................................................... 412 outliers .......................................................................................................................412, 413 overview ............................................................................................................................. 398 pre-defined alarms, using ......................................................................................... 403 standard deviation ....................................................................................................... 412 suspicious recordings ................................................................................................. 413 thresholds .......................................................................................................................... 422 updating ............................................................................................................................. 411

Statistical outliers .....................................................................................................412, 413 Storage capacity .................................................................................................................... 21 Suspicious recordings ...................................................................................................... 413

T

Tach pulses in Ascent ....................................................................................................... 278 Tagging exporting tagged items .............................................................................................. 294

Technical support ............................................................................................................... 465 Template machines ........................................................................................................... 322 child machine, creating .............................................................................................. 325 child machine, updating ............................................................................................ 325

Index

475

creating ............................................................................................................................... 323 exporting and importing ............................................................................................ 324 previewing ......................................................................................................................... 327 releasing ............................................................................................................................. 328

The Proven Method ............................................................................................................ 383 Timezones ............................................................................................................................... 330 changing ............................................................................................................................ 330

Trending ................................................................................................................................... 160 overall RMS alarms ....................................................................................................... 218 peak band alarms ......................................................................................................... 208 power band alarms ...................................................................................................... 208 single frequency ............................................................................................................. 167

Triaxial measurement setup ......................................................................................... 279

U

Undo ............................................................................................................................................. 58 Units of measurement setting preferences ...................................................................................................... 141

Upgrading .....................................................................................................................................2 User accounts....................................................................................................................... 441

V

vb instrument maintaining data integrity with Ascent ................................................................ 76 sending a folder to ........................................................................................................... 72

Velocity power level ........................................................................................................................ 140 spectrum amplitude..................................................................................................... 141 waveform amplitude ................................................................................................... 141

Views ......................................................................................................................................... 153 assigning keyboard shortcuts ................................................................................ 367 copying parts ................................................................................................................... 368 creating ............................................................................................................................... 357 deleting ............................................................................................................................... 382 design mode .................................................................................................................... 379 emailing offsite ............................................................................................................... 160 including baseline in .................................................................................................... 135 layout, designing............................................................................................................ 377 renaming............................................................................................................................ 357 reusing................................................................................................................................. 368 saving .................................................................................................................................. 369 selectors ............................................................................................................................. 370

Index

476

system defaults, restoring ........................................................................................ 369

W

Waterfall chart ..................................................................................................................... 123 depth/direction ............................................................................................................... 123 reverse plot order .......................................................................................................... 123

Waveform analysis ............................................................................................................ 136 audio playback ............................................................................................................... 138 converting to spectra .................................................................................................. 140 long time waveforms................................................................................................... 140 true peak to peak .......................................................................................................... 138

Z

Zooming ................................................................................................................................... 112